Revit Structure 2009

Imperial Tutorials

April 2008

©

2008 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ActiveShapes, Actrix, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Your World, Design Your World (design/logo), DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, EditDV, Education by Design, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, FBX, Filmbox, FMDesktop, Freewheel, GDX Driver, Gmax, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HOOPS, HumanIK, i-drop, iMOUT, Incinerator, IntroDV, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), LocationLogic, Lustre, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, MotionBuilder, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, Recognize, Render Queue, Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, SteeringWheels, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Bridge, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Syllabus, Visual Toolbox, Visual Tugboat, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Wiretap, and WiretapCentral The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner, Discreet, Fire, Flame, Flint, Frost, Inferno, Multi-Master Editing, River, Smoke, Sparks, Stone, and Wire All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Chapter 1

Understanding the Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Navigating the Revit Structure User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Performing Common Tasks in Revit Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Chapter 2

Express Workshops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Structural Modelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a New Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding New Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing/Linking a DWG File . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Column Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Structural Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Structural Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Structural Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Structural Beam Systems . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Structural Slab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copying Elements to Multiple Levels . . . . . . . . Adding Foundations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structural Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing/Linking a DWG File . . . . . . . . . . . Using a Detail Drawing as a Section View . . . . . . Placing a Detail in a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjusting Line Weights of Imported Details . . . . Creating a New Details Sheet from a Detail Library . Preparing Views for Detailing in a Section . . . . . Adding a Cantilever to a Slab . . . . . . . . . . . . Coping Beam Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Final Annotation and Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 . 19 . 20 . 21 . 24 . 27 . 32 . 35 . 47 . 49 . 55 . 59 . 62 . 63 . 65 . 66 . 70 . 73 . 75 . 79 . 82 . 84 . 98

v

Chapter 3

Modifying Project and System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Fill Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Object Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Line Patterns and Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Units of Measurement, Temporary Dimensions, and Detail Level Options . Modifying Project Browser Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Structural Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Choosing the Base Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Modifying Families and Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Views and View Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Structural Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Import/Export Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up Shared and Project Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Named Print Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 . 107 . 109 . 112 . 113 . 115 . 115 . 118 . 120 . 122 . 125 . 127 . 128 . 130 . 130 . 131 . 137 . 139 . 142 . 143 . 144 . 146

Chapter 4

Starting a New Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Importing/Linking Drawing Files . . . . . . . . . . Importing/Linking a 2D AutoCAD File . . . . Importing /Linking an AutoCAD Architecture Linking a Revit Architecture File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 . 149 . 151 . 154

Chapter 5

Creating a Structural Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Creating a Structural Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Grid Lines to the Imported Drawing . Adding Structural Columns . . . . . . . . . . Adding Horizontal Framing . . . . . . . . . . Adding Beam Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Composite Deck . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Bracing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shear Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Isolated Foundations . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Structural Model . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Steel Framing of Level 2 . . . Adding Cantilevered Beams . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Concrete Slab with Metal Deck . . . Adding Shafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicating Framing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Shape-Modified Slab . . . . . . . . . Adding a Shape-Modified Curved Slab . . . . . Adding Miter Joins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Curved Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding an Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding an Opening in a Beam . . . . . . . . . Adding an Opening to a Beam Family . . . . . Adding Foundation Walls . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Piers or Pilasters . . . . . . . . . . . . Framing Ground and Parking Garage Levels . . Placing a Wall Foundation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 . 162 . 167 . 171 . 173 . 180 . 182 . 184 . 186 . 188 . 188 . 194 . 196 . 199 . 201 . 205 . 216 . 224 . 229 . 236 . 239 . 241 . 246 . 249 . 250 . 257

vi | Contents

Chapter 6

Precast

Concrete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 . 261 . 263 . 264 . 265 . 265

Creating a Precast Beam System . . . . . . . . . Adding a Beam System to the Structure . . Changing the Beam System Properties . . . Changing the Beam System Clear Spacing . Modifying the Precast Beam Family . . . . . . . Adding a Chamfer to the Beam . . . . . .

Chapter 7

Creating

Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 . 275 . 280 . 280 . 284 . 284 . 287 . 292 . 292

Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project . . . . . Creating a Drawing Sheet . . . . . . . . Adding a Sheet to the Project . . . . . . Creating New Views to Add to Sheets . . Creating a Detail Library . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Drafting View Detail Library . Importing Details from the Library . . . Using Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Symbol Legend . . . . . . . .

Chapter 8

Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Scheduling Beam Quantities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Structural Framing Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Shared Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Type Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customizing the Type Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Instance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Graphical Column Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create the Graphical Column Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change the Schedule Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Multiple Sheets for the Graphical Column Schedule . Exporting Project Information with ODBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 . 297 . 299 . 302 . 307 . 313 . 316 . 316 . 320 . 324 . 326 . 326

Chapter 9

Steel Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Setting Up Section Views on Sheets . . . . . . . . . Cutting Sections and Adding Views to Sheets . Detailing Steel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Welded Bracing Detail . . . . . . . Creating a Bolted Angle Detail . . . . . . . . . Creating a Facade Support Detail . . . . . . . Creating a Drafting View Detail . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Deck Span Transition Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 . 329 . 333 . 333 . 339 . 341 . 344 . 345

Chapter 10

Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Concrete Modelling Examples . . . . . . . . . . Reinforcement in a Beam . . . . . . . . . . Reinforcement in a Column . . . . . . . . Area Reinforcement in a Structural Wall . . Area Reinforcement in a Slab . . . . . . . . Path Reinforcement in a Slab . . . . . . . Sketch Reinforcement in a Footing . . . . Sketch Reinforcement in a Structural Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 . 351 . 359 . 364 . 373 . 378 . 382 . 393

Chapter 11

Annotating and Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403 Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403

Contents | vii

Controlling Witness Line Location . . . . . . Modifying Dimension Properties . . . . . . . Working with Alignments and Constraints . . Creating Automatic Linear Wall Dimensions . Working with Spot Dimensions . . . . . . . . Annotating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Custom Beam Tag . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 411 . 414 . 415 . 420 . 421 . 428 . 428 . 435

Chapter 12

Worksets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Using Worksharing in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets . . . . Assigning Worksets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Making the Entire Workset Editable . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksets with Multiple Users . . . . . . . . . . . Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439 . 439 . 445 . 448 . 453 . 457

Chapter 13

Project Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Coordination Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opening the Modified Revit Architecture Interference Check . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Revision Tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Up a Revision Table . . . . . . . Sketching Revision Clouds . . . . . . . . Add Remaining Revisions . . . . . . . . Tagging Revision Clouds . . . . . . . . . Working with Revisions . . . . . . . . . . . . file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461 . 461 . 468 . 474 . 474 . 475 . 476 . 480 . 481

Chapter 14

Structural Analytical Modelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
Applying the Analytical Model to the Design Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analytical Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Load Cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Loads to the Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Load Combination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transfer Project Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Documenting the Analytical Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Examples of Analytical Adjustment and Reset in the Model . . . . . . . . . . . . Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model . . . . . . . . . . . . Boundary Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Analytical Model to be Calculated in Third Party Analysis Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485 . 486 . 494 . 496 . 505 . 507 . 509 . 512 . 514 . 531 . 534

Chapter 15

Exporting Revit Structure Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
Exporting CAD Formats . . . . . . . . . . Exporting the 3D Model to AutoCAD Exporting a 2D view to AutoCAD . . Exporting Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Architecture 2007 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535 . 535 . 539 . 540

Chapter 16

About Families and the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
Using Families and the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545 Introduction to Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545

Chapter 17

Creating Components in the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
Creating Custom Families . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Custom Metal Deck Family . . . Customizing a Castellated Beam . . . . . . Creating a Custom Reinforcement Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551 . 551 . 563 . 565

viii | Contents

Creating In-Place Families . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Step Footing In-Place Family . . Creating a Titleblock Family . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet . Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock . Adding the Titleblock to a New Project . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. 573 . 574 . 581 . 581 . 584 . 592

Chapter 18

Truss Building . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595
Working with Trusses . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Trusses to a Project . . . . . . Customizing Truss Parameters . . . . Modifying the Shape of a Truss . . . Creating a Custom Truss Family . . . Building a Truss with Drafting Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595 . 595 . 604 . 608 . 611 . 616

Chapter 19

Creating Multiple Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625
Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project . Creating the Structural Design Options . . Creating the Roof System Design Options . Managing Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625 . 626 . 636 . 643

Chapter 20

Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647
Linking Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linking Building Models from Different Project Files . Repositioning Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility . . . . . Managing Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models . . . . . . . Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates . . . . . . . . Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates . . . . . Working with a Linked Building Model . . . . . . . . Managing Shared Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Components of Linked Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648 . 648 . 657 . 660 . 662 . 665 . 665 . 667 . 670 . 672 . 673

Chapter 21

Project Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677
Using Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677 Phasing Your Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679 Creating Phase-Specific Structural Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 688

Chapter 22

Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 693
Rendering an Exterior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model . Adding Trees to the Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Exterior Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding RPC People . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Interior Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Interior Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Recording Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position . . Recording the Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 693 . 694 . 701 . 705 . 709 . 713 . 714 . 717 . 721 . 726 . 727 . 730 . 732

Chapter 23

Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 733
Creating Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 733

Contents | ix

Creating an Extruded Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint . Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aligning Roof Eaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mansard Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Low Slope Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Fascia, Gutters, and Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roof Fascia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Gutters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 733 . 738 . 741 . 743 . 746 . 748 . 750 . 751 . 754 . 762 . 762 . 764 . 765

Chapter 24

Grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 769
Creating, Modifying, and Nesting Groups . Creating and Placing a Group . . . . Modifying a Group . . . . . . . . . . Nesting Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Detail Groups . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail Group . . . . . . . Using Attached Detail Groups . . . . Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 769 . 769 . 777 . 781 . 784 . 784 . 787 . 790 . 790

x | Contents

Understanding the Concepts

1

In this tutorial, you learn the fundamental concepts of Revit® Structure 2009. You learn how Revit Structure works, the terms used when working with the product, and how to navigate the user interface. This introduction helps you get started with the Revit Structure tutorials and presents the fundamental concepts of the product, including:
■ ■ ■ ■

how Revit Structure works. the terms used when working with the product. how to navigate the user interface. how to perform some common tasks in the product.

1

Using the Tutorials
In this lesson, you learn how to use the Revit Structure tutorials, including where to find the training files and how to create a new Revit Structure project from a template file. The Contents tab of the Revit Structure Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit Structure. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit Structure.

Accessing Training Files
Training files are Revit Structure projects, templates, and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. In this exercise, you learn where the training files are located, as well as how to open and save them.

Where are the training files located?
Training files, by default, are located in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RST 2009\Training. Training files are grouped into 3 folders within the training folder:

Common: generic files often used to teach a concept. These files are not dependent on imperial or metric units. Common file names have a c_ prefix. Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. Imperial file names have an i_ prefix. Metric: files for users working with metric units. Metric file names have an m_ prefix.

■ ■

NOTE Depending on your installation, your training folder may be in a different location. Contact your CAD manager for more information. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials, such as templates and families, is located and accessed in the training files location. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system, all content used in the tutorials is included in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files.

What is a training file?
A training file is a Revit Structure project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. Many tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. In other tutorials, you create a project from a template, rather than opening an existing training file. Open a training file 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog, scroll down, and click the Training Files icon. 3 In the right pane, double-click Common, Imperial, or Metric, depending on the type of training file.

2 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts

4 Click the training file name, and click Open. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name, click File menu ➤ Save As. In many cases, the work you do in a project during a tutorial exercise becomes the starting point for the next exercise. In many tutorials, you create a project or modify an existing project, save the changes, and use the saved version of the file to begin the next exercise or lesson. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog:

For Save in, select the folder in which to save the new file. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. Note where you save the file so you can open it for additional exercises as required. For File name, enter the new file name. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. For example, if you open c_settings.rvt and make changes, you should save this file with a new name such as c_settings_modified.rvt. For Files of type, verify that Project Files (*.rvt) is selected, and then click Save.

Create a project from a template 7 To create a project from a template, rather than using an existing training file, click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.

8 In the New Project dialog, under Create new, select Project. 9 Under Template file, verify the second option is selected, and click Browse.

Accessing Training Files | 3

10 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\Templates. 11 In the Choose Template dialog, review the Revit Structure templates. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding structure type. For most tutorial projects, you will use the default template, and customize the project as necessary. 12 Select Structural Analysis-Default.rte, and click Open. 13 Click OK.

Understanding the Basics
In this lesson, you learn what Revit Structure is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit Structure is built. You learn the terminology, the hierarchy of elements, how to navigate the user interface, and how to perform some common tasks in the product.

What is Revit Structure 2009?
The Revit Structure platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design, drawings, and schedules required for a building project. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design, scope, quantities, and phases when you need it. In the Revit Structure model, every drawing sheet, 2D and 3D view, and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. As you work in drawing and schedule views, Revit Structure collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. The Revit Structure parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views, drawing sheets, schedules, sections, and plans.

What is meant by parametric?
The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the model that enable the coordination and change management that Revit Structure provides. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. In mathematics and mechanical CAD, the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters; hence, the operation of the software is parametric. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit Structure: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project, and Revit Structure coordinates that change through the entire project. The following are examples of these element relationships:

Pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. If the length of the elevation is changed, the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. In this case, the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. The edge of a roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved, the roof remains connected. In this case, the parameter is one of association or connection.

How does Revit Structure keep things updated?
A fundamental characteristic of a building information modeling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. When you change something, Revit Structure immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. Revit Structure uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. The second is its approach to propagating structural changes. The

4 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts

result of these concepts is software that works like you do, without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design.

Element behavior in a parametric modeler
In projects, Revit Structure uses 3 types of elements:

Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the structure. They display in relevant views of the model. For example, structural walls, slabs, ramps, and roofs are model elements. Datum elements help to define project context. For example, column grids, levels, and reference planes are datum elements. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. They help to describe or document the model. For example, dimensions, tags, and 2D detail components are view-specific elements.

There are 2 types of model elements:

Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. For example, structural walls and roofs are hosts. Model components are all the other types of elements in the structural model. For example, beams, structural columns, and 3D rebar are model components.

There are 2 types of view-specific elements:

Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. For example, dimensions, tags, and symbols are annotation elements. Details are 2D items that provide details about the structural model in a particular view. Examples include detail lines, filled regions, and 2D detail components.

This implementation provides flexibility for designers. Revit Structure elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly; programming is not required. If you can draw, you can define new parametric elements in Revit Structure. In Revit Structure, the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the structure. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. Often, you do nothing to establish these relationships; they are implied by what you do and how you draw. In other cases, you can explicitly control them, by locking a dimension or aligning 2 walls, for example.

Understanding the Basics | 5

Understanding Revit Structure 2009 terms
Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit Structure are common, industry-standard terms familiar to most engineers. However, some terms are unique to Revit Structure. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. Project: In Revit Structure, the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. The project file contains all information for the structural design, from geometry to construction data. This information includes components used to design the model, views of the project, and drawings of the design. By using a single project file, Revit Structure makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views, elevation views, section views, schedules, and so forth). Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements, such as roofs, slabs, and beams. Most often, you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a structure. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the structure; for example, first floor, top of wall, or bottom of foundation. To place levels, you must be in a section or elevation view.
South Elevation View of Structure

Element: When creating a project, you add Revit Structure parametric building elements to the design. Revit Structure classifies elements by categories, families, and types. Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a structural design. For example, categories of model elements include columns and beams. Categories of annotation elements include tags and text notes. Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties), identical use, and similar graphical representation. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties, but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. For example, a truss could be considered one family, although the web supports that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. Families are either component families or system families:

Component families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. System families include slabs, dimensions, roofs, and levels. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files.
■ ■

Revit Structure predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. For example, the behavior of a structural wall is predefined in the system. However, you can create different types of walls with different compositions. System families can be transferred between projects.

6 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts

Revit Structure uses standard Microsoft® Windows® conventions. A type can be a specific size of a family. you will soon feel comfortable learning this interface. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the structure (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances).Type: Each family can have several types. click . Navigating the Revit Structure User Interface One of the advantages of Revit Structure is its ease of use. The Title Bar 2 Place your cursor at the top of the user interface and notice the Title Bar contains the name of the project and the view that is currently open. Navigating the Revit Structure User Interface | 7 . The Revit Structure window is arranged to make navigation easy. A type can also be a style. you navigate and become familiar with the user interface. making it easy to understand what each button represents. If you have used any other product that follows these conventions. Even the toolbar buttons are labeled. specifically its clear user interface. In the steps that follow. Start a new project 1 On the Standard toolbar. the user interface is labeled. In the following illustration. such as a 30” X 42” title block. This creates a new project based on the default template. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions.

The Menu Bar across the top of the window includes standard menu names such as File. Another timesaving tool for selecting commands is to place the cursor in the drawing area and right-click.By default. the Level 2 structural plan view is the default open view. The buttons on the toolbar represent some of the more common commands. You can use the toolbar grips to resize and move each toolbar. You then click the command name to run the command. You can control the visibility of the toolbars and turn the toolbar text labels on or off within the Window ➤ Toolbar menu. While working in the drawing area. In addition. These shortcut keys are listed next to the command on the menu. the shortcut key for Zoom To Fit is ZF. TIP The project template determines which view is opened and the view names as well. The Menu Bar 3 Click View menu ➤ Zoom. You can choose commands by placing the cursor over the menu name and clicking. The context menu changes depending on the function you are performing and what is currently selected. There are 6 toolbars across the top of the window just beneath the Menu Bar. Edit. and View. 8 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts . click Toolbar. new projects are numbered consecutively until saved with a new name. Many of the commands also have shortcut keys to speed up the design process. TIP For example. you simply type the required keystrokes to run the command. The Toolbar 4 On the Window menu.

the beam type active in the Type Selector is the beam type that is added when you insert it into the structural model. notice a beam type is specified. 6 On the Design Bar. If you select the Beam tool. click Beam. For example. click Design Bars. notice the list of columns that are available. Notice the bar beneath the toolbars contains design options used to draw the structural wall. you can select any component and then change the type using the Type Selector. Within the drawing area. You can also use the Type Selector to change a component type after it has been added to the structural model. the Type Selector displays a list of beams available within the project. Notice the design options available on the Options Bar are now applicable to beams. The Design Bar 10 On the Window menu. if you intend to add a beam. First. click Structural Column. The Type Selector is a context-sensitive drop-down list. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. The Options Bar is context-sensitive and varies depending on the tool or selected component. Navigating the Revit Structure User Interface | 9 . The Type Selector 7 The drop-down list on the left side of the Options Bar is called the Type Selector. click Structural Wall. You use the Type Selector in 2 ways. The list of components in the Type Selector is identical to the components listed in the Families branch of the Project Browser under the respective category.The Options Bar 5 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 9 In the Type Selector. Select the drop-down list to view the list of beams. On the left side of the Options Bar. The Show Design Bars dialog box is displayed. you can select a component type before you add it to the structural model.

There are 9 tabs in the Design Bar.The Design Bar is located on the left side of the interface. 10 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts . and the respective commands are displayed on the Design Bar. ■ ■ ■ ■ Basics tab — commands for creating most basic structural model components View tab — commands for creating different views in the project Architectural tab — commands for adding architectural components to your project Drafting tab — commands for both adding annotation symbols and creating the sheet details for the project construction documents Rendering tab — commands for creating rendered 3D images Site tab — commands for adding site components and producing site plans Massing tab — commands for executing conceptual massing commands Modelling tab — all the commands to create structural model elements Construction tab — commands for creating construction industry information ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ To access the commands within a tab. Each tab contains frequently used commands that are also available from the Menu Bar. TIP You can turn the visibility of each tab on and off by right-clicking on the Design Bar and selecting the tab from the context menu. click the tab. You can control which tabs display by selecting them in the Show Design Bars dialog box. containing buttons grouped by function. immediately below the Type Selector. 11 Click OK.

Navigating the Revit Structure User Interface | 11 . select Views (all). In the Project Browser.The Project Browser 12 To the right of the Design Bar is the Project Browser.

schedules. walls). elevations. You can expand or compress the browser list by clicking the + or . and groups. delete. families. reports. click Browser Organization. You can also drag and drop from the browser into the drawing area. 14 On the Settings menu.sign next to the name. sheets. The browser is also dockable. columns. making it easy to add a family or group to the project or add a view to a sheet. scroll through the sorting available for the Project Browser. families. so you can position it wherever you want by dragging the Project Browser title bar to a new location. double-click the name. 13 In the Type Selector. To open a view. and rename views. You can right-click in the browser to add. 12 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts .You can use the Project Browser to quickly manage the views. and group name. and groups of your current project. The browser is conveniently organized by view type (structural plans. 3D). family category (beams.

17 Place the cursor near the center of the drawing area. After you create a browser organization scheme." TIP The cursor tooltip that displays is identical to the note on the Status Bar. In the bottom left corner of the window. Navigating the Revit Structure User Interface | 13 . Do not click. 15 In the Browser Organization dialog box. you can instantly change the sorting within the Project Browser by selecting the scheme in the Type Selector. The Status Bar 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. The cursor is displayed as a pencil. click Structural Wall. it tells you to "Click to enter wall start point. click Cancel. notice the Status Bar provides information regarding what you should do next.You can create and modify Project Browser organization schemes for both views and sheets. In this case. click Modify. 18 On the Design Bar.

Toolbar: From the Toolbar. You can access Help in the following ways: ■ Dialogs: Dialog include Help buttons. and then click on a specific menu command or command button for Help. it highlights and the status bar displays the component name. you learn to perform some of the common Revit Structure tasks that are included in the tutorials. it will be easier to work in Revit Structure and focus on the lessons of each tutorial.You can turn the Status Bar visibility on or off from the Window menu. If there is no Help button displayed. 19 Place the cursor over the elevation symbol at the bottom of the drawing area. the main symbol and the elevation directional arrows. There are several tools that help you find information. When you place the cursor over a component. 14 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts . notice that the name of the preselected component is Views: Elevation: Building Elevation. Click the Help button. rest the cursor over the Toolbar button until the tooltip displays. TIP When attempting to select a specific component in a crowded or detailed view. You can select a topic on the Contents tab. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Structure In this exercise. In the Status Bar. find a keyword on the Index tab. and the topic specific to the dialog opens. Revit Structure Help 21 Click Help menu ➤ Revit Structure 2009 Help. search for all instances of a word or phrase on the Search tab. Make sure you place the cursor over the arrow portion of the symbol so that it is highlighted. press SHIFT+F1. Context-sensitive help is also available to provide instant help on any menu command. Windows: From any window. press F1 to get help on that dialog. The Status Bar also provides information. The elevation symbol consists of two parts. Be sure to have the Standard toolbar displayed. TIP You can control the level of tooltip assistance from the Settings ➤ Options menu. click . use the Tab key to alternate between nearby components. You can also press SHIFT+F1. in conjunction with tooltips. 20 Press TAB. regarding selected components within a view. Help is available online at all times during a Revit Structure session. ■ ■ ■ 22 Close the Revit Structure Help window. You can use this tri-pane. HTML help window to search for information and quickly display it to read or print. Tooltips: To see tooltips. or save commonly used pages on the Favorites tab. After you are familiar with these tasks. and notice that the preselected component switches to the main elevation symbol. and click to get the topic associated with the window.

Use zoom commands to adjust the view There are several ways to access zoom options. For example.rvt. In the drawing area. In the following steps. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 3 In the Project Browser. The zoom menu lists the zoom options and their shortcut keys. click Training Files. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. 5 Click Zoom Out (2x). 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the structural model in the window. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire structure or plan view in the view. click 3DViews ➤ 3D. the view zooms out from the structural model. and open Common\c_STR_Project_Phasing. The 3D isometric view displays: 4 Click View menu ➤ Zoom to display the zoom menu. In the tutorials. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Structure | 15 . you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands.

SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. The view of the structural model is sized to fit the available window.6 On the View toolbar. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. 16 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts . When you release the mouse button. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. 10 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. If you do not have a wheel mouse. Revit Structure uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. click the drop-down menu next to the Zoom command to display the zoom options. the view zooms in on the selected area. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire structure again. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. 7 Click Zoom To Fit. To modify or add snap increments. 8 Click in the drawing area. NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the Zoom In Region command. and type the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. this is referred to as a crossing selection. use a zoom menu command or the toolbar option to zoom out. NOTE As you zoom in and out. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. 9 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify.

The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. click Settings menu ➤ Options. . The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. you decide that you prefer the table in its original position. select the second item in the list. 12 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. press ESC. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. click The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. To define settings for SteeringWheels. Undo commands 17 On the Standard toolbar. For more information about SteeringWheels. Move. and then using the Zoom tool again. All changes you make to a project are tracked.11 To display SteeringWheels. on the View toolbar. and click the SteeringWheels tab. moving the wheel to the desired location. 15 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. click the pull-down menu on the Full Navigation wheel. 14 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. 18 On the Undo menu. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Structure | 17 . 16 To exit the wheel. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). 13 Click and hold the mouse button. As you move the mouse. and click Help. In this example.

and click again to end it. Notice that the Lines command is still active and you could continue to draw lines. Some commands. The table and plant are returned to their original locations. 22 Close the file without saving your changes. On the Design Bar. on the Standard toolbar. 18 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts . click Modify. 21 To end the command. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. use one of the following methods: ■ ■ ■ Choose another command. click the Undo command. End a command 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. or press CTRL+Z. such as the Lines command. Press ESC twice. click Lines. 20 Click in the drawing area to start the line.Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command.

beams. You will also learn some of the practices that can help you efficiently design and develop a structural project. beam systems. columns. you will have a basic understanding of both the Revit Structure design and documentation tools. Finally. When you finish these tutorials. highlighting powerful features that are integral to the most common structural workflows. You then add structural walls. and a concrete slab to the model. you create a 5-story steel structure. 19 . Structural Modelling In this lesson. you will create and name a new steel project. You start by linking a 2-dimensional architectural file into Revit Structure and using the drawing as a background template for grid and column locations. using the modelling tools provided in Revit Structure. Creating a New Project In this first exercise. Each tutorial demonstrates tools that you can use to complete tasks that are common to an overall workflow.Express Workshops 2 The Express Workshop tutorials focus on specific areas of Revit Structure 2009 functionality. you copy the elements to multiple levels on the model.

click the Level 2 reference line. 4 In the New Project dialog. enter 12' 0". i_RST_EW_Modelling. click Browse. when a dashed line displays.1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. and press ENTER. click to create Level 3. click OK.rvt. On the Options Bar. 2 In the New Project dialog. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. and save the new project as i_RST_EW_Modelling.rvt. ■ ■ In the drawing area. Save the new project 5 Click File menu ➤ Save As. open the Imperial Templates folder. 2 Click the value (10' 0") for the Level 2 elevation. and click Open. click (Pick Lines). 3 In the Choose Template dialog. 3 Create additional levels as follows: ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Add levels 1 In the Project Browser. click Level. expand Elevations (Building Elevations). Adding New Levels In this exercise. select Structural Analysis-Default .rte. 6 Navigate to a folder of your preference. 20 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . This is the project training file that is used for all remaining exercises in this tutorial. and for Offset. enter 12' 0". Adding New Levels on page 20. you create additional levels for your structure. and double-click North. 7 Proceed to the next exercise.

Importing/Linking a DWG File on page 21. Importing/Linking a DWG File | 21 .4 Repeat the previous step to create 2 new levels (Level 4. 7 Proceed to the next exercise. and Level 5). each with the offset value set to 12' 0". you import and link a 2-dimensional (2D) architectural drawing (DWG format) to use as a background for creating your structure. 5 Press ESC. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. Importing/Linking a DWG File In this exercise.

and draw a zoom box around the West elevation 22 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . 2 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. click symbol as shown. select Black and White. This is the active view that displays in the drawing area. click Training Files. select Views (all) ➤ Structural Plans ➤ Level 2. 3 In the Import/Link dialog. Import/Link an architectural file 1 In the Project Browser. and click in the drawing area to display the architectural file.rvt. For Positioning. and select Imperial\i_RST_EW_Arch_floor_plan. For Colors. Click Open. i_RST_EW_Modelling. Notice that Level 2 is bold.dwg. Reposition elevation symbols 4 On the View toolbar. select Auto . ■ ■ ■ ■ You can ignore the Revit Warning.Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. (Zoom In).Center to Center. do the following: ■ In the left pane of the Import/Link dialog. Select Current view only.

and in the Import Instance Query dialog. Importing/Linking a DWG File | 23 . 6 Use the same method to relocate the remaining elevation symbols. 9 In the drawing area.5 Click the elevation symbol. click Hide in View. and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the 8 Select the imported drawing. drag it beyond the dimensions. select a single column. click Query. click drawing. . and click to place the symbol. Hide elements in the imported drawing 7 On the View toolbar. and on the Options Bar.

you use the imported drawing as a background for creating both vertical and horizontal grids. 24 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. and a value of 1 appears within the grid bubble. Adding Column Grids In this exercise. click 11 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Grid. 3 On the Options Bar. Adding Column Grids on page 24.Notice that all columns disappear. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. 10 On the Toolbar. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 5 Select the next horizontal grid line above grid line 1. i_RST_EW_Modelling. Notice that it is labeled 2. (Undo). 4 Select the first horizontal grid line. Place horizontal grids 1 Enter ZF (Zoom to Fit). click .rvt. Notice that the grid line is highlighted.

and press ENTER. Place vertical grids 8 Enter ZF. Adding Column Grids | 25 . click Modify. 9 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.6 Select the remaining horizontal grid lines using the zoom controls as needed. Make sure that all the grid bubbles are displayed on the right side of the drawing. NOTE When you select a grid line. the bubble might display at the opposite end of the grid. and a value of 7 appears within the grid bubble. Click the check box near the bubble (as shown) to turn the bubble display on or off. As you select subsequent grid lines. 10 On the Options Bar. enter A. labels display in numerical sequence. The last horizontal grid line is labeled 6. 12 Click the value within the grid bubble. click Grid. Notice that the grid line is highlighted. 7 On the Design Bar. click . 11 Select the first vertical grid line.

Under Halftone. click Modify. 14 Select the remaining vertical grid lines. Click Apply.13 Select the next grid line to the right of grid A. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Click the Imported Categories tab. Change drawing visibility 16 Enter ZF. select i_EW_RST_Arch_floor_plan. The last grid line is labeled G. The halftone of the imported drawing is used as a background for placing additional structural elements.dwg file. 18 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and then OK. 26 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . 19 Enter ZF. Notice that the sequencing has changed from numeric to alphabetical. 15 On the Design Bar. 17 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.

you add structural walls around the elevator shafts located in the center of the structure. this view is referred to as the plan view.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. i_RST_EW_Modelling.rvt. For the remainder of this tutorial. Adding Structural Walls on page 27. Adding Structural Walls | 27 . Adding Structural Walls In this exercise. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. Setup views 1 In the Project Browser. select Views (all) ➤ Structural Plans ➤ Level 2.

click center of the drawing. and place the first structural wall as shown. select Finish Face: Exterior. 28 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . this view is referred to as the 3D view. 6 On the View toolbar. and for Loc Line. click (3D). click the sketch line that represents the exterior face of the top elevator shaft. click . click Structural Wall. For the remainder of this tutorial. 3 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. 8 In the Type Selector. 9 On the Options Bar.8" Masonry. . and draw a zoom box around the elevator shafts located in he 7 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. The plan view and the 3D view are now displayed in separate windows in the drawing area. 11 Click the north exterior face of the elevator shaft to place the second structural wall. 4 Close any additional windows that may have been opened accidentally. select Basic Wall : Generic . 10 Using the drawing as a guide.2 On the View toolbar. and enter ZF. Place structural walls around the top elevator shaft 5 Click inside the plan view.

View the structural walls in 3D 14 Click inside the 3D view and enter ZF. click Detail Level ➤ Fine. Adding Structural Walls | 29 . place the remaining structural walls around the top elevator shaft. 13 On the Design Bar. click Modify.12 Using the same method. 15 On the View Control Bar. and click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading w/Edges.

place structural walls for the middle and bottom elevator shafts on the west side of the structure. 30 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . 18 Draw a selection box around all 3 elevator shafts. and using the architectural drawing as a guide. Mirror the west elevator shafts 17 Click inside the plan view.Complete the elevator shafts on the west side of the structure 16 Using the same method and wall type used to place the first elevator shaft walls.

19 On the Toolbar. click 20 Click grid D. The elevator shafts from the west side of the structure are now mirrored on the east side. Adding Structural Walls | 31 . (Mirror).

Adding Structural Columns In this exercise. 22 Click File menu ➤ Save. These columns extend from Level 1 to Level 2. 32 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . click Modify.21 On the Design Bar. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding Structural Columns on page 32. you add columns at specific grid intersections. Notice the completed elevator shafts are displayed in the 3D view.

Press the SPACEBAR to rotate the column so that it is perpendicular with grid line 6 as shown. 4 In the Type Selector. 5 Click grid location A6 to place the first column.Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. 6 Using the same method. and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Place columns at specific grid intersections 1 Click inside the plan view. . 2 On the View toolbar. select W-Wide Flange-Column : W14X43. B5 Adding Structural Columns | 33 . place a column at the following grid locations: ■ ■ B6 A5. click Structural Column. i_RST_EW_Modelling.rvt. click structure.

and enter ZF. click Finish. 12 Draw a selection box around the entire view to select all grid lines. 14 Click inside the 3D view. click Structural Column. 9 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 34 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops .7 On the Design Bar. 11 On the Options Bar. click Modify. click (Grid Intersection). 10 In the Type Selector. Columns are placed at each grid intersection. and enter ZF. select W-Wide Flange-Column : W14X43. Place remaining columns using the grid intersection tool 8 Click inside the plan view. 13 On the Toolbar.

You also set the offset value of the steel beams to allow for the concrete slab that will be added in a later exercise. Add beams using the chain tool 1 Click inside the plan view. 5 On the Options Bar.15 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Chain. 2 On the View toolbar. click structure. Adding Structural Beams In this exercise. click Beam. and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. .rvt. select W-Wide Flange : W12X26. i_RST_EW_Modelling. 4 In the Type Selector. you add structural beams to level 2 to form the steel framework of the structure. Adding Structural Beams | 35 . Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding Structural Beams on page 35.

Create sloped beams 9 Select the beam between grid locations A6 and B6. and A6. and select the beam between A6 and A5. click the midpoints of the columns at grid locations B5. 36 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . A5. 10 Click the column at grid location A6. 7 Click the midpoint of the column at grid location B6 to specify the beam endpoint. The triangle indicates the midpoint of the column. enter 5' 0". and then click to enter the beam startpoint. and press ENTER.6 Move the cursor over the column at grid location A6 until a triangle is displayed. press CTRL. place additional beams in the upper-left bay of the structure. 8 Using the same method. that is.

click . 15 On the Options Bar. NOTE The method used to create sloped beams is shown for demonstration purposes only. select W-Wide Flange : W12X26. Add remaining beams using the grid intersection tool 12 Click inside the plan view. 13 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. This project does not require sloped beams. 14 In the Type Selector. 11 On the Toolbar. Adding Structural Beams | 37 . click Beam.Notice the 3D view displays the sloped beams based on the new offset height. and enter ZF. click . 16 Draw a selection box around the entire view to select all grid lines.

Notice the beams are deleted in the 3D view. and draw a zoom box around the beams at grid locations A2 22 Select each beam. 19 On the Design Bar. click Finish. 20 Click inside the plan view. Delete beams outside the drawing floor extents Six beams that were placed at grid locations outside of the floor extents of the architectural drawing need to be deleted. 18 Click inside the 3D view. 21 On the View toolbar. and enter ZF. click Modify. Beams are placed within the grid. 38 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . .17 On the Options Bar. click through A5. and press DELETE.

select W-Wide Flange : W12X26. click Beam. delete the beams on grid locations G2 through G5. 26 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. between grid lines G2 and G5. 28 Using the architectural drawing as a guide. Adding Structural Beams | 39 . click . click the intersection of the beam on grid line 2 and the centerline of the wall to establish the beam startpoint. 29 Click the beam on grid line 3 to establish the beam endpoint. and draw a zoom box around the southeast side of the structure. Add new beams within the drawing floor extents The new beams are placed within the floor extents of the architectural drawing. 24 Click inside the plan view. 25 On the View toolbar.23 Using the same method. 27 In the Type Selector.

40 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . place 2 additional beams between grid lines 3 and 5.30 Using the same method.

31 Select the 3 new beams. click . and draw a zoom box around the northeast stair shaft. 35 Select the beam between grid lines G5 and G6. and press DELETE. Notice the new beams are displayed in the 3D view. and on the Toolbar. click . Adding Structural Beams | 41 . 32 Select grid line A for the center of the mirror reflection. Delete beams inside the northeast and southwest stair shafts 33 Click inside the plan view. 34 On the View toolbar.

37 Select the beam between grid lines A1 and A2. and draw a zoom box around the southwest stair shaft. 42 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops .36 On the View toolbar. and enter ZF. click . and press DELETE. 38 Click inside the 3D view.

select W-Wide Flange : W12X26. click Beam. This is the startpoint for the first beam. Adding Structural Beams | 43 . 43 Click the existing beam on grid line 2. click center of the structure. This is the endpoint for the first beam. . 44 Click the existing beam on grid line 3. 40 On the View toolbar. 39 Click inside the plan view. and draw a zoom box around the elevator shafts located in the 41 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.Add 3 beams above the elevator shaft walls These beams will support a beam system that is added in the next exercise. 42 In the Type Selector. Use the architectural drawing to locate the outline of the elevator shaft wall.

click . Mirror the elevator shaft beams 49 Select the 3 new beams.45 Click the existing beam on grid line 4. 44 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . Use the architectural drawing to locate the outline of the outside wall of the elevator shaft. and on the Toolbar. 46 On the Design Bar. 47 Click the second beam to establish the startpoint for the third beam. click Modify. This is the endpoint for the second beam. 48 Click the beam on grid line D . This is the endpoint for the third beam.

50 Select grid line D for the center of the mirror reflection. 52 Draw a selection box around the entire model. Set the beam offset value The offset value for all beams is lowered to accommodate the slab that will be added in a future exercise. 51 Click inside the 3D view. Notice the new beams are displayed in the 3D view. Adding Structural Beams | 45 .

53 On the Options Bar. Click OK. 55 On the Options Bar. select Other. click ■ ■ ■ . Under Category. Under Category. under Constraints. 56 In the Element Properties dialog. Notice the beams have been lowered in the 3D view. Click Apply. click ■ ■ ■ ■ (Filter Selection). 46 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . 54 In the Filter dialog. Only the structural framing elements (girders and joists) are highlighted. select Structural Framing (Joist). do the following: Click Check None. do the following: For z-Direction Justification. For z-Direction Offset Value. select Structural Framing (Girder). enter -0' 5". and then click OK.

Automatically create multiple beam systems 1 Click inside the plan view. Adding Structural Beam Systems on page 47.rvt. 3 On the Options Bar. for Layout Rule. you add multiple structural beam systems to the steel frame on Level 2. 5 On the View toolbar. Adding Structural Beam Systems | 47 . 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select W-Wide Flange : W12X26. . Under Pattern. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. and enter ZF. Click OK. 58 Proceed to the next exercise. For Maximum Spacing. For Beam Type. select 3D. click ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . enter 9' 0". Adding Structural Beam Systems In this exercise. and draw a zoom box around the bays on the northeast side 6 Select the beam between grid locations A5 and A6 to set the beam system direction. i_RST_EW_Modelling. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. select Maximum Spacing. click of the structure.57 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Beam System.

place a beam system in the remaining bays of the structure. 48 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . Also. do not place a beam system in the bays for the stairs in the northwest and southeast corners of the structure. 9 On the Design Bar. 7 Click to place the beam system.The beam system location displays with a blue dashed line. Notice the beam system displays in the 3D view. and enter ZF. NOTE Some beam systems might include 2 beams based on the size of the bay. 10 Click inside the 3D view. 8 Using the same settings and method. click Modify.

11 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Lines. click Slab.rvt. and use the mirror tool to complete the sketch. 3 On the Design Bar. Adding a Structural Slab In this exercise. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. and enter ZF. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Adding a Structural Slab | 49 . You create the sketch lines for the left side of the slab. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. You are now in sketch mode. Adding a Structural Slab on page 49. i_RST_EW_Modelling. you sketch a concrete slab on Level 2 by tracing the outside edge of the architectural drawing. Trace the architectural drawing floor plan 1 Click inside the plan view.

and draw a zoom box around the northwest corner of the 5 Click the edge of the floor outline to start the slab sketch. If necessary. . 8 Continue sketching the slab until you reach grid line D. use (Trim/Extend) on the Options Bar. click structure. zoom in and out as needed. and DELETE to remove unwanted lines and to clean up line intersections. and make sure there are no duplicate sketch lines. 50 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops .4 On the View toolbar. When sketching the slab. 6 Place the first sketch line along the exterior edge of the architectural drawing. 7 Continue sketching lines along the drawing perimeter using the exterior-most model lines of the imported drawing.

click . 11 On the Toolbar. Adding a Structural Slab | 51 . 12 Select grid line D for the center of the mirror reflection.Use the mirror tool to copy the slab sketch 9 Enter ZF. 10 Draw a selection box around the left half of the view to select all sketch lines.

16 On the Design Bar. 52 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . . click Modify.13 On the Design Bar. 14 Enter ZF. Complete the slab sketch 15 On the View toolbar. click line D. click Lines. and draw a zoom box around the top of the slab sketch at grid 17 Draw a single line to join the 2 halves of the slab sketch.

click Lines. 22 On the View toolbar. and draw a zoom box around the bottom of the slab sketch at 20 Draw a single line to join the 2 halves of the slab sketch. click grid line D. click structure. . 23 On the Design Bar. 24 Modify the slab sketch until it appears as shown. . 21 Enter ZF. and draw a zoom box around the southeast corner of the Adding a Structural Slab | 53 . 19 On the Design Bar.18 On the View toolbar. click Lines.

click structure.25 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. 29 Modify the slab sketch until it appears as shown. . click Modify. click Lines. 26 Enter ZF. 31 On the Design Bar. 27 On the View toolbar. 28 On the Design Bar. 54 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . and draw a zoom box around the northeast corner of the 30 Enter ZF.

and the slab from Level 2 to the remaining levels of the structure.rvt. Notice the completed slab is displayed in the 3D view. Copying Elements to Multiple Levels | 55 . you copy columns. beams. click No when asked if you would like walls that go up to this floor level to attach to its bottom.In the Revit dialog. i_RST_EW_Modelling. Copying Elements to Multiple Levels In this exercise. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. Copying Elements to Multiple Levels on page 55. 32 Click File menu ➤ Save. beam systems.

Click Apply. 4 In the Filter dialog. click ■ ■ ■ (Filter Selection). 3 On the Options Bar. and enter ZF.Extend the elevator shaft walls up to Level 5 1 Click inside the plan view. Click OK. and then click OK. . Under Category. 5 On the Options Bar. do the following: For Top Constraint. Notice the elevator shaft walls are displayed in the 3D view. click ■ ■ 6 In the Element Properties dialog. select Up to level: Level 5. under Constraints. do the following: Click Check None. select Walls. 56 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . 2 Draw a selection box around the entire view.

Copying Elements to Multiple Levels | 57 . under Constraints. 9 In the Filter dialog. enter 4' 0". do the following: Click Check None. Notice the columns are extended to Level 3 in the 3D view. Click OK. do the following: For Top Level. click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. click ■ ■ ■ 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 8 On the Options Bar. 14 In the Select Levels dialog. and then click OK. For Top Offset. select Structural Columns. Under Category. click ■ ■ ■ . Copy columns up to Level 5 12 With the columns still selected. Notice the columns are extended to Level 5 in the 3D view.Extend columns up to Level 3 7 Click inside the plan view. select Level 3. 13 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. 10 On the Options Bar. and then click OK. and draw a selection box around the entire view. select Level 5. . Click Apply.

enter 4' 0". and draw a selection box around the entire structure.Change the top and bottom offset values 15 With the columns still selected. while pressing CTRL. click ■ ■ ■ . Click OK. on the Options Bar. 22 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. under Constraints. Structural Framing (Girder). click ■ ■ . 23 In the Select Levels dialog. Under Category. and Structural Framing (Joist). Structural Beam Systems. Copy remaining structural elements up to Level 5 18 Click inside the 3D view. 17 On the Design Bar. and then click OK. 20 In the Filter dialog. 24 Enter ZF 58 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . and then click OK. ■ 21 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. do the following: Click Check None. 19 On the Options Bar. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. select Level 3 and Level 5. For Top Offset. enter 0' 0'. select Floors. do the following: For Base Offset. Click Apply. click Modify.

double-click Level 1. i_RST_EW_Modelling. 2 Enter ZF. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. Adding Foundations In this exercise. Adding Foundations | 59 . 27 Proceed to the next exercise. Place isolated foundations under each column 1 In the Project Browser. under Structural Plans. and then you add a slab foundation under the elevator shafts.rvt.25 On the Design Bar. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. Adding Foundations on page 59. you add an isolated foundation under each structural column. click Modify.

select Footing-Rectangular : 72" x 48" x 18". 7 On the Toolbar.3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Notice the footings located between the elevator shaft walls. 6 Draw a selection box around the entire structure. click . click Foundation ➤ Isolated. click Finish. 60 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . 8 On the Design Bar. click (Structural Column). and draw a zoom box around the elevator shafts. All the structural columns are highlighted. 5 On the Options Bar. The structural columns are now supported by isolated foundations. 4 In the Type Selector. Delete 2 footings near the elevator shaft 9 On the View toolbar. click Modify.

click 19 Enter ZF. click Floor Properties.10 Select both footings. click (Rectangle). 15 On the Options Bar. (3D). click Foundation ➤ Slab. Place a slab foundation under the elevator shafts 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. for Type. click Finish Sketch. 12 On the Design Bar. The foundation is now displayed in 3-dimensions. and click OK. and press DELETE. 14 On the Design Bar. 18 On the View toolbar. 16 Click above the upper-left corner of the elevator shaft walls and sketch the slab so it surrounds the walls and columns as shown. select 12" Foundation Slab. You are now in sketch mode. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. 17 On the Design Bar. Adding Foundations | 61 . click Lines.

Finally. Structural Detailing In this lesson. You have completed the Structural Modelling Express Workshop tutorial. you create and annotate model-based details in a section view. 21 Proceed to the next lesson. you learn to import and modify an AutoCAD DWG file. 62 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . You begin by importing an AutoCAD drawing as a reference section. Structural Detailing on page 62. You then import detail views from a Revit detail library project and place them in a new sheet. Next. and modify its line properties.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. you place it in an existing project sheet. incorporating its line styles within the Revit Structure workflow.

click Training Files. do the following: ■ Select the Link option. Specify the DWG/DXF Color Number 7 to a line weight of 9.txt in the Data folder of the Revit Structure installation directory. 5 In the New Drafting View dialog. and select \Imperial\ i_RST_EW_Free_Standing_Wall_Section. you import and link a 2-dimensional (2D) architectural AutoCAD drawing (DWG format) to use as a detail reference in a sheet. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Name the view Typical Wall Section. click Training Files. 3 Save the Import Line Weight file as line. ■ Click Save As. but do not open it. Create a new drafting view 4 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. Import the DWG file 6 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. 7 In the left pane of the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog. 8 In the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog. Importing/Linking a DWG File | 63 .Importing/Linking a DWG File In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 In the Import Line Weights dialog. do the following: ■ ■ Specify the DWG/DXF Color Number 4 to a line weight of 5. and open \Imperial\i_RST_EW_Working_with_AutoCAD. You begin by setting Revit Structure to associate line weights to the DWG/DXF color numbers of the imported AutoCAD file. Select a scale of 1/4”= 1'-0". Map line weights to DWG/DXF color numbers 1 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Setting ➤ Import Line Weights DWG/DXF.rvt. Click OK. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.dwg.

rvt. select Black and White. 64 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . select Auto . 11 Navigate to a folder of your preference. This is the project training file that is used for all remaining exercises in this tutorial. 9 Enter ZF (Zoom to fit). For Positioning. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Notice the imported detail is linked into the Typical Wall Section drafting view with the mapped line weights.Center to Center. Using a Detail Drawing as a Section View on page 65. and save the new project as i_RST_EW_Detailing. ■ Click Open.■ ■ For Colors. 12 Proceed to the next exercise.

Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Select the Reference other view option. Notice that Level 1 is bold. select 1/4" = 1'-0". click Section. click . Create the section reference 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the View toolbar. From the adjacent drop-down list of views. you create a section that references an existing detail view. select Views (all) ➤ Structural Plans ➤ Level 1. and draw a zoom box around grid locations A2 and A3. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Scale. 4 On the Options Bar. This is the active view that displays in the drawing area.Using a Detail Drawing as a Section View In this exercise. i_RST_EW_Detailing. select Drafting View: Typical Wall Selection. Using a Detail Drawing as a Section View | 65 .rvt.

Placing a Detail in a Sheet on page 66. 66 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . you place the imported detail view on an existing sheet. 2 In the Project Browser.Unnamed.1. move the cursor down. 7 Proceed to the next exercise. expand select Sheets (all). and click inside the north wall to place the section. i_RST_EW_Detailing. Add the detail view to a sheet 1 Close all views except for Level 1.rvt. 3 Enter WT (Tile Windows). Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise.5 Click outside the wall between grid lines 2 and 3. and double-click S. Placing a Detail in a Sheet In this exercise. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save.

Sheet S-1 . click Level 1 on the sheet. 6 Release the mouse button. Placing a Detail in a Sheet | 67 . . and draw a zoom box around the empty space to the right of 5 In the Project Browser. 4 On the View toolbar.Unnamed and the Level 1 structural plan views are now aligned horizontally in the drawing area. expand Views (all) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). and drag Typical Wall Section onto the sheet view.

7 Move the cursor to align the detail outline in the empty space of the sheet. 8 Click to place the detail. 68 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops .Notice the detail drawing outline.

. and draw a zoom box around the title block in the lower-right 10 Double-click the sheet number. Change the sheet number in the title block 9 On the View toolbar. and click ENTER. Placing a Detail in a Sheet | 69 .0. notice the section callout has updated according to the detail and the sheet number. change it to S-1.In the structural plan view of Level 1. click corner of the sheet.

Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. you change the line properties of the imported AutoCAD drawing to display differently in Revit Structure. i_RST_EW_Detailing. Adjusting Line Weights of Imported Details on page 70. 12 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. 70 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . 11 Click File menu ➤ Save. notice the section callout has updated according to the new sheet number.In the structural plan view of Level 1. Adjusting Line Weights of Imported Details In this exercise.

4 Click one of the lines representing the exterior surface of the wall cross-section. Adjusting Line Weights of Imported Details | 71 . 3 On the Options Bar. and double-click Typical Wall Section. expand Views (all) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail).Determine the drawing layer of the line 1 In the Project Browser. click . 2 Click on the detail drawing.

11 In the Line Graphics dialog. 6 Click OK. select 4.5 In the Import Instance Query dialog. 12 Click OK. notice the Layer value CONT5. for Weight. 14 Click OK. 9 Click the CONT5 row. 8 Click the Imported Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. 10 Click the Override button in the Lines column of the CONT5 row. 72 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . Change the weight of the line 7 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 13 Click Apply.

TYPICAL CONCRETE WALL CONTROL JOINT DETAIL ■ ■ ■ ■ Click OK. Select the following views to insert: ■ ■ ■ Drafting View 001 . 16 Proceed to the next exercise. click Training Files.TYPICAL CONCRETE FOOTING WITHOUT PIER OR PILASTER DETAIL Drafting View 007 . Creating a New Details Sheet from a Detail Library on page 73. you import multiple detail views and place them on a new project sheet.TYPICAL ELEVATION OF STEPPED WALL FOOTING DETAIL Drafting View 002 .rvt. Import detail views from a Revit Structure detail library 1 Click File menu ➤ Insert from File ➤ Views.Notice that all lines associated with the CONT5 layer are now set to a line weight of 4. 15 Click File menu ➤ Save. Creating a New Details Sheet from a Detail Library | 73 . 3 In the Insert Views dialog. i_RST_EW_Detailing. and select \Imperial\ i_RST_EW_Typ_slab_detail_library.TYPICAL PLAN OF HORIZONTAL REINFORCING OF CONCRETE WALLS DETAIL Drafting View 009 . Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise.rvt. 2 In the left pane of the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog.TYPICAL ELEVATION OF STEPPED WALL FOOTINGS AT UTILITY OPENING DETAIL Drafting View 004 . Creating a New Details Sheet from a Detail Library In this exercise.TYPICAL SLOPE BETWEEN FOOTING DETAIL Drafting View 003 . do the following: ■ ■ For Views. select Show all views and sheets.

expand Views (all) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). and drag 001 . 7 Click OK. 11 Click to place the detail.TYPICAL ELEVATION OF STEPPED WALL FOOTING DETAIL onto the sheet view. click OK. Add the detail views to a sheet 8 In the Project Browser. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal : E1 30x42 Horizontal. 74 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops .4 In the Duplicate Types dialog. 6 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. 10 Move the cursor to position the detail outline on the sheet. Notice the imported details are listed In the Project Browser under Views (All) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail) Create a new sheet 5 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. 12 Use the same method to place the remaining views that were imported earlier in this exercise. 9 Release the mouse button.

Preparing Views for Detailing in a Section In this exercise.13 Click File menu ➤ Save. 14 Proceed to the next exercise. click . double-click Level 3 . 2 On the View toolbar. and draw a zoom box around grid locations C1 and D1. Prepare a section view 1 In the Project Browser. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. and close all other views. i_RST_EW_Detailing. expand Views (all) ➤ Structural Plans. Preparing Views for Detailing in a Section on page 75. you create a section view and crop it so that it can be displayed side by side with a related structural plan.S.T..rvt.O. Preparing Views for Detailing in a Section | 75 .

3 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Section. 4 On the Options Bar, for Scale, select 3/4" = 1'-0". 5 Click outside the wall, halfway between grid lines C and D, move the cursor to the right, and click inside the west wall to place the section.

6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all) ➤ Sections (Building Section), and double-click Section 1.

76 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops

7 In the section view:

Locate the double-arrow control at the top of the crop area, and drag it down to just above the Level 3 - T.O.S. elevation line.

Preparing Views for Detailing in a Section | 77

Click and drag the double-arrow control handle at the bottom of the crop area to just below the Level 3 - T.O.S. elevation line.

Click the double-arrow control handle to the left of the crop area, and drag it to the right to reduce white space.

78 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops

8 On the View Control Bar:
■ ■

Click Click

(Hide Crop Region). (Detail Level: Fine).

9 On the View toolbar, click wall.

, and draw a zoom box around the beam connection, slab, and

10 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all) ➤ Structural Plans, double-click Level 3 - T.O.S., and close all other views. 11 Enter WT. Level 3 - T.O.S. and Section 1 are now aligned horizontally in the drawing area. 12 Click File menu ➤ Save. 13 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding a Cantilever to a Slab on page 79.

Adding a Cantilever to a Slab
In this exercise, you add a cantilever to the existing slab using section and plan views. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise, i_RST_EW_Detailing.rvt. Select a slab and enter sketch mode 1 In the section view to the right, select the slab.

Adding a Cantilever to a Slab | 79

Notice the slab is highlighted in the plan view to the left.

2 On the Options Bar, click 4 Click Open View.

.

3 In the Go to View dialog, select Structural Plan: Level 3 - T.O.S. Notice the plan view has entered sketch mode. Add the cantilever 5 In the plan view, while pressing CTRL, select the vertical and arc segments of the slab.

80 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops

6 On the Option Bar, for Cantilevers : Concrete, enter -9", for Steel, enter -2". 7 Press ENTER to apply the setting. 8 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

Notice that the cantilever now extends from the slab. 9 Click File menu ➤ Save. 10 Proceed to the next exercise, Coping Beam Connections on page 82.

Adding a Cantilever to a Slab | 81

Coping Beam Connections
In this exercise, you will cope a beam where it joins a perpendicular beam. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise, i_RST_EW_Detailing.rvt. Extend the beam flush to the connection 1 In the section view, select the beam as shown.

2 Unpin the selected beam by clicking on the pin.

3 Drag the control at the left of the selected beam to the left so the end of the beam is flush to the center of the perpendicular beam, as shown.

82 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops

4 On the Toolbar, click

(Coping).

5 Select the newly extended beam, as shown.

6 Select the perpendicular beam, as shown.

Coping Beam Connections | 83

Notice the beam is coped to the shape of the beam it joins.

7 Click File menu ➤ Save. 8 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Detail Components on page 84.

Adding Detail Components
In this exercise, you will add a shear connector, a structural angle, an expansion bolt, and an L-angle welded connection to the section view. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise, i_RST_EW_Detailing.rvt.

84 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops

Add a shear connector 1 Close the Level 2 plan view, and maximize the Section 1 view. 2 On the View toolbar, click and slab. , and draw a zoom box around the top of the beam connection

3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Detail Component. 4 In the Type Selector, select Shear Connectors-Side : 3/4”. 5 Move the cursor to the top center of the beam as shown.

6 Click to place the shear connector.

Adding Detail Components | 85

Add a structural angle 7 In the Type Selector, select AISC Angle Shapes-Section : L8x6x7/16. 8 Move the cursor to the empty space below and to the right of the beam as shown.

9 Press the SPACEBAR once to rotate the angle 90° counterclockwise. 10 Click to place the angle. 11 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Modify. 12 Select the angle.

86 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops

13 Click the vertical flip control.

Adding Detail Components | 87

14 On the Toolbar, click

(Align).

15 Click the bottom segment of the beam, as shown.

88 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops

16 Click the angle, and then click the lock for the alignment.

Adding Detail Components | 89

17 Click the interior segment of the exterior wall, as shown.

90 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops

18 Click the angle, and then click the lock for alignment.

Adding Detail Components | 91

92 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . 23 Align the bolt halfway along the left side of the angle. click Detail Component. 20 In the Type Selector. select Expansion Bolts-Side : 3/4”. as shown. 22 Press the SPACEBAR twice to rotate the bolt 180° counterclockwise. 21 Move the cursor into the drawing area near the angle.Add an expansion bolt 19 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

click (Move). click Modify. 27 Click the center of the interior segment of the bolt head. 26 On the Toolbar. as shown.24 Click to place the bolt. Adding Detail Components | 93 . 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

94 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops .28 Move the cursor to align with the outer segment of the angle. as shown.

Adding Detail Components | 95 .29 Click to move the bolt flush with the angle.

click Detail Component. 32 Move the cursor into the drawing area to the right of the beam connection. select L-Angle-Welded Connection-Elevation : L4x4x5/16.Add an L-angle connection 30 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 96 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . 31 In the Type Selector.

click (Align). and then click the lock for the alignment. 37 In the Element Properties dialog. 42 Click the left segment of the L-angle. as shown. 39 Click on the L-angle and drag it to the middle of the beam. click Modify. 35 Select the L-angle. 36 On the Options Bar.33 Click to place the L-angle. change the value for L to 10” 40 On the Toolbar. as shown. 34 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. . click 38 Click OK. 41 Click the right segment of the perpendicular beam. Adding Detail Components | 97 .

98 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . Adding Final Annotation and Detailing In this final exercise.43 Click File menu ➤ Save 44 Proceed to the next exercise. i_RST_EW_Detailing.rvt. Adding Final Annotation and Detailing on page 98. you will add break lines and annotation to the section view. Add break lines 1 Enter ZF. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise.

6 Move the cursor onto the exterior wall. 5 Click to place the break line. to the right of the coping detail.2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 9 Move the cursor onto the slab. as shown. select Break Line. 4 Move the cursor onto the exterior wall above the slab. as shown. Adding Final Annotation and Detailing | 99 . The crop area for the section view will be adjusted later. click Detail Component 3 In the Type Selector. below the structural angle and expansion bolt. Notice the white space beneath the break line and the continuation of the wall beyond it. 8 Click to place the break line. as shown. 7 Press the SPACEBAR twice to rotate the break line 180° counterclockwise.

10 Press the SPACEBAR 3 times to rotate the break line 270° counterclockwise. 14 Select the crop region and adjust it as follows: Drag the bottom double-arrow control upward to obscure the wall below the break line. 100 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . 13 On the View Control Bar. 12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click ■ ■ (Show Crop Region). 11 Click to place the break line. Drag the right double-arrow control to the left to obscure the slab and beam to the right of the break line. click Modify.

Move the cursor up and to the right. and do the following: Click on the top segment of the slab. click Text. Click to finish the second leader segment. Adding Final Annotation and Detailing | 101 . ■ Type STRUCTURAL SLAB (SEE PLAN). as shown.15 On the View Control Bar. click Add annotation (Hide Crop Region). click ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ (Two Segments). Move the cursor to the right. Click to finish the first leader segment. away from the text box. 18 Click in the drawing area. 17 On the Options Bar. 16 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

Click to finish the first leader segment. 102 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . click Modify.19 Click the right drag handle and move it to the left to resize the text box. 22 Click on the leader. 20 Click on the bottom segment of the beam and do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor down and to the right. Type STL BEAM (SEE PLAN). as shown. click (Add Left Leader). Move the cursor to the right. Click to finish the second leader segment. 21 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 23 On the Options Bar.

as shown.24 Drag the dot control of the new leader down so that it meets the bottom segment of the beam. Adding Final Annotation and Detailing | 103 . 25 Drag the dot control at the right of the text box to the left to resize the box.

away from the text box. click ■ ■ ■ ■ (Right). ANCHORED TO WALL USING 2-3/4” DIA. 30 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Move the cursor to the right. Move the cursor to the left. click 32 On the Options Bar. Click to finish the leader segment.26 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Type CMU WALL (SEE FOUND. and do the following: Click on the bottom segment of the structural angle. as shown. 104 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . click ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ (Two Segments). away from the text box. EXPANSION ANCHORS. SECTIONS FOR REINF. click Text. Type L8X6X3/16 (LLH) x ‘1-0” LONG CLIPS 2 4’-0” O. and do the following: Click on the exterior segment of the wall. 27 On the Options Bar. INFO). 28 Click in the drawing area. Click to finish the second leader segment. click Text. 29 Drag the dot control at the right of the text box and move it to the left to resize the box. 31 On the Options Bar.C. Move the cursor down and to the right. (One Segment). 33 Click in the drawing area. Click to finish the first leader segment.

35 Click File menu ➤ Save You have completed the Structural Detailing Express Workshop.34 Drag the dot control at the left of the text box and move it to the right to resize the box. Adding Final Annotation and Detailing | 105 . as shown.

106 .

These settings control the graphics. notification preferences. 2 Click File menu ➤ Close to close all open projects. In the first lesson. 4 In the Options dialog. click Browse. and your username when using worksets. 107 . 5 Under Colors. Modifying System Settings In this lesson. Set graphics settings 1 Open Revit Structure. you learn how to control the system settings within Revit Structure. click Training Files. and click OK. and open Imperial\i_Tutorial_Default. Modifying General System Options In this exercise. you modify the settings that control your local Revit Structure working environment. 7 In the New Project dialog. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects. 6 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Structure project. they are not saved to project or template files. you modify project settings to control the appearance of the components and subcomponents within that project. which is independent of the project settings. 8 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. 3 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 9 In the New Project dialog. you create an office template.rte.Modifying Project and System Settings 3 In this tutorial. In the second lesson. and set it as your default template. journal cleanup options. Notice that the drawing area is black. you modify the system environment. Finally. under Template file. click the Graphics tab. select Invert background color. click OK. you learn how to modify your Revit Structure 2009 working environment. selection default options.

click Modify. 13 In the Color dialog. click the value for Selection Color. 12 Under Colors. 19 On the Design Bar.rvt. 23 Click File menu ➤ Close. 16 Click OK. select One hour. select None. For Save to Central Reminder Interval. 18 Sketch a simple straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. and click OK. Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. Setting Options 25 Click File menu ➤ Open. Notice that a tooltip is displayed even though you set Tooltip Assistance to None. select yellow. click Structural Wall.10 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. and open Imperial\i_RST_Settings. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. 21 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. select One hour. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. 11 In the Options dialog. 17 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 108 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . click Modify. and select the wall. 26 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 24 When prompted to save. 14 Click the General tab. 15 Under Notifications. When an error occurs. For Tooltip Assistance. Notice that the system settings apply to this project. 20 On the Design Bar. click Training Files. the elements causing the error display using this color. click the Graphics tab. 22 Place the cursor over any of the icons on the toolbars. This setting controls only the tooltips that display within the drawing area. specify the following options: ■ ■ ■ For Save Reminder interval. click No.

Under Journal File Cleanup. Under Windows Username. click Browse. and click Browse to select a template. 4 Click Cancel. click the Graphics tab and make the following changes: ■ ■ Under Graphics. clear Invert background color. select your preferred Save Reminder interval. select the folder to save your files to by default. They are saved at the termination of each Revit Structure session. click the File Locations tab. you specify your default file locations. For Selection Color. enter the name you want to use during worksharing. Journal files are text documents that record each step during your Revit Structure sessions. and the family template files. 5 Under Default path for user files. NOTE Revit Structure Journal files are normally found in C:\Program Files\Autodesk Revit Structure\Journals. TIP To view a template. Your login name displays by default. select values for When number of journals exceeds and Delete journals older than (days). Specifying File Locations on page 109. do not save the changes. ■ ■ 30 Click OK. Specifying File Locations | 109 . 3 Under Default template file. Specifying File Locations In this exercise. Set file locations 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. These settings control location of important Revit Structure files such as your default project template. Journal files are deleted automatically after their number exceeds the value you specify. 28 In the Options dialog. 2 In the Options dialog. and click Open. Notice that the drawing area background colors are no longer inverted and that tooltips display when you place the cursor over any building component. you can start a new project with that template. click Browse. 6 In the Browse for Folder dialog. Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. under Default path for family template files. 29 Click the General tab and make the following changes: ■ Under Notifications.27 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. as well as the material and rendering libraries. click Browse. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. Journals can be run in order to detect a problem or recreate lost steps or files. 31 Click File menu ➤ Close. Notice that there are industry-specific templates that you can set as your default template. The path may vary depending on your operating system or where you installed Revit Structure. 7 In the Options dialog. the family libraries. select Red. These files are used primarily in the software support process. and select Normal for Tooltip Assistance. If prompted.

there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path. NOTE When you are opening. 12 Click in the Library Path column for My Library. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. Each library path points Revit Structure to a folder of families or training files. 10 Under Libraries. and you can create new libraries. click Place. and change the name to My Library. centralized. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog. saving. In the following illustration. click (Add Value). and click on the right-side of the field. 8 Click Cancel. such as in a large. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. or loading a Revit Structure file. You can modify the existing library names and path. and notice the list of library names.This path is set automatically during the installation process. structural firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. (Add Library Path) that displays 110 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . 11 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane. However.

13 Navigate to C:\My Documents or any other folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit Structure projects. 16 Click File menu ➤ Open. Notice that Revit Structure navigates directly to the library path. Specifying File Locations | 111 . click the My Library icon. and select it as the library path. 21 Under Libraries. The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit Structure Open. or families. and click OK. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. 14 Under Library Name. templates. If you work in a large office. you may want to set up an office library on a network path in order to increase productivity and maintain office standards. and click Open. 20 Click the File Locations tab. select My Library. TIP The library icons display in the order that they are listed in the Options dialog. 15 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. 19 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. and Import dialogs. click My Library. Load. 17 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 18 Click Cancel. 22 Click (Remove Value) to delete the library. Save.

click template. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Edit. click OK. enter sheetmtl-Cu. 9 In the text editor. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit Structure. 17 Click OK. scroll down the list of building industry terms. click the Spelling tab. 15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Text. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 11 In the Options dialog. 112 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . do not save the changes. Click File menu ➤ Exit. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. click OK. click Edit. 16 Click Tools menu ➤ Spelling. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. If prompted. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. Notice that there is also a building industry dictionary. 4 Under Personal dictionary. to open a new Revit Structure project using the default 13 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Click File menu ➤ Save. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise.23 Proceed to the next exercise. Modify spelling settings 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 21 Under Personal dictionary. click the Spelling tab. 22 In the text editor. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. click Restore Defaults. 2 In the Options dialog. click Edit. This resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. 23 In the Options dialog. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. 20 Under Settings. select Ignore words in UPPERCASE. 19 In the Options dialog. Specifying Spelling Options on page 112. 14 Click in the drawing area. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. 5 In the text editor. 3 Under Settings. 18 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Delete sheetmtl-CU. click Modify. 12 On the Standard toolbar.

click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 4'. These are shortcut keys that you can use at any time when working on the design. You can turn snap settings on and off. 9 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. you modify snap increments. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. Modifying Snap Settings | 113 . click Browse. snapping reverts to the system default settings. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog.. 6 Under Dimension Snaps. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. Revit Structure uses the largest increment that represents less than 2 mm in the drawing area. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. under Template file. click OK. click Structural Wall. For example. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. work with snapping turned off. 8 In the Snaps dialog. 7 Under Object Snaps.25 Proceed to the next exercise. and open Imperial\i_Tutorial_Default. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. 2 In the New Project dialog. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments.rte. click OK. and enter 1. Modifying Snap Settings on page 113. click Training Files. Modify snap increments 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Structure project. 5 Click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. you modify snap settings. 4 In the New Project dialog. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. As you zoom in and out within a view. In this exercise. enter SM and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you perform an action.

While sketching. and click Wall. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. If it does not. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys such as ZO to zoom out. TIP To zoom while in the act of sketching. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the context menu. Do not set the wall end point. 13 Click to set the wall endpoint. This kind of dimension is called a listening dimension. zoom out until it does so. Notice that snapping is once again active. 11 While sketching a generic straight wall. Sketch without snapping 12 While sketching the wall. 14 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. Use snapping shortcut keys 15 On the Design Bar. Notice that the dimension snaps at 4' increments. The listening dimension reacts to the movement of your cursor and to numerical keyboard entries. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. and move the cursor to the right. click Modify. use the wheel button on your mouse. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. If you do not have a wheel button. and move the cursor to the right.10 Click in the center of the drawing area. This is the increment that you added previously. 16 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. 114 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . it refers specifically to the dimension that appears while you are in the act of sketching. Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 1'.

and object styles. lines. Modifying Project Settings In this lesson. 21 Click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. you modify the way the Project Browser organizes the project. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. click Training Files. 20 Move the cursor downward. Notice the materials listed on the left side of the dialog. Create a new material 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. 19 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. Creating and Applying Materials In this exercise. 22 Under Dimension Snaps. and delete the value 1". When you apply a material to a component.Precast Concrete for Name. annotations. you learn how to control the project environment by using the options available on the Settings menu.. You create and modify materials. fill patterns. 23 Click OK. and the wall edges. and do not save the file. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. and use it to complete the exercises. the midpoint. In the left pane of the Open dialog. If you move the cursor along the wall. 17 Enter SM. you create a new material and apply it to a model component. you modify the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. Modifying Project Settings on page 115. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. save the project file with a unique name. Well designed materials provide the foundation for photorealistic renderings. Finally. 25 Proceed to the next lesson. 3 Click (Duplicate). and specify the wall endpoint. The exercises in this lesson should be done sequentially using the same project file. all materials that are part of that component family are also loaded into the project. If you cannot complete the exercises in their entirety. 2 Scroll down. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. 18 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. Using these options. and open Imperial\i_RST_Proj_Settings. Modifying Project Settings | 115 . This list includes all materials available for use on model components. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. it will snap to the endpoints.rvt.Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. and select Concrete . When a model component is loaded into a project. it defines the appearance of that component in shaded and rendered views.

Notice that the material settings have not changed from the material that you duplicated. select Basic Wall: Foundation-Custom. You have created a new material that can be applied to any model component in this project. click This is the material you created previously. Wall. In the steps that follow. This layer represents the exterior finish of the wall. 4 In the Duplicate Material dialog. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. All of the exterior walls of this project are now changed to the new type. click Modify. 17 In the Type Selector. It is currently assigned the material Concrete Cast-in-place concrete. and click OK. select Concrete-Precast for Name. click Edit. 15 Select the left foundation wall. enter Concrete . 10 In the Value field for Structure. and select the remaining exterior walls. and double-click T.Precast. and click . 9 Enter Foundation . click Edit/New. Fnd. 116 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . 12 On the right side of the Material field.This creates a new material using the selected material settings as the starting point. 8 Click Duplicate. The lower wall now uses the Concrete texture when you render it. . 6 Select the lower exterior wall. 11 Click in the Material field for Layer 2. 13 In the Materials dialog. and click OK.Custom for the new wall name. and click OK. 18 On the Design Bar.O. 16 Press CTRL. you modify the material so that it displays correctly in a shaded or rendered view. Apply the new material 5 In the Project Browser. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. 14 Click OK 3 times.

Notice that the foundation walls are no longer gray and there is no material pattern applied in this view. select Best. In the following exercise. 21 In the drawing area. zoom into the model. Creating and Applying Materials | 117 . click . click Rendering dialog. The rendering process begins. TIP If the Rendering tab is not available on the Design Bar. the material that you created is displayed. and drag a zoom box around the area you want to render. This is because a surface pattern was not selected when the material was defined. NOTE If you want to see the material in greater detail. When it is finished. and select Rendering. draw a pick box around the entire 3D image. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 118. 20 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. Click Render. you create a pattern and apply it to this material. do the following: ■ ■ For Quality Setting. 22 In the Rendering dialog. right-click the Design Bar.19 On the View Toolbar.

Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. and double-click West. i_Settings-in progress. rotate. such as brick coursing or ceramic tile on a wall. 26 Navigate to a folder of your preference. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Fill Patterns. and move model patterns. Both pattern types are created and applied in a similar way. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a structure. You can align. There are 2 types of fill patterns: model and drafting. Notice that no model surface pattern displays on the wall. 6 In the Add Surface Pattern dialog.rvt.23 On the Rendering dialog. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns In this exercise. Model patterns are fixed and scale with the model. click Import. 118 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . 25 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Drafting pattern density is fixed. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. such as steel. choose Model. click Custom. 3 Under Pattern Type. under Display. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 7 Under Custom. Create a new fill pattern 1 In the Project Browser. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 118. Notice that a concrete surface model pattern is not available. which consists of a double-diagonal hatching pattern. 24 Close the Rendering dialog. click Show Model.rvt. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. TIP Drafting patterns represent materials in symbolic form. 8 Navigate to the training folders installed with your Revit Structure software. You can also dimension to model pattern lines. you create a new pattern and apply it to the material you created in the previous exercise. expand Elevations. 4 Scroll down the list of patterns. 5 Click New. Drafting patterns represent material in symbolic form. and save the file as i_Settings-in progress.

click Edit. 24 Click OK 3 times. 10 Under Custom. click Modify. click . 21 In the Fill Patterns dialog. click . 17 In the Value field for Structure. your training files can be found on C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RST 2009\Training. and click OK. under Pattern Type. click in the Material field for Layer 2. 14 Select the wall. This layer represents the exterior finish of the wall. 11 Enter Concrete Surface for Name. select Model. 25 On the Design Bar. 26 On the View Toolbar. and click Open. to select a fill pattern. click . 22 Select the Concrete Surface model pattern.TIP Typically. click OK. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns | 119 . 15 On the Options Bar. It is currently assigned the material Concrete-Precast. and click OK.pat from the Common folder. 12 Click OK. adjust your zoom settings as needed. 9 Select Concrete_Surface. 27 Zoom into the model until the fill pattern appears. The new model pattern is available in the Name list in the Fill Patterns dialog. . The location of these files can vary depending on the path you set during installation. select Concrete and enter 30 for Import scale. 23 In the Materials dialog. click 20 Under Surface Pattern. Apply the concrete surface pattern 13 On the View Control Bar. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. 18 In the Edit Assembly dialog. select Model Graphics Style: Wireframe. TIP If the pattern does not display. 19 On the right side of the Materials field. click Edit/New. The west wall of the building displays as solid fill.

use the shortcut keys ZF (Zoom to Fit) so the entire model fits in the drawing area. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 120 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . For example.28 Click File menu ➤ Save.rvt. Rather than continually modify the type properties of each truss. Controlling Object Styles on page 120. and double-click 3D. 2 On the keyboard. Apply object styles 1 In the Project Browser. i_Settings-in progress. Object styles are applied in every view and can be overridden in a particular view by modifying the Visibility/Graphics settings. Controlling Object Styles You can use object styles to control the appearance of components and subcomponents. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. there are often multiple trusses within a project. expand 3D Views. Object styles allow you to control the appearance of multiple components of the same type. you can change the type properties center chase width of one truss and then apply the change to all trusses. 29 Proceed to the next exercise.

7 Under the Walls category. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles on page 122. Controlling Object Styles | 121 .3 On the View Control Bar. 8 In the Color dialog. Notice the line color is applied to the wall. under Custom Colors. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save. double-click the Line Color field. 9 In the Object Styles dialog. click Model Graphics Style. expand Walls. 4 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. and click OK. 5 In the Object Styles dialog. click Show categories from all disciplines. and click Hidden Line. click OK. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. 6 Under Category. select Blue.

now you must apply it. double-click T. and click Hidden Line. 4 In the Line Pattern Properties dialog. select Truss. You can use the Visibility/Graphics settings to modify the truss appearance in a specific view. i_Settings-in progress. There are 2 ways to apply the line style to the truss.rvt. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Patterns. You have created a new line pattern. and select Web Joist.O. (example: plan view). 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 10 In the Object Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Category. 5 Enter the Types and Values shown in the following illustration: 6 Click OK twice.Modifying Line Patterns and Styles In this exercise. Create a new line pattern 1 Verify the 3D view is active. You then create a new line style to represent underslab drainage. Under Line Pattern. or you can use Object Styles to apply the change to all views. Apply the new line pattern 7 In the Project Browser. click New. click Model Graphics Style. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 122 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. Fnd. Wall. under Floor Plans. 3 In the Line Patterns dialog. expand Structural Framing. Click OK. you create a new line pattern and apply it to the truss in plan view. enter Truss for Name. 8 On the View Control Bar.

and select Web Joist for Visibility. 13 Click Override for Line Style Projection. select Override and specify the following options: ■ ■ ■ Select 2 for Line Weight. 15 Click OK twice. Select Blue for Line Color. Select Truss for Line Pattern. 12 Click the Model Categories tab. This overrides the appearance of the truss only in the current view.11 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles | 123 . expand Structural Framing. 14 In the Select Line Style dialog.

and click OK. Enter 2' 0" for Offset. equally spaced as shown below. Click . 19 Enter Underslab Drainage for Name.O. Click OK. under Modify Subcategories. under Floor Plans. 26 Draw 3 vertical lines. 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. 20 For the Underslab Drainage category. . 21 On the Modelling Tab of the Design Bar. Slab. double-click T. select Underslab Drainage. click Lines. Select Red for Line Color. specify the following: ■ ■ Click Click . 24 Click outside the upper-left corner of the slab to begin the rectangle. 22 In the Type Selector. 25 In the Options Bar. Select Double Dash 5/8" for Line Pattern. click New. and click to set the rectangle endpoint. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Click . specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select 6 for Line Weight Projection.Create a new line style 16 In the Project Browser. move the cursor to the bottom-right corner of the slab. 23 In the Options Bar. 124 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . 18 In the Line Styles dialog.

Modifying Annotations | 125 . click the default value for Units Format. 34 Click OK. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Linear. Modifying Annotations In this exercise.27 On the View Toolbar.rvt. 30 Click OK. double-click Level 1. and click OK. click . 36 Proceed to the next exercise. Notice the underslab drainage lines appear in this view. 35 Click File menu ➤ Save. Modifying Annotations on page 125. 32 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. you create a new dimension style using units of measurement that differ from the project settings. click Duplicate. 4 Enter Linear . 5 Under Text. and clear Underslab Drainage. i_Settings-in progress.Imperial for name. 28 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. Create a new dimension style 1 Verify the 3D View is active. expand Lines. You also load a new beam annotation symbol and apply it to show the beam instance number rather than the beam type number. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 33 On the Model Categories tab. 31 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. expand Lines. This turns off the visibility of the underslab drainage lines only in this view. 29 On the Model Categories tab. and clear Underslab Drainage. 3 In the Type Properties dialog.

11 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 18 Click a beam. and select the drop-down arrow that displays. 16 Click OK. Select Feet and fractional inches for Units. 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 7 Click OK twice. A beam instance tag displays on the selected beam.6 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. click Dimension. click Training Files. click Tag ➤ By Category.O. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 21 Under Leader. under Floor Plans. verify that Create is clear. . Structural Framing Tag. 13 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Fnd. double-click T. You have created a new dimension style. notice that there is a Linear . notice the structural framing tag appears twice. 17 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and open Imperial\Structural Framing Tag. Each tag category has a different loaded tag: one displays the type value. scroll to Structural Framing Tag and notice that Structural Framing Tag is now the assigned tag. 19 On the Design Bar. Notice that you can choose between the 2 beam tag types loaded into this project. 15 Under Loaded Tags. 22 On the View Toolbar. and click OK. 14 In the Tags dialog. click Modify. Wall. 12 Click Load. The remaining untagged beams are tagged. In the Type Selector.Imperial dimension available. the other displays the instance value. Under Category.rfa. 126 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . click Tag All Not Tagged. 20 Select the structural framing tag category with the loaded tag. This tag is used when tagging using the Beams By Category option. click Structural Framing Tag. click 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. Load a new beam tag 10 In the Project Browser.

Set units of measurement 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. select 0 decimal places for Rounding. 6 Click OK. The view scale moves either from the bottom or the top of the column based on the direction. You do not select a view scale to move it. and click OK. under Length.rvt. dimension values display using this setting. Modifications to area rounding are displayed in schedules and area tags. Specify temporary dimension properties 7 Click Settings menu ➤ Temporary Dimensions. dimensions use these project settings. In this table. the detail level is specified automatically according to the arrangement in the table. 12 Click OK. and Detail Level Options In this exercise. select SF for Unit suffix. Notice the 1/4" = 1' 0" view scale moved to the Medium column. you specify the project units of measurement . temporary dimensions now snap to the centerline faces and to the openings. Specifying Units of Measurement. select To the nearest 1/16" for Rounding. In this project. TIP You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties dialog. click the default value for Format. Specifying Units of Measurement. you modify the detail level assignments.Temporary Dimensions. select Openings. 8 Under Walls. i_Settings-in progress. In the second section. and Detail Level Options | 127 . and click OK. 11 Between the columns Coarse and Medium. click . In the first section. 5 In the Format dialog. you modify the temporary dimension settings. Specify detail levels 10 Click Settings menu ➤ Detail Level. select Centerlines 9 Under Doors and Windows. Any new view created using this scale is automatically assigned the detail level Medium. Specifying Units of Measurement. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise.unless there is an override. 4 In the Project Units dialog.24 Proceed to the next exercise. click the default value for Format. Temporary Dimensions. 3 In the Format dialog. 2 In the Project Units dialog. you modify 3 settings that have a broad impact on the project. In the final section. and Detail Level Options on page 127. you use the arrows between the columns to move view scales from one detail level to another.Temporary Dimensions. and click OK. Unless there is an override. under Area. When you create a new view and specify its view scale.

These drawings and sheets can become so numerous that navigating the lengthy Project Browser list is cumbersome. expand Sheets (all). In order to organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. Modifying Project Browser Organization In a typical project. you open a project that was created using Revit Architecture to better demonstrate different phases of construction.13 Click File menu ➤ Save. Organize the Project Browser by views 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Modifying Project Browser Organization on page 128. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. 14 Click File menu ➤ Close. Notice that the sheets are listed alphanumerically based on the sheet number. and open Common\c_Project_Browser. NOTE In this exercise. In this exercise.rvt. and notice the progression of each view: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Main Bldg . expand Views (all) ➤ 3D Views.Phase 3-Structure Completed Project-Structure Completed Structure w/ Roof&Floors 128 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . Revit Structure project files do not include ceiling plans. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify how the Project Browser groups and sorts. click Training Files. 3 Open each of the 3D views in the following order.Phase 1-Structure East Wing . 2 In the Project Browser. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings.Phase 2-Structure West Wing . you modify the Project Browser organization and create new methods of grouping and sorting the views and sheets. and double-click Completed Project.

expand both the Architectural and Structural category of views. notice that Views are divided into Architectural and Structural disciplines. 4 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. and click OK. Create a new browser organization name 15 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. and click OK. and notice that each is grouped by discipline. notice that views are grouped based on phase. 16 Click the Views tab. In the Project Browser. Organize Project Browser by sheets 11 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. 14 In the Project Browser. click the Folders tab. 17 Enter Phase/Type/Discipline. 12 Click the Sheets tab. under Views. and click Apply. 9 In the Browser Organization dialog. 18 In the Browser Organization Properties dialog. and click OK. select Discipline. select Type/Discipline. On the Project Browser. and click New. 5 On the Views tab. 6 In the Project Browser. and click OK.■ Completed Project Each of the 3D views varies by phase and discipline. 7 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. 20 In the Browser Organization dialog. select Phase/Type/Discipline as the current browser organization. 21 In the Project Browser. expand each sheet set. and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Group by: Phase Then by: Type Then by: Discipline 19 Click OK. under Sheets. 10 In the Project Browser. Modifying Project Browser Organization | 129 . and click OK. 8 Select Phase. expand each view type. 13 Select Sheet Prefix. expand Complete ➤ 3D Views and then expand Architectural and Structural.

By saving these settings as a template and using it throughout the office. In this lesson. All the settings that you changed in this lesson are saved with the project. named print settings. In the lesson that follows. each is modified in a way to make it useful to a particular industry. choose the option that will help you develop the best template with the least amount of work. you create a Revit Structure template file and set it as your default template. 4 In the New Project dialog. such as structural or construction. 22 Click File menu ➤ Close. You can save Project Browser organization schemes. If your work requires a variety of templates. You can also save these settings in a template file. enter a unique file name. and view names. and click OK. and double-click Building Elevation. When you create a new template based on an existing template.rte template. Creating a Structural Template In this lesson. select Project for Create new. you maintain consistent standards and reduce the amount of repetitive work. A well designed template will ensure office standards are maintained and will reduce repetitive work. the same rules apply. For example. Review existing templates 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. and click Open. Choosing the Base Template In this exercise. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to other templates. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. Type. you modified various project settings that affect project appearance and organization. Depending on your needs. Other than the default template. You can use an existing template as the baseline or use no template at all. and rendered scenes in a template. 3 Select the Structural Analysis-Default. expand Views ➤ Elevations. The lesson begins with choosing the right base template and progresses through many of the most common modifications that you would consider in order to make a template unique to your situation. preloaded families. 5 Click OK. you select the starting point for your structural template. Whenever you create a new project or template. When you create new projects. click Browse. It is mostly conceptual and is designed as a road map with options for your consideration. you may decide to modify one or more of these templates to the specific needs of your company. levels. when you create a new project. 6 In the Project Browser. Notice there are a number of different templates to choose from. navigate to your preferred directory. certain baseline settings are still assigned to the new project. and Discipline. the project template is used to provide the initial project settings such as materials. 130 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . Even if you choose not to base that project on a template. 2 Under Template File. The first step in creating your structural template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. If you want to save this file. a group of settings are used to specify the project environment. This lesson is intended to provide you with a blueprint of how to create your structural template. Although Revit Structure provides many templates to choose from. you can select an existing template or begin the project with no template.Notice that the Project Browser has reorganized all the views within this project according to Phase. dimensions styles. you create an office template.

you can establish the settings that are common to most projects. and click OK. Modifying Project Settings In this exercise. click Browse. When you create the material.7 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region and. In order to maintain office standards and reduce rework. 10 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. you modify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Materials Fill patterns Object styles Line styles. there are additional commands on the Settings menu that allow modifications that can be saved in a template. in the drawing area. Notice that there are more predefined levels than you normally see in the default template. 11 Under Template File. select Project Template. These settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. are simple in respect to the predefined views and schedules. 13 Click Open. you can dictate its appearance in all views and renderings. In this exercise. close them. you modify the project settings for your new template. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. Notice that the structural analysis template is more complex than the default template. but the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of the structural tools. navigate throughout the various views and schedules. Modifying Project Settings on page 131. Modifying Project Settings | 131 . you can create the materials commonly used in most projects. weights. such as the structural template. 8 In the Project Browser. If you have additional projects open. For example. drag a zoom region around the level heads. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. If you want to use a template other than the default. and patterns Annotations Project units Temporary dimensions Detail levels Project Browser organization View direction In addition to the list above. 12 Select a default template. 14 Under Create New. you can select it now. Other templates. 9 Click File menu ➤ Close. The specifics regarding each of these are addressed at the end of this exercise.

3 Click OK twice to close the Material Library and Materials dialogs. 12 Click the Annotation Objects tab. 7 Click OK when finished. 14 Click OK to close the Object Styles dialog. you can set line weights. such as beams and columns in orthographic views. 6 Create new fill patterns as needed. 132 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . The widths are dependent on the scale of the design. Create and modify fill patterns 4 Click Settings menu ➤ Fill Patterns. Observe the materials that are already defined. Specify object styles 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 10 Modify the properties of any existing categories as needed. one for perspective model line styles. Create and modify materials 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. TIP Drafting patterns represent materials in symbolic form. or modify existing patterns. In the dialog. Modifying System Settings on page 107. RELATED See Modifying Project Settings on page 115 for more information on creating new fill patterns. 13 Modify categories. specific modifications are not dictated. For more details on modifying these settings. Modify line weights 15 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Weights. 2 Scroll down the Name list. You can add and delete view scales. You can define the widths of 16 different pens for 6 different drawing scales. and scroll through the list of categories. TIP When the material of a component is set to by category. create new subcategories. or refer to the Help documentation. 5 Scroll through the list of model and drafting patterns. and create new subcategories as needed. line colors. You are merely pointed to each area where you can adapt the template to your needs. 11 If necessary. it adopts the material assigned to its object styles category. The Model Line Weights tab controls the line width of structural components. 9 Click the Model Objects tab. and move model patterns. If there are materials that are commonly used within your office or industry. create and modify them as needed. line patterns. You can align. In the Object Styles dialog. rotate. and materials for different categories and subcategories of components or imported objects. The Line Weights command controls the display of line widths for each scale of a view. and one for annotation symbol line styles. You may want to rename or modify some of the existing materials.During this exercise. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a structure. see the previous lesson. there are 3 tabs: one for model component line styles.

The arrowheads configured within this dialog can be applied to text notes. click Duplicate. To see the details of a particular style. name the style. and notice the list of existing arrowhead styles. 30 For existing line categories. 26 To modify a line pattern. The Annotation Line Weights tab controls the line width of annotation symbols. modify the line weight. 20 Modify existing line weights as needed. select it. name the style. 34 Select the Type drop-down list. 42 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing style. 17 Modify existing line weights as needed. 19 Click the Perspective Line Weights tab. 37 If you need to create a new arrowhead style. 40 Select the Type drop-down list. create new line subcategories using line weights and line patterns previously modified or created. 38 Click OK. 28 Click OK. and dimensions. select it from this list. 18 Add and delete view scales as needed. Modifying Project Settings | 133 . tags. 43 If you need to create a new linear dimension style. 16 Click the Model Line Weights tab. and specify the properties. Annotation line widths are independent of the view scale. angular. Modify Dimension Styles 39 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Linear. or line pattern as needed. 31 If necessary. Modify arrowheads 33 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Arrowheads. and notice the list of existing linear dimension styles. 27 Add and delete line patterns as needed. and specify the properties. and radial dimensions are modified separately. select it from this list. 41 Modify the properties of existing linear dimension styles if necessary. and click Edit. Modify line patterns 24 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Patterns. Linear. 36 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing arrowhead. 22 Modify existing line weights as needed. 23 Click OK. such as section lines and dimension lines. click Duplicate. 25 Scroll through the list of line patterns. 32 Click OK. To see the details of a particular style. line color. 35 Modify the properties of existing arrowhead styles if necessary. Modify line styles 29 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Styles.The Perspective Line Weights tab controls the line width of objects in perspective views. 21 Click the Annotation Line Weights tab.

51 Under Length. The detail level is based on view scale. The tag assignments in this dialog dictate the default tag for each category. 60 Click OK. For example. Using the arrows between the columns. the beam is tagged using the tag assigned to the structural framing category in this dialog. When you create a new view. Specify project units 50 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. 47 Scroll through the list of loaded tags. when you add a structural framing tag with the tag option selected. In the Tags dialog. click Load. and choose a decimal symbol. the last loaded tag becomes the default tag. 62 Review the table. make sure each category is assigned the desired tag. View scales are organized under the detail level headings Coarse. 45 Repeat the previous 5 steps for angular and radial dimensions. You can override tag assignment using the Type Selector. You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties command. Volume. you can move view scales from one detail level to another. Specify detail levels 61 Click Settings menu ➤ Detail Level. 53 Click OK. TIP In the drawing area.44 Click OK. 59 Under Doors and Windows. Modify loaded tags 46 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 49 After you have loaded the necessary tags. 56 Click OK. 55 Specify the Slope option. specify where you want the temporary dimensions to measure from by default. Medium. and click OK. 58 Under Walls. Specify temporary dimensions 57 Click Settings menu ➤ Temporary Dimensions. or Fine. 48 To load new annotation tags. You can have multiple tags loaded for any category. Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Radial. 134 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . you can override the assignment by selecting a different tag from the drop-down list. the detail level of that view is automatically assigned using this table. and move view scales as needed. ■ ■ Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Angular. 54 Repeat the previous 2 steps for the Area. When more than one tag has been loaded for a category. click Format. you can modify the location of temporary dimension witness lines. specify the default location for temporary dimensions. and Angle settings. Notice many categories do not have loaded tags. 52 Modify the unit settings if necessary.

click the arrows between columns. create new browser organization types. In order to organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. Rename. click Edit/New. and select Properties. 74 In the Type Properties dialog. 63 Click OK. To move the view scales. 68 Click the Sheets tab. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings.NOTE You cannot select specific scales in this dialog. 66 Delete. For example. Modifying Project Settings | 135 . In certain projects. 67 If necessary. Rename. 71 Click OK. 69 Delete. These drawings and sheets can become so numerous that navigating the lengthy Project Browser list is cumbersome. The view scales move from the lower-left to the upper-right and vice-versa. create new browser organization types. This parameter makes it possible for you to select a different view direction. you can view the project from the slab looking up (up direction). or from the roof looking down (down direction). or Edit existing organization types. right-click any plan view of the Structural Plan Family. 70 If necessary. Modify project browser organization 64 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. engineers view plans using different orientations in different countries. click View Direction. Setting View Direction 72 In the Project Browser. In a typical project. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify how the Project Browser groups and sorts. 73 In the Element Properties dialog. click the Views tab. 65 In the Browser Organization dialog. or Edit existing organization types.

Settings Menu Command Project Parameters Associated Tutorial Considerations This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. you can save rendered scene settings to a template. 76 Click OK to exit the dialogs. you must decide if the time investment is offset later by the reduction in repetitive work. Each command is available on the Settings menu. 136 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . You can find additional information in Help. you may only want to add generically named settings that would be applicable to most projects.75 Use the down arrow to change the parameters to Up or Down. This could be useful for things such as title blocks. you should consider each carefully before applying changes to a template. Additional project settings 77 On the Settings menu. Each of these areas is covered later in this lesson or in other tutorials. This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. Although these settings can be saved within a template. you can add project (and shared) parameters to a template. and framing tags. View Templates Create and modify the view templates to control the appearance of default views. If necessary. For example. there are several additional commands that control the project environment. See Setting up Shared and Project Parameters on page 144. Use the table below as a checklist. and make modifications in each area as necessary. However. Links to associated tutorials are provided. In such a case. See Modifying Views and View Templates on page 139.

2 In the Type Selector. Goal: Load new beam type Steps: In the Element Properties dialog. you could load detail components. Although the options are endless.Settings Menu Command Structural Settings Associated Tutorial Considerations This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. Load and modify families 1 Use the project started in the previous exercise. if you loaded every beam type you could find. However. enter a name. or add to this selection. Modify beam type Create new beam type Loading and Modifying Families and Groups | 137 . Loading and Modifying Families and Groups In this exercise. In the steps that follow. For example. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups on page 137. click Beam. For example. brace symbols. and beams. you may want to load families into the template to save time later or ensure consistency throughout the office. This would be cumbersome and counterproductive. You may want to modify slab types to add a more diverse selection within the template. there are some important thoughts to consider. and click OK. Obviously. you do both. Although this is possible. You should think very carefully about what families or groups to load and modify within a template. do so before starting this exercise. Make modifications. you should only load components that tend to be used in every project and are not likely to change. Depending on the intended use of this template. and click OK. or use the Project Browser to delete an existing type. select Edit/New. it is not recommended because it would increase the file size significantly before the first component was added to the project. you would have to scroll through a lengthy list of beams every time you changed a beam within a project. you can move onto the next component type. 78 Proceed to the next exercise. and column symbols. you may want to delete. select Edit/New. In the Element Properties dialog. modify. You can do this in several ways: select a component type and click Properties to modify or add a new type. You can load any family or group into a template. you can set the symbolic representation settings for cutback distance. See Modifying Structural Settings on page 142. Modify type properties. In the Element Properties dialog. notice the list of beams is already loaded. and click Open. titleblocks. select Load. Navigate to the directory containing the beam type. If necessary. If you have not completed the previous exercise. It is important to understand that you should not load every conceivable family into a template file. Use the instructions in the table below to perform these steps. select it. create. or load a new beam type. each component loaded will add to the length of the relative Type Selector list. Click Duplicate. 3 To modify. you load and modify families or groups into the template started in the previous exercise. In addition. click on the Options Bar. and on the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. If this selection is satisfactory.

Notice it has Revit in the upper-right corner. You may want to load a titleblock applicable to your office and then delete this titleblock. To do so. Press ESC twice to return to the template. Notice that there is a titleblock symbol loaded. Modifying Views and View Templates on page 139. You may want to open other Design Bar tabs and make modifications to components not available on this tab. 138 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . right-click the component. and select the titleblock type. create. You can use the Project Browser to delete a component from the project/template. or modify any component families or groups as necessary. This titleblock is currently part of the template. click Load. 5 Repeat the process for any component type that you want to modify. 13 Using any of the techniques learned in previous steps. 14 Proceed to the next exercise. Use Project Browser to modify families 7 In the Project Browser. load. 8 Expand Annotation Symbols. click Preview. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. (The titleblock name may vary depending on the template you started with. Notice that you have the option to Load Family or Load Group. You can use the Project Browser to modify family types. 11 To load a titleblock. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library. expand Families. and click Delete. You can also load families and groups from the File menu. Notice that each family category is listed. Loading from the library is quickest when you know exactly what families you want to load. 12 Click OK.) 9 Expand the titleblock.4 Click OK.

Apply view templates 7 In the Project Browser. right-click. and then create new views that will automatically use those templates. you save time and increase consistency. In this exercise. you create the views required for your template. and double-click Level 1. expand Views ➤ Structural Plans. 8 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. View Range. View templates help standardize the look of all views by providing the initial settings for a view. you create and apply the underlying view templates that control the initial appearance of the views. 2 For Name. In addition. and make modifications. select the view. you can apply a view template to any view. Keep in mind that these settings are the default settings for this view type. select Structural Framing Plan. you will first modify view templates. Detail Level. By modifying the view templates according to your specific needs. In this exercise. you created new projects using different templates. 4 If necessary. At any time. These settings are applied when you create a new plan view by adding a new level. rename or duplicate the view template. 5 Repeat the steps above for each of the view templates in the Name drop-down list. You can also apply a template to an existing view at any time using the Apply View Template command. TIP To select the view template directly from the Project Browser. Discipline.Modifying Views and View Templates At the beginning of this lesson. and you noticed that each template had a unique set of predefined views. and the visibility settings of categories and subcategories. and select Apply View Template. Modifying Views and View Templates | 139 . 6 Click OK. Create and modify view templates 1 Click Settings menu ➤ View Templates. The view inherits view properties such as View Scale. 3 Specify each value as needed. These values represent the starting point for each plan view.

28 Rename the 3D View. click Level on the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Make sure you are still in the Level 2 view. you may want to modify the view properties of any new views. 18 In the Project Browser. 9 Select the Structural Framing Plan template. 24 Create additional levels as needed. nor is there a limit to the number of view templates that you can apply.Applying a view template to a view is a one-time action. TIP To apply the template to multiple views. Subsequent modifications to the view template do not affect any current views unless you reapply the view template. and notice the context menu includes options to rename. right-click Level 1. Create and modify views 16 In the Project Browser. 23 Rename and reposition the level as needed. under Structural Plans. 14 Select the Structural Plan template. Then right-click and select Apply View Template. 22 Add the new level within the elevation view. duplicate. 140 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . Rename. under 3D Views. under Structural Plans. 10 Select Apply automatically to new views of same type. this view template will be used to set the initial view properties. select Make Plan View. Notice the level names have blue titles for the associated plan views. and click OK. double-click Level 2. open the view from the Project Browser. or delete them as needed. and press Ctrl while selecting additional views. select the view in the Project Browser. 27 In the Project Browser. click View menu ➤ View Properties. The associated floor plan will use the Structural Plan view template to set its initial view properties. There is no limit to the number of times you can apply a view template to a view. Black levels have no associated views. and click OK. duplicate. If necessary. 20 To add additional levels to the template. under Floor Plans. You can also duplicate or delete the view. When the view template is applied the view properties of the target view are instantly reset to match those of the template. This option means that every time a new plan view is created. You can rename this view. right-click {3D}. on the View toolbar. click 26 In the Project Browser. if desired. and select Rename. 15 If you modified any other view templates. expand 3D Views. Create 3D views 25 To add 3D views to the template. After the template is applied. 13 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. 17 In the Project Browser. review the existing floor plans. double-click Building Elevation. 12 In the Project Browser. To do so. or delete this view. click Apply. 19 In the Project Browser. 11 Click Apply. 21 In the Options Bar. review the Structural plans and elevations. under Elevations. and apply the appropriate template. the view is not linked to the template in any way.

click . 35 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Modifying Views and View Templates | 141 . on the View toolbar. select the category type. and modify their properties accordingly. On the Filter tab. You may want to add schedules to a template. click Dynamically Modify Views 30 On the View toolbar. and click OK. You may want to consider adding the schedules that you use most often. click Schedule/Quantities. supply a view name. and click OK. make the following modifications as needed: ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. This can save time and ensure office standards are maintained. click . This tool provides freeform navigation for exterior and interior viewing. Create and modify schedules 33 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select and order required fields. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. modify settings. 31 Click the arrow on the right side of the Dynamic View icon and select Options. you can modify the Steering Wheel visibility and appearance. The view is listed in the Project Browser under Views ➤ 3D Views. Save the view 32 To save the view. Using this dialog. assign filters. The Steering Wheel is displayed in the drawing area.29 To create additional 3D views. 34 If you want to add schedules to your template.

or on the sheet itself. 37 Repeat the steps above for each schedule type you add to the template. select the default titleblock. right-click the sheet in the Project Browser. Modifying Structural Settings on page 142. click View menu ➤ New ➤ Place Titleblock. You may want to consider adding the settings that you use most often.■ ■ On the Formatting tab. Create custom symbolic representations 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Structural Settings. select the titleblock and delete it. Modifying Structural Settings You can create custom cutback distances for braces. Subsequent sheets are numbered consecutively based on the previous sheet. 2 In the Structural Settings dialog. You are prompted to select a titleblock. You can still add views to the sheet. 36 Click OK. On the Appearance tab. modify settings. and modify their properties accordingly. and click OK. click the Symbolic Representation Settings tab. select one. Add sheets to the template 38 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 41 Create new sheets as needed. You may want to add symbolic settings to a template. double-click the sheet number. 39 Add views to the sheet by selecting Add View from the View tab of the Design Bar. TIP You can add sheets to the template and delete the titleblock. beams. 40 To rename or renumber the sheet. You can also create custom brace symbols for use in plan views and for parallel line offset distances. To later add a titleblock to a sheet. and click Rename. click Sheet. If you have already loaded your titleblocks into the template. and click OK. 42 Proceed to the next exercise. modify settings. and columns. This can save time and ensure office standards are maintained. TIP You can drag and drop views directly from the Project Browser onto the sheet. After the sheet is created. To do so. 142 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings .

Modifying Import/Export Settings | 143 . You then set the import line weights for DWG/DXF. 6 Proceed to the next exercise. The layer names are stored in a text file (exportlayers.) Parallel line offset: Enter the symbolic distance for the parallel line offset.txt). When you import a DWG or DXF file. and are exported along with your project into the appropriate CAD program. Modify export layers for DWG and DXF 1 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DWG/DXF. you modify the export layer settings for DWG/DXF and DGN. The Export Layers command maps Revit Structure categories and subcategories to specific layer names that are available after exporting to other CAD programs. Symbolic column cutback distance: Sets the distance from the center of the column to the beam endpoint. specify the desired line representation and offset as follows: ■ Plan representation: Select the desired symbolic line type for plan representation (Line or Line with Angle. ■ 5 Click OK. Revit Structure presets the layer names to American Institute of Architects (AIA) industry standards.3 Under General. The layer mapping files reside in the Data folder of the Revit Structure program installation directory. enter the desired values for the following cutback distances: ■ Symbolic brace/beam cutback distance: Sets the distance from the center of the brace/beam to the center of the adjoining beam. Modifying Import/Export Settings In this exercise. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. Modifying Import/Export Settings on page 143. ■ 4 Under Brace Symbols.

When you save these mappings to a text file. and so on. Their definitions are stored in an external file ensuring consistency across families and projects. for example. When scheduling. For example. and click Save. Project parameters are those parameters (either instance or type) that are used within a single project for the purposes of scheduling information specific to that project. Modify export layers for DGN 4 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DGN. 8 In the dialog.txt) for MicroStation.2 For each category. and so on. These settings are retained within the project template. they become the set mappings for the project. and click Save. project parameters. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. name the file. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters on page 144. match the pen (DWG/DXF Color Number) to the appropriate line weight (values from 1 . and click Save. you can define additional parameters that are not included in either the pre-defined instance and type parameters within family components or within the project template. click Save As. windows. click Save As. The layer mapping files reside in the Data folder of the Revit Structure program installation directory. you do not need to worry about where the text file is saved. Using shared parameters. you could use shared parameters to add specific parameters to an existing family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not initially present by default. The layer names are stored in a text file (exportlayersdgn. they cannot be used to tag objects. When you import a DWG or DXF file. They cannot be shared with other projects. and then are exported along with your project into the appropriate CAD program. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Level Number and Color ID Cut Level Number and Color ID 6 If you modified the settings in this dialog.16). Modify import line weights 7 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Import Line Weights DWG/DXF. Pen Number 1 to Line Weight Number 1. it lists components regardless of category by using an external parameter as a filter. therefore. Their values may also be aggregated and reported using multi-category schedules. name the file. 144 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . Multi-Category Tags employ shared parameters to permit tagging of any family component regardless of category. name the file. Pen Number 2 to Line Weight Number 2. Set as many pen-line weight mappings as desired. doors. 5 For each category. you refine the template further by setting up shared parameters. You can add these shared parameters to any family regardless of category. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Layer Name and Color ID Cut Layer Name and Color ID 3 If you modified the settings in this dialog. you normally schedule a single category: rooms. You can import pen numbers from a DWG or DXF file and map them to a Revit Structure line weight. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters In this exercise. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. and related multi-category tags and schedules. 9 Click Save As. and unlike shared parameters. When you create a multi-category schedule.

21 Click OK. under Groups. and click OK. 27 Click OK. 18 Under Type. and click OK when finished. you can browse to that file and modify it as needed. 19 Specify whether the parameter is stored by instance or type. If you do not need to make changes to shared or project parameters. Creating Named Print Settings. 7 Under Parameter group. and select Shared Parameter. 10 Click OK. 2 Click Create. 11 For each parameter group. you can create a list of parameters. 23 To add a shared project parameter. 5 Enter the group name. 3 Name and save the file. select a parameter discipline type. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters | 145 . and specify the Type. Create and load multi-category tags 29 Create required multi-category tags in the Family Editor. 12 Click OK when you have finished creating shared parameters. After the file is named. select Project parameter. select a group to which you want to add parameters. 25 Click OK. click New. you may want to save the file to a network location. 4 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. 26 Specify whether you want the shared parameter to be an instance or a type parameter. 14 Click Add. For each parameter group. enter a parameter name. Set up project parameters 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. 9 Name the parameter. click Add. 22 Add project parameters as needed. add required parameters. 28 Add shared project parameters as needed. 20 Select the element categories to which this parameter applies. 17 Under Discipline. If a file already exists. detailed instructions are not supplied because each office has a unique set of needs. 6 Create as many groups as needed. select a parameter value type. Set up shared parameters 1 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. click New. 16 Under Name. 24 Click Select. This allows you to name the external parameter file. NOTE This procedure is for creating a new shared parameter file. and specify the categories to which this parameter applies. 8 Under Parameters. and select a shared parameter. you can begin creating parameter groups. If this template will be used by multiple people within an office. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog.In this exercise. you can skip this exercise and move on to the last exercise of this lesson.

34 Under Name. you need only select a setting. and click OK.For information on creating multi-category tags. Create multi-category schedules 32 On the View tab of the Design Bar. or consult the Help documentation. For each printer. 2 Under Name. and the percent of actual size. and print. This can be beneficial if you have numerous printers in a large networked office. Notice that the shared parameters created in previous steps are included under Available fields. select the tag. Create named print settings 1 Click File menu ➤ Print. The tag is now part of the template. make minor modifications if necessary. see the tutorial referenced in the introduction of this exercise. click OK. 31 Navigate to the directory that contains the tag you want to load. By creating named settings within the template. paper placement. 33 Select <Multi-Category> for Category. 35 Create the schedule as you did in the previous exercise. 37 Create additional multi-category schedules as needed. enter a name for the schedule. 146 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . Creating Named Print Settings on page 146. 30 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. you create named print settings. you can set options such as sheet sizes. Creating Named Print Settings In this exercise. and add them to your default template file. After you have created the multi-category tags within the Family Editor. select the first printer for which you want to create named settings. You can also create named settings for printing to a DWF writer. 36 When you have completed the schedule. you can load them into the template. 38 Proceed to the final exercise. click Schedule/Quantities. and click Open.

5 In the New dialog. 7 If you want to have multiple settings for this printer. 4 Click Save As.3 Under Settings. and create additional settings as needed. 6 Modify the printer settings. click Setup. enter a name for the print setting and click OK. click New. 8 Click OK when you have finished creating named settings for this printer. Creating Named Print Settings | 147 .

loaded components. and saved them to a template. and save it as a template file. Set the template as your default template file 20 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 13 Navigate to the directory where you want to save the template. Save the template 12 Click File menu ➤ Save. TIP Another way to create a template is to delete all model geometries from an existing project. 24 Click OK. The changes you made to the template are now the starting point for this project. The only remaining task is to save it. you modified settings. 148 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings .9 In the Print dialog. 22 Next to Default template file. In this lesson. 19 Click OK. TIP You can also create named settings for your DWF writer. click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. 11 Click OK when finished. You can also set this template as your default template. If you need to share this file with others. 21 Click the File Locations tab.rte). you can use the Transfer Project Standards tool to move standards from one project to another. you help ensure the office standards are maintained and reduce repetitive work that would be done by each employee for each project. and click Save. This can provide a good starting point for a template. Use the template 16 To use the template. 17 Select Browse. 18 Select the template. select it. 14 Under Save as type. 23 Navigate to the template location. 15 Name the template. and navigate to the location where you saved the template. By investing the time to individualize your template. click Setup. click Browse. you should save it to a network path. 10 Repeat these steps as needed. select a different printer. select Template Files (*. and click Open. Your template is complete. In addition. and create new settings for this printer. and click Open.

This is the active view that displays in the drawing area. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_1. you use these columns to complete the structural framing. 2 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats.rvt. click Training Files. 3 In the left pane of the Import/Link dialog. 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and select Imperial\i_STR_CSM_Level2. click Training Files. you learn how to import or link a 2-dimensional (2D) drawing created in AutoCAD for use as a background.dwg. and Revit Architecture. Importing/Linking Drawing Files In this lesson. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 4 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ Select Link and Current view only. Importing/Linking a 2D AutoCAD File In this lesson. NOTE For training purposes. The imported file is used as a background template for creating the structural elements of the model. by importing or linking an existing Autodesk architectural project created in AutoCAD.Starting a New Project 4 In this tutorial you begin your structural model in Revit Structure 2009. 149 . select Views (all) ➤ Structural Plans. Notice that Level 2 is bold. you learn how to import or link to files from different drawing programs. some structural columns were added to the model at off-grid locations in conjunction with architectural columns. In the next tutorial Creating a Structural Model on page 161. AutoCAD Architecture.

stairs and elevator opening symbols. ■ ■ ■ For Colors. Selecting Link (instead of import) allows you to view. paste. to pin the drawing so that it cannot be moved within the 150 | Chapter 4 Starting a New Project . you cannot select individual elements in the linked model. select Auto . 6 On the Options toolbar.Center to Center. copy. The file becomes view specific and will behave like an annotation. and rotate the view as one object. drag. For Positioning. Exterior facade outlines. However. click the imported/linked file. and a few basic interior walls and doors display in the view. Click Open. click drawing area. 5 In the drawing area.NOTE Selecting Current View Only prevents the DWG file from appearing in all views. select Black and White.

Importing /Linking an AutoCAD Architecture File | 151 . 1 In the Project Browser. you use these columns to complete the structural framing. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 10 Click File menu ➤ Close. Creating a Structural Model on page 161. Importing /Linking an AutoCAD Architecture File In this lesson. and click OK. This is the active view that displays in the drawing area. click Training Files. select each file and select Insert for Bind Type. and select the latest available format. a new training file is supplied. In the next tutorial.7 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. You can save the open file if you wish. NOTE For training purposes. In the next tutorial. select Export to AutoCAD. 9 Select Halftone for the value of i_STR_CSM_Level2. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_1. some structural columns were added to the model at off-grid locations in conjunction with architectural columns. expand Views (all). the file should be prepared as follows: ■ ■ Proxy graphics should be enabled by setting the system variable to 1. 8 In the Visibility/Graphic dialog. and select Imperial\i_RST_Import_ADT.rvt.dwg. 2 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats 3 In the left pane of the Import/Link dialog. select the Imported Categories tab. ■ Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Notice that Level 2 is bold. On the File menu. Creating a Structural Model on page 161. Bind all external reference files (xrefs) to make the architectural data visible to the engineer after export. and expand Structural Plans. click Training Files. Before exporting the file from AutoCAD Architecture. The halftone of the imported drawing is used as a background for placing columns.dwg. In the Xref Manager dialog. you learn how to import a 3-dimensional (3D) drawing created in AutoCAD Architecture for use as a background.

Exterior facade outlines. Click Open. click the Imported Categories tab. For Positioning. stairs. and elevator opening symbols. to pin the drawing so that it cannot be moved within the 7 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 8 In the Visibility/Graphic dialog. select Auto . click the imported/linked file.Origin to Origin. and a few basic interior walls and doors display in the view.4 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Colors. click Revit Structure drawing area. 6 On the Options toolbar. 152 | Chapter 4 Starting a New Project . select Invert. 5 In the drawing area.

12 On the Options toolbar. Importing /Linking an AutoCAD Architecture File | 153 . 13 Select any column. click Partial Explode. Click OK. The halftone of the imported drawing is used as a background for placing columns. click . 11 In the drawing area. Under Constraints. enter -1' 0' for Base Offset. click the linked file. click 14 In the Element Properties dialog. do the following: ■ ■ . and click OK. 10 On the View toolbar. and on the Option Bar.9 Select Halftone for the value of i_RST_Import_ADT.dwg.

select Auto . You can save the open file if desired. for Positioning. levels. columns. In the next tutorial.rvt. a new training file is supplied. and floors from the original design and monitor any changes made to those elements. and click OK. select Project under Create New. 6 Click Open. and open Imperial\i_STR_CSM_Revit. 5 In the Add Link dialog. You also learn how to use the Copy/Monitor feature to provide project coordination between architects and structural engineers. 15 Close the Element Properties dialog. Open a new project 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. Linking a Revit Architecture File In this exercise. 154 | Chapter 4 Starting a New Project .Notice the column adjusts to the change. You can copy grids. Notice that Level 2 is bold. walls. This is the active view that displays in the drawing area. click Training Files. 16 Click File menu ➤ Close. 4 In the left pane of the Import/Link dialog. Link a Revit Architecture file 3 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Revit.Origin to Origin. select a template file. Creating a Structural Model on page 161. 2 In the New Project dialog. you learn how to link to a 3-dimensional (3D) drawing created in Revit Architecture for use as a background.

Exterior facade outlines. click Revit Structure drawing area. 8 In the drawing area. The Design Bar changes to Copy/Monitor mode Set options 12 On the Design Bar. to pin the drawing so that it cannot be moved within the 10 Click Tools menu ➤ Copy/Monitor ➤ Select Link. click the linked file. 11 Click the imported Revit drawing. stairs and elevator opening symbols. This is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit. click Options. Linking a Revit Architecture File | 155 . 7 Enter ZF. 9 On the Options toolbar. and a few basic interior walls and doors display in the view.

under Additional Copy Parameters. Elements available for monitoring are separated into 5 categories (Levels. Therefore. select Level 2. and the New Type for the corresponding element available in the template selected. 156 | Chapter 4 Starting a New Project . Grids. click OK to close the Copy/Monitor Options Dialog. click Copy. click Multiple on the Options toolbar. A column may span from level 1 to level 10 of a structure and may present a problem when the analytical model is generated. 14 In the Columns dialog. you can exclude element types you do not want to copy. 18 Click the grid to be copied/monitored. 15 Set the other parameter as desired. make selections. under Structural Plans. Copy grids 16 In the Project Browser. 17 On the Copy/Monitor Design Bar. Columns. To select more than one grid. NOTE Architectural columns typically extend through multiple layers of a model. Each tab provides various parameters that can be set for that specific element. Also. When finished. and Floors). select Split Columns by Levels. and while pressing CTRL. click the Columns tab. 13 In the Copy/Monitor Options dialog. columns need to be split at each level.The Copy/Monitor Options dialog opens. Walls. On each tab the Original Type column identifies the type for the Revit Architecture file.

click Multiple on the Options toolbar. click Copy. NOTE A warning message may indicate that the loaded type has been renamed. double-click Building Elevation. Copying levels 19 In the Project Browser. NOTE If you are prompted that the element type already exists in the project. and that the type from the new project will be used. under Elevations (Building Elevation). To select more than one level. and select each level. press CTRL. Linking a Revit Architecture File | 157 . an eyeball symbol is displayed to indicate a relationship with the original element. After you select the grid. and that the type from the new project will be used. click OK.NOTE If you are prompted that the element type already exists in the project. The warning can be ignored. click OK. 21 Click the level to be copied/monitored. 20 On the Copy/Monitor Design Bar.

After selecting each element. click Copy. click OK. Copy structural walls. and on the Options Bar. click . NOTE If you are prompted that the element type already exists in the project. 25 On the Design bar. under Structural Plans. select Level 1. The warning can be ignored. an eyeball symbol is displayed to indicate a relationship with the original element. an eyeball symbol is displayed to indicate a relationship with the original element. and columns 22 In the Project Browser. 24 Click the structural elements to be copied/monitored. NOTE A warning message may indicate that the loaded type has been renamed. To select more than one element. click Finish Mode. floors. and that the type from the new project will be used.After you select each level. and select each element. NOTE A warning message may indicate that the loaded type has been renamed. click Multiple on the Options toolbar. press CTRL. The warning can be ignored. Change the structural usage of the copied elements 26 Select a structural wall to be copied/monitored. 23 On the Copy/Monitor Design Bar. 158 | Chapter 4 Starting a New Project .

NOTE For all copied/monitored structural walls. click . check the value for Structural. and click OK. ■ Select Overlay. select Bearing for Structural Usage. Manage links 30 Click File menu ➤ Manage Links. Click OK. and on the Option Bar. click Reference Type. 32 In the Manage Links dialog. 31 In the Manage Links dialog. 28 Select a floor to be copied/monitored.27 In the Element Properties dialog. Select Attachment to make a link visible when its host document is linked into another file. The linked Revit file is displayed. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. the structural usage parameter must be changed in the Element Properties dialog. and floors. so that Revit Structure will enable the analytical projection plane feature for those elements. columns. and click OK. ■ Linking a Revit Architecture File | 159 . Links will appear in the file they are linked into. click the Revit tab. The link will not follow the host if it becomes linked into another file.

In a later tutorial. a new training file is supplied. NOTE All copied elements are monitored for possible changes. 160 | Chapter 4 Starting a New Project . Project Coordination on page 461. You can save the open file if you wish. 34 Proceed to the next tutorial.33 Click File menu ➤ Close. Creating a Structural Model on page 161. the updated Revit Architecture file is reloaded into Revit Structure. In the next tutorial. The coordination monitor function provides notification that updates have occurred.

Creating a Structural Model 5 In this chapter. you create a structural model using the tools available in Revit Structure 2009. you add horizontal framing to an area of Level 2. and then copy this framing to other levels. You also learn how to splice the columns. Creating a Structural Model In this lesson. After you copy columns. You copy columns and use the paste-align command to add structure to other levels. you begin by adding columns from Ground Level to Level 2. 161 .

which you use as a background drawing for placing columns. and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click . and enter A. In the left pane of the Open dialog. .Adding Grid Lines to the Imported Drawing In this exercise. the imported drawing is a halftone. 3 On the Options Bar. click Grid. 5 Click the value in the grid head. 1 On the View toolbar. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Grids. click Training Files. click structural model.rvt. Notice the grid line is highlighted with a blue value within the grid head. 4 Select the left vertical grid line. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 162 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model .

9 On the View toolbar. The last vertical grid is K. they are labelled in alphabetical sequence.As you select subsequent grid lines. 7 Select the remaining vertical grid lines moving from left to right. Zoom in and out as needed. Notice it is grid L. Adding Grid Lines to the Imported Drawing | 163 . click structural model. . 8 When you get to grid I. change the value to J. and draw a zoom region around the upper-right corner of the 10 Select the upper horizontal grid line. Notice it is labeled B. 6 Select the next vertical grid line to the right of grid line A.

Notice that the sequencing has adjusted from alphabetical to numeric. 14 On the Design Bar. 16 On the View toolbar. The bottom grid should be grid 5. 164 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . and draw a zoom box around the atrium. Draw a grid using the arc tool 15 Enter ZF (keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit). click Modify. 19 Click the column to select the arc start point.11 Click the blue value within the grid line L head. 12 Select the next grid line below grid 1. 17 On the Design Bar. and enter 1 for the new value. click . 18 On the Options Bar. click Grid. 13 Select the remaining 3 horizontal grids. click .

21 Click the column to set the arc radius.20 Click the column to select the arc endpoint. Adding Grid Lines to the Imported Drawing | 165 .

166 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . Extend grid 23 Drag the arc start point approximately as shown. 24 Drag the arc endpoint approximately as shown. click Modify.22 On the Design Bar. and select the grid.

Place columns at grid intersections 1 Enter ZF. 26 Proceed to the next exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Adding Structural Columns | 167 . The next exercise uses a new training file. you load a new column type from the Revit Structure Library and add columns at each grid intersection. click Training Files. Adding Structural Columns In this exercise.25 Click File menu ➤ Close. These columns extend from an elevation to a splice elevation just above Level 2. Adding Structural Columns on page 167. To save changes. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Columns. and save the exercise file with a unique name. or close the exercise file without saving changes. click File menu ➤ Save As.rvt.

NOTE If the Modelling tab of the Design Bar does not display.Level 2 plan view 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Revit Structure places the tops of the columns at the current level and the bases of the columns at the level below. click Structural Column. 4 In the Options Bar. click . select W-Wide Flange-Column: W10x33. 6 On the Options Bar. 5 Select the entire grid by drawing a pick box around it. NOTE When you use the Grid Intersection tool to place columns. click Finish. 3 In the Type Selector. and click Modelling. 168 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . right-click in the Design Bar.

K5 K3. Notice that columns are placed at each grid intersection.7 Press ESC. click Modify. Under Constraints. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ G1. click ■ ■ ■ . 16 Use the same method to create Level 4. 15 On the left side of the elevation. 10 On the Options Bar. In addition. NOTE If necessary. Level 3 should be 10' 0" above Level 2. H1. H2. Adjust location of the grid 18 Select grid head A. you can adjust the height by clicking the temporary dimension and modifying the level elevation. C5 Specify base and top of column elevations 9 Right-click the column located at C2. click Modify. Level 4 should be 10' 0" above Level 3 with an elevation of 30' 0". J5. 19 Adjust the zoom settings so you can select the grid control below the grid head. click Level. which are outside of the structure footprint. K4 A5. 12 On the Design Bar. K1 G2. K2 G5. specify a start point for the third level at a distance of 10' 0" above Level 2. and then specify the endpoint aligned with the existing level heads on the right side. there are a few extraneous columns on grid line intersections that are exterior to the structure. and press DELETE. and double-click South Elevation. J1. J2. 8 Select the columns listed below. Adding Structural Columns | 169 . Create new levels 13 In the Project Browser. 14 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 11 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. B5. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). and click Select All Instances. H5. Click OK. A new structural plan view by the same name is also created and listed within the Project Browser. Notice the new level is named Level 3. TIP You may have to zoom into the grid intersection to right-click one of the columns. 17 On the Design Bar. enter 2' 0" for Top Offset. enter 2' 0" for Base Offset.

Spliced columns display from Ground Level to Level 4 30 Click File menu ➤ Close. 26 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. click File menu ➤ Save As. select Structural Columns. click Check None. Copy the columns to new levels 21 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 2. 170 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 27 In the Select Levels dialog. under Structural Plans. 22 Draw a pick box around the entire structural model. click Modify. TIP Press and hold CTRL when making multiple selections. 25 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. or close the exercise file without saving changes. All of the structural columns in the model remain selected. double-click South Elevation. Adding Horizontal Framing on page 171. and click OK. 23 On the Options Bar. click .20 Drag the grid control above Level 4 as shown. The next exercise uses a new training file. 29 In the Project Browser. 24 In the Filter dialog. 31 Proceed to the next exercise. 28 On the Design Bar. and save the exercise file with a unique name. select Level 3 and Level 4. under Elevations (Building Elevation). To save changes. and click OK.

Click Grid. click .Adding Horizontal Framing In this exercise. you frame 4 bays of Level 2 by adding horizontal members and a steel deck. click Modify. under Structural Plans.rvt. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Adding Horizontal Framing | 171 . select W-Wide Flange: W18x40. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Add girders 4 On the View toolbar. double-click Level 2. click Training Files. 3 In the Type Selector. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Framing. 7 On the Options Bar. TIP Place the cursor over a grid to display the grid name in a tooltip. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 6 Select grid lines H and J. 8 On the Design Bar. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Specify Level 2 for Plane. click Finish. Specify beam type 1 In the Project Browser. Specify Girder for Usage. click Beam. and draw a zoom box around the east area of the structure.

11 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Specify Level 2 for Plane. 15 On the Options Bar. framing the bays with girders. NOTE In the following image. Copy the girders to levels above 17 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 12 Select a column center. Set top of steel 14 Right-click the girder between H3 and J3. click Modify. select Other. for z-Direction Offset Value. click ■ ■ ■ . 10 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. delete the 2 small beam sections between grid lines 4 and 5. click Beam. Under Constraints. enter -0' 7". framing tag visibility was turned off and the beam visibility increased for training purposes. and click Select All Instances. 20 Click OK. 21 In the Project Browser. 19 In the Select Levels dialog. expand 3D Views. and draw a girder from column to column. Click OK. 172 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . and double-click East Section . select Level 3 and Level 4.9 On grids H and J. 13 On the Design Bar. 16 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. 18 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. Specify Girder for Usage.Perspective. for z-Direction Justification.

For Justification.NOTE If necessary. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. For Beam Type. click File menu ➤ Save As. 5 On the Design Bar. select W-Wide Flange: W14x22. Adding Beam Systems on page 173. Adding Beam Systems In this exercise. enter -0' 7" for Elevation. double-click Level 2. Adding Beam Systems | 173 . you can select the section crop view and drag its borders to adjust the extents of the view. under Structural Plans. you add beam systems to Level 2. select Center. 2 Zoom in on the east side of the structure where you previously added the beams. or close the exercise file without saving changes. select Fixed Distance for Layout Rule.rvt. click Beam System. Sketch the beam system 1 In the Project Browser. click Sketch. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Beam_System. 6 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. and save the exercise file with a unique name. For Spacing. 22 Click File menu ➤ Close. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The next exercise uses a new training file. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 4 On the Options Bar. enter 6' 0". click Structural Beam System Properties. To save changes. Notice the copied beams on Levels 3 and 4. Under Pattern. 7 Click OK. click Training Files.

In the next step you edit the beam direction. NOTE The 2 short lines adjacent to the H3-J3 girder represent the beam system direction. 11 Select the vertical girder between J2 and J3. Then select the 3 girders that surround the upper-left bay. 9 Select the girder between H3 and J3. click Beam Direction. The longitudinal axis of the beam system members will be placed parallel to these lines. 174 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 10 On the Design Bar.8 On the Design Bar. click Pick Supports.

click Finish Sketch. the framing tag visibility has been turned off for training purposes. Adding Beam Systems | 175 . NOTE In the image above and all subsequent images.12 On the Design Bar.

13 Use the same method to sketch a beam system for the bay to the right using the following beam system property values in the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. select the girder between J2 and J3. Under Pattern. For Beam Type. For Number of Lines. 15 On the Design Bar. select W-Wide Flange: W14x22. enter -0' 7" for Elevation. 14 When specifying the beam direction. select Fixed Number for Layout Rule. specify 2. 176 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . click Finish Sketch.

21 Select the top girder in the lower-left bay. 20 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. For Number of Lines. select Fixed Number for Layout Rule. under Structural Plans. 23 Select the top girder in the lower-right bay. Adding Beam Systems | 177 . double-click Level 2.Automatically create a beam system 16 In the Project Browser. 19 On the Options Bar. For Beam Type. specify 3. enter -0' 7" for Elevation. Under Pattern. 17 Zoom in on the east side of the structure where you previously added the beams. 18 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select W-Wide Flange: W14x22. 22 Click to place the beam system. click Beam System. click ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . Click OK.

You will need to cycle through some of the elements in your model by pressing TAB as explained above. and press TAB until the beam system highlights. NOTE A beam system displays with dashed lines.24 Click to place the beam system. Be sure that you have selected a beam system (not just a beam) when copying elements to other levels. Copy the beam systems to levels above 26 Hold the cursor over grid line H of the lower-left beam system. 25 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 178 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model .

31 Click OK. and click Select All Instances.Perspective. To save changes. Notice the copied beam systems. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. double-click East Sections .Beam system displays with dashed lines 27 Right-click on the beam system. click File menu ➤ Save As. 29 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. Adding a Composite Deck on page 180. or close the exercise file without saving changes. 30 In the Select Levels dialog. Adding Beam Systems | 179 . under 3D Views. select Level 3 and Level 4. The next exercise uses a new training file. 32 In the Project Browser. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 33 Click File menu ➤ Close.

Add composite deck 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. double-click Level 2. 7 Sketch lines along the structure perimeter using the interior-most model lines of the glazing as snap points. and then sketch along the girders.rvt. 180 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 6 On the Design Bar. enter -0' 2" for Height Offset from Level. select 3" LW Concrete on 2" Metal Deck. under Structural Plans. click Slab. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 3 On the Design Bar. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 5 Click OK. click Training Files. click Floor Properties. Under Constraints.Adding a Composite Deck In this exercise. click Lines. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Type. you add a composite deck to Level 2. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Deck. 8 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch.

Revit Structure provides a deck span direction symbol when the deck is placed. and click OK. Adding a Composite Deck | 181 . Copy the slab to other levels 9 Select the slab. 14 In the Project Browser. 12 In the dialog. 15 Click File menu ➤ Close. select Level 3 and Level 4. double-click East Section . 11 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. under 3D Views.Perspective. 10 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. The filled half-arrows of this symbol represent the span of the deck. 13 On the Design Bar. click Modify.

under Structural Plans. The next exercise uses a new training file. 4 In the Project Browser. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. click Framing Elevation. Use the Status Bar to see the snap point. click Training Files.rvt. and then click the left endpoint of the Level 2 beam for the start point. Create the framing elevation 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Elevation 1-a. click File menu ➤ Save As. Adding Bracing on page 182. under Elevations (Interior Elevations). and when it highlights. you add vertical bracing to a bay. Adding Bracing In this exercise. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. double-click Level 2. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Bracing. click to place the framing elevation symbol in the direction shown. 3 Move the cursor on or near the grid line between 4H and 4J. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 In the Type Selector. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. or close the exercise file without saving changes. 182 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 5 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.To save changes. 7 Add a brace from Level 2 to Level 3: ■ Enter SE (keyboard shortcut for snap to endpoint). select L-Angle: L8x6x5/8. click Brace.

and then click the midpoint of the beam at Level 3 for the endpoint. Adding Bracing | 183 . 8 Use the same method for the opposite brace. 9 Repeat these steps to add bracing from Level 3 to Level 4.■ Enter SM (keyboard shortcut for snap to midpoint). NOTE If necessary. you can select the section crop view and adjust the left/right extents to see the columns on grids H and J.

Notice the braces in the back/right of the structural model. Adding Shear Walls on page 184. or close the exercise file without saving changes. you create shear walls that surround one of the stairwells. 11 Click File menu ➤ Close.rvt. under 3D Views. Add shear walls 1 In the Project Browser. 184 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . and save the exercise file with a unique name. 2 Zoom in on the east stair in grid location F3-G4. Adding Shear Walls In this exercise. double-click Level 2.Perspective. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Shear_Walls. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. The next exercise uses a new training file. click File menu ➤ Save As.10 In the Project Browser. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. double-click East Section . click Training Files. under Structural Plans. To save changes.

10" Concrete.3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. TIP After sketching the walls. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Select Chain. you can select a wall and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to nudge the wall to a particular location. select Basic Wall: Exterior . tracing over the centerline of the walls in the imported drawing file. click Structural Wall. Adding Shear Walls | 185 . For Depth. 4 In the Type Selector. specify Ground Level. 6 Sketch 4 walls.

under Structural Plans. click File menu ➤ Save As. 3 Draw a pick box around all structural elements. double-click Level 2. specify Up to level: Level 4 for Top Constraint. click Training Files. 8 Select all 4 walls. and draw a zoom box around the east area of the structure. and save the exercise file with a unique name. The next exercise uses a new training file. or close the exercise file without saving changes. 186 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . and click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Adding Isolated Foundations In this exercise. under Constraints. click . Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click . and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Foundation. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. 9 On the Options Bar. Place isolated foundations 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. 11 Click File menu ➤ Close. 4 On the Options Bar. click .7 Press ESC twice to finish placing walls. you can use the TAB key to highlight the entire wall chain and select it with one click. you add isolated foundations to column locations. To save changes. TIP During selection. Adding Isolated Foundations on page 186. 2 On the View toolbar. 10 In the Element Properties dialog.

the footing is placed at Ground Level. click Modify. Under Analytical Model. . NOTE In the following image. Click OK.5 In the Filter dialog. select Level 2 for Top Vertical Projection. By default. 8 In the Project Browser. click ■ ■ ■ ■ 7 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. Under Analytical Model. 9 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 11 In the drawing area. 12 On the Design Bar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Click Check None. Click OK. Adding Isolated Foundations | 187 . the curtain wall visibility was altered for training purposes. Select Structural Columns. enter 0' 0" for Base Offset. select Ground Level for Bottom Vertical Projection. 10 In the Type Selector. click Foundation ➤ Isolated. click the midpoints of the columns where you have added horizontal framing to place an isolated footing at each location. under Structural Plans. In your training file. the imported DWG file does not display in this view. select Footing-Rectangular: 72"x48"x18". 6 On the Options Bar. double-click Ground Level.

select W-Wide Flange: W18x40. double-click Level 2. 3 In the Type Selector. or close the exercise file without saving changes. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and concrete wall framing.rvt. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. double-click East Section . Specify Girder for Usage. Completing the Steel Framing of Level 2 In this exercise. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Add girders using the grid tool 1 In the Project Browser. openings. To save changes. Completing the Structural Model In previous lessons. click Training Files. bracing. 4 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Specify Level 2 for Plane. you complete the structural model.Perspective. In the exercises that follow.13 In the Project Browser. click Beam. The next exercise uses a new training file. 14 Click File menu ➤ Close. you complete the horizontal framing of Level 2 by adding girders and beam systems. Click Grid. as well as cantilevers and outriggers. Completing the Structural Model on page 188. you have added columns and horizontal framing to your model. under Structural Plans. 188 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_2. click File menu ➤ Save As. In the left pane of the Open dialog. foundation. under 3D Views. adding horizontal framing.

NOTE Although you previously added girders to the structural model. zooming in and out as needed: ■ Above grid line 1 between B and E. click model. Completing the Steel Framing of Level 2 | 189 . complete the framing of this bay. 5 Draw a pick box around all the grids. . 10 Add girders between the perimeter columns that were not captured by the Grid tool. click Modify. ■ Around the perimeter of the rotunda. 7 On the Design Bar. Use the W-Wide Flange: W18x40 beam type for the 5 new beams. using the Grid tool does not duplicate girders at these locations. click Finish. 6 On the Options Bar. TIP You can also press CTRL and select all grid lines manually. Manually add additional beams 8 On the View toolbar. Add beam chains to the following locations. and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the 9 Using the framing skills you have learned in previous exercises.

190 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . ■ Between the lower-left corner between A4 and D5. ■ Between the column just above K4 and over to F5.■ Between the column below the midpoint of H2-H3 and the corner of the stairwell shear walls.

for z-Direction Justification. 17 On the Options Bar. select Fixed Number for Layout Rule. Add a beam system to the bay 16 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. enter 3. 15 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. click ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . For Number of Lines. . 13 Right-click. and click Select All Instances. Completing the Steel Framing of Level 2 | 191 . Click OK. select Other. select the top girder. 19 In the bay adjacent to the upper-left stairwell. and draw a zoom box around the bay in the upper-left corner 12 Select the girder between A2 and B2. Under Constraints. enter -0' 7". 14 On the Options Bar.Specify the top of steel 11 On the View toolbar. for z-Direction Offset Value. 20 Click to place the beam system. Under Pattern. Select W-Wide Flange: W14x22 for Beam Type. Click OK. click of the model. 18 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. click ■ ■ ■ . click Beam System. enter -0' 7" for Elevation.

22 On the Options Bar. Select W-Wide Flange: W14x22 for Beam Type. 25 Using the sketch tool. 26 On the Sketch Design Bar. enter 3.Sketch a beam system 21 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 192 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 24 On the Options Bar. 23 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. For Number of Lines. select Fixed Number for Layout Rule. click Sketch. click Beam System. Click OK. trace the outline of the bay. click Finish Sketch. click ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . enter -0' 7" for Elevation. Under Pattern.

ignore it. If a warning appears indicating that pinned objects were deleted. Completing the Steel Framing of Level 2 | 193 .27 Select the beam that spans the middle of the stairwell and delete it. 28 Click File menu ➤ Close.

click model. and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the 194 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . the base offset of the structural columns on the lower level has been set to zero so they will attach to the footings. Adding Cantilevered Beams on page 194.rvt. Adding Cantilevered Beams In this exercise. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_3. a new training file is provided in the next exercise with the beam systems added as shown. beam systems have been added to all bays. double-click Level 2. The visibility of structural framing tags has been turned off in the Level 2 plan view. click Training Files. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. under Structural Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Lastly. . Rather than having you add beam systems to the dozens of bays within this model. Add cantilevered members and outriggers 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the View toolbar. the structural framing on Levels 3 and 4 (that you built in the first lesson of this tutorial) has been deleted for training purposes.NOTE You can save the open file if you wish. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In this new training file. In addition. you add cantilevered members and outriggers to Level 2.

Adding Cantilevered Beams | 195 . for z-Direction Justification. 4 On the Options Bar. Under Constraints. 7 Move the cursor to the left and select a perpendicular point on the inside face of the exterior glazing as the endpoint. for z-Direction Offset Value. enter -0' 7". 5 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. click Beam. click ■ ■ ■ . Click OK. Add cantilevers at columns 6 Select column A1 as the beam start point. select Other.3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

Add intermediate cantilevers 13 Sketch intermediate beams between the outrigger and the beam between A1 and A2. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. 11 Select the left endpoint of the cantilever at A1 as start point of the outrigger. 14 Click File menu ➤ Close. click File menu ➤ Save As.8 Using the same method. 12 Select the left endpoint of the adjacent cantilever at A2 as the endpoint of the outrigger. add a cantilever beginning at column A2. To save changes. Adding a Concrete Slab with Metal Deck on page 196. click Beam. 196 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Add an outrigger 9 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 10 In the Type Selector. or close the exercise file without saving changes. select W-Wide Flange: W18x40. you add a concrete slab with a metal deck to the model. Adding a Concrete Slab with Metal Deck In this exercise. The next exercise uses a new training file.

■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. Roof. 3 On the Design Bar. The pre-existing columns were paste-aligned to the roof level. Garage Level-1. you can use a combination of lines including. the following new levels were added: 5. and arced. 7. 5 On the Design Bar. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_4. click Training Files. Click OK. click Floor Properties. Add concrete slab with metal deck 1 In the Project Browser. When sketching this deck. and Foundation. Use Trim/Extend to clean up line intersections and close gaps. picked. straight. click Lines. enter -0' 2". additional cantilever beams and outriggers were added to the model. double-click Level 2. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select 3" LW Concrete on 2" Metal Deck. 6.rvt. In this training file. sketched. Adding a Concrete Slab with Metal Deck | 197 . 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Floor Type. For Height Offset from Level. click Slab. 6 Sketch lines along the structure perimeter using the interior lines of the glazing as snap points. In addition. under Structural Plans.

7 Click Finish Sketch. or close the exercise file without saving changes. 8 On the View toolbar. click File menu ➤ Save As. The next exercise uses a new training file. select Chain on the Options Bar. and sketch a chain of continuous line segments. 10 Click File menu ➤ Close. 9 Enter SD (keyboard shortcut for Shading with Edges). To save changes. 198 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . click .TIP To sketch lines along the lower arced wall. and save the exercise file with a unique name.

11 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Shafts on page 199.

Adding Shafts
In this exercise, you add 2 shaft openings on Level 2. Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Adding_Shafts.rvt.

Add first stairway shaft opening 1 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Level 2. NOTE Make sure this view is using the Wireframe model graphics display style. If it is not, use the View Control Bar to make the change. 2 Enter WF (keyboard shortcut for Wireframe). 3 Zoom around the stairway in grid location F3-G4. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Opening ➤ Shaft Opening. 5 On the Design Bar, click Pick Walls. 6 Select the 4 walls surrounding the stairwell.

7 On the Design Bar, click Properties. 8 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Top Constraint, select Up to level: Roof. For Base Constraint, select Foundation. For Top Offset, enter -1' 0". For Base Offset, enter -1' 0". Click OK.

Adding Shafts | 199

These settings ensure that the shaft extends through the structure without penetrating the roof or the foundation. 9 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. Add second stairway shaft opening 10 Zoom around the stairway in grid location A1-B2. 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Opening ➤ Shaft Opening. 12 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 13 Sketch the opening surrounding the stairwell.

TIP When sketching the shaft, use the Lines tool in combination with the Pick option and select the external face of the walls imported with the DWG file. Use the Trim tool to clean up gaps and intersections. 14 On the Design Bar, click Properties. 15 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Top Constraint, select Up to level: Roof. For Base Constraint, select Foundation. For Top Offset, enter 1' 0". For Base Offset, enter 1' 0". Click OK.

16 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 17 On the View toolbar, click .

200 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model

18 Click File menu ➤ Close. To save changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name, or close the exercise file without saving changes. The next exercise uses a new training file. 19 Proceed to the next exercise, Duplicating Framing on page 201.

Duplicating Framing
In this exercise, you copy Level 2 framing to other levels. Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Duplicate_Framing.rvt.

Copy Level 2 framing and deck 1 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Level 2. 2 Enter ZF, and draw a pick box around the entire model. 3 On the Options Bar, click .

4 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Structural Framing (Girder, Joist, and Other), Structural Beam Systems, and Floors, and then click OK. 5 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 6 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. 7 In the Select Levels dialog, select Level 3, Level 4, and Level 5, and then click OK.

Duplicating Framing | 201

8 On the View toolbar, click
Copied levels with stair openings

.

Modify roof and framing 9 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Level 5. 10 Select the floor. 11 On the Options Bar, click Edit. 12 Delete the atrium arc, and use the Trim tool to close the gap.

NOTE In the image shown above, the weight of the sketch lines was increased for training purposes.

202 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model

13 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 14 On the View toolbar, click 15 Select all framing and columns. NOTE Press and hold CTRL as you make multiple selections. , and draw a zoom box around the former atrium area.

16 Press DELETE. Ignore the warning that pinned objects were deleted. Add cantilever beams and outriggers 17 Zoom in on the former atrium area.

18 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Beam. 19 On the Type Selector, select W-Wide Flange: W18x40. 20 On the Options Bar, specify Girder for Usage. 21 On the Options Bar, click .

Duplicating Framing | 203

22 In the Element Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

Under Constraints, for z-Direction Justification, select Other. Under Constraints, for z-Direction Offset Value, enter -0' 7". Click OK.

23 Add cantilever beams and outriggers to complete the new corner.

Extend the shaft to roof level 24 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Level 2. 25 Zoom around the stairway in grid location F3-G4. 26 Select the 4 walls surrounding the stairwell.

27 On the Options Bar, click
■ ■

.

28 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, do the following: For Top Constraint, select Up to level: Roof. Click OK.

Copy roof framing and slab to Level 6 and 7 29 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Level 5. 30 Zoom out until you can see the entire model within the drawing area. 31 Draw a pick box around the entire model. 32 On the Options Bar, click .

204 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model

33 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Structural Framing (Girder, Joist, and Other), Structural Beam Systems, and Floors, and then click OK. 34 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 35 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. 36 In the Select Levels dialog, select Level 6, and Level 7, and click OK. 37 On the View toolbar, click .

Notice the atrium columns on Levels 5 through 7 need to be deleted. This is done for you in the next training file. 38 Click File menu ➤ Close. To save changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name, or close the exercise file without saving changes. The next exercise uses a new training file. 39 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding a Shape-Modified Slab on page 205.

Adding a Shape-Modified Slab
In this new training file, beam systems have been added to the roof level to support a new shape-modified slab, and the footings added at the beginning of the tutorial have been deleted. In this exercise, you add a shape-modified slab to the new roof framing, and create a custom roof type with tapered insulation. In this exercise, you create a shape-modified slab above Level 7. Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_5.rvt.

Adding a Shape-Modified Slab | 205

Open the roof framing section view 1 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Roof. 2 Double-click the section bubble located near grid line D to open the section view of the roof.

Notice the structural framing is sloped to provide for roof drainage. Create new roof type 3 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Roof. 4 On the View toolbar, click , and draw a zoom box around the upper roof framing.

206 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model

5 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Slab. 6 On the Design Bar, click Floor Properties. 7 In the Element Properties dialog, for Type, select 1 1/2" Metal Roof Deck - Tapered Insulation, and click Edit/New. 8 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 9 In the Name dialog, enter 1 1/2" Metal Roof Deck - 4" Rigid Insulation, and click OK. 10 In the Type Properties dialog, under Construction, for Structure, click Edit. 11 In the Edit Assembly dialog, for Layer 2, clear Variable, and click OK twice. 12 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Height Offset From Level, enter 3' 5 1/2", and click OK. Trace the outline of the roof

13 On the View toolbar, click structure. 14 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 15 On the Options Bar, click

, and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the

, and enter 5" for Offset.

16 Click the beam on the upper-left corner of the structure so the offset is placed on the outside of the beam.

17 Enter ZF. 18 Using the same method, click additional lines that outline the roof.

Adding a Shape-Modified Slab | 207

19 On the Toolbar, click

(Trim).

20 With the Trim/Extend tool selected, click one of the sketched lines, and then click each additional line to complete the roof outline.

Each line will be extended and trimmed as it is selected. 21 On the Design bar, click Finish Sketch.

208 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model

22 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click 3D - Atrium.

Edit the slab 23 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Roof. 24 Select the slab, and on the Options Bar, click Edit. 25 On the Design Bar, click Pick Supports. 26 Select specific supports.

27 On the Toolbar, click

.

Adding a Shape-Modified Slab | 209

28 With the Trim/Extend tool selected, click one of the sketched lines, and then click each additional line to complete the outline of the shape-modified slab.

Each line will be extended and trimmed as it is selected. 29 On the Design bar, click Finish Sketch. 30 Double-click the section bubble located near grid line D to open the section view of the roof.

Notice the opening in the shape-modified slab. 31 On the View toolbar, click section view. , and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the

Notice the slab is not sloped towards the opening in the center of the slab. Pick supports for modifying the slope of the roof slab 32 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Roof. 33 Select the slab, and on the Options Bar, click (Modify Sub-Elements).

210 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model

The corner points of the slab are highlighted.

34 On the Options Bar, click

(Pick Supports).

35 Click each of the 6 roof supports shown below in the order indicated.

NOTE The Pick Supports tool will create an elevation control point at the end of each of the 6 selected support location lines. 36 On the Design bar, click Modify. 37 Double-click the section bubble located near grid line D to open the section view of the roof. 38 On the View toolbar, click , and draw a zoom box around the center of the section view.

Adding a Shape-Modified Slab | 211

Notice the roof deck is now resting on the roof supports. 39 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Roof. 40 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Slab. 41 On the Design Bar, click Floor Properties. 42 In the Element Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

For type, select 1 1/2" Metal Roof Deck - Tapered Insul Under Constraints, for Height Offset From Level, enter 2' 9 1/2". Click OK.

43 On the Design Bar, click Pick Supports. 44 Select specific supports.

45 On the Toolbar, click

.

46 With the Trim/Extend tool selected, click each line to complete the outline of the shape-modified slab.

212 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model

Each line will be extended and trimmed as it is selected.

47 On the Design bar, click Finish Sketch. 48 Double-click the section bubble located near grid line D to open the section view of the roof. 49 On the View toolbar, click , and draw a zoom box around the center of the section view.

Notice the flat portion of the roof is now covered by the slab. Draw split line to slope the variable layer 50 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Roof. 51 On the View toolbar, click , and draw a zoom box around the center of the roof.

52 Select the roof (that was just created) as shown.

Adding a Shape-Modified Slab | 213

Press TAB to make sure the interior roof boundary is selected. 53 On the Options Bar, click (Draw Split Lines).

The corner points of the opening are displayed.

54 Sketch a split line.

55 Press ESC. 56 Select the split line that was just created. 57 On the Options Bar, enter 5" for Elevation. 58 Press ENTER.

214 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model

click Modify. click Modify. 61 Double-click the section bubble located near grid line D to open the section view of the roof. Adding a Shape-Modified Slab | 215 . 60 Enter ZF. 62 On the View toolbar. click . and draw a zoom box around the center of the section view. and on the Design Bar. 65 Select the tapered roof.59 On the Design Bar. 64 Select the existing flat roof to the left of the tapered roof. Join the geometry of the roof types 63 On the Toolbar. click (Join Geometry). Notice the tapered insulation tapers away from the split line support.

The next exercise uses a new training file.66 In the Project Browser. you add a shape-modified slab to the curved roof of the atrium. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. under Structural Plans. and draw a zoom box around the atrium roof framing. 2 On the View toolbar. click File menu ➤ Save As. 68 Proceed to the next exercise. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Adding a Shape-Modified Curved Slab on page 216. click Training Files. click . double-click 3D . or close the exercise file without saving changes. 67 Click File menu ➤ Close. To save changes. under 3D Views. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 216 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model .Atrium. using the slab shape edit tools. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Curved_Slab. double-click Level 5. Open the plan view 1 In the Project Browser. Adding a Shape-Modified Curved Slab In this exercise.rvt.

Adding a Shape-Modified Curved Slab | 217 . click (Draw Split Lines). and is available for modification. click (Modify Sub-Elements).3 Select the atrium curved slab. Notice that the shape edit tools display on the Options Bar. 6 Click the center point of the slab arc. The edge of the curved slab highlights. 4 On the Options Bar. Sketch split lines 5 On the Options Bar.

Place a single drainage point 8 On the Options Bar.7 Sketch a single split line to approximately the edge of the slab. 9 Click to place a drainage point approximately along the split line. 218 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . click (Add New Points).

12 Select the curved slab.Place additional points 10 Click to place six additional points approximately along the edge of the slab. click . Delete split lines 13 On the Options Bar. 14 Select the split lines. Adding a Shape-Modified Curved Slab | 219 . Notice that the shape edit points display. click Modify. and press DELETE. 11 On the Design Bar.

Atrium. under 3D Views. 220 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . and enter -0’ 6”. View the atrium slab in 3D 16 In the Project Browser. click . and draw a zoom box around the atrium roof. The general shape of the curved slab displays. 17 On the View toolbar. double-click 3D .Set drainage point elevation 15 Click the drainage point elevation dimension. Notice that the edges of the curved slab display.

double-click Section 3. and draw a zoom box around the upper-right corner of the Notice that the tapered insulation layer of the curved slab is sloped towards the drainage point. . double-click 3D . 22 On the Options Bar. under 3D Views.Atrium. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. under Sections (Building Sections). click section view. 21 Select the slab. under Structural Plans. double-click Level 5. and click OK.View section view of slab 18 In the Project Browser. 19 On the View toolbar. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. click . under Slab Shape Edit. 24 In the Curved Edge Condition dialog. for Curved Edge Condition. Adding a Shape-Modified Curved Slab | 221 . click Project to side. Complete the slab geometry 26 In the Project Browser. Set the curved edge condition 20 In the Project Browser. click OK. click Conform to Curve.

222 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . click 28 On the Options Bar. and select the left endpoint of the curved slab. click . enter SX (Snap to Point). and select the right endpoint of the curved slab. 29 Click the center drainage point. . enter SX. 30 Click the center drainage point.27 On the Options Bar.

35 On the Options Bar. double-click 3D . double-click Level 5. under Structural Plans.Atrium. under 3D Views. Adding a Shape-Modified Curved Slab | 223 .31 On the Design Bar. 36 Select each point along the slab edge and verify that the spot elevation is set to 0' 0". click . 32 In the Project Browser. 34 Select the atrium curved slab. click Modify. Verify the slab spot elevation 33 In the Project Browser.

2 Select the slab. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 39 Click File menu ➤ Close. and draw a zoom box around the upper-right corner of the Notice the tapered insulation layer slopes to the low point as a planar surface. double-click Section 3. or close the exercise file without saving changes. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Miter_Joins. The next exercise uses a new training file. 40 Proceed to the next exercise. click File menu ➤ Save As. click section view. 38 On the View toolbar. under 3D Views. click Training Files. Adding Miter Joins In this exercise.rvt. View the roof frame 1 In the Project Browser. under Sections (Building Sections).View.View the completed slab section 37 In the Project Browser. To save changes. 224 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . In the left pane of the Open dialog. Adding Miter Joins on page 224. double-click 3D . . and save the exercise file with a unique name. you add miter joins to the beams on the roof frame to create a flush connection.

select Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element.3 On the View Control Bar. Add the miter join 5 Click the beam on the west side of the roof frame. 6 On the Options Bar. You can now use the Beam Join Editor. and draw a zoom box around the corner of the roof frame. click (Edit Beam Joins). 4 On the View toolbar. Only non-concrete beams with shared end joins are available for edit. click . Adding Miter Joins | 225 . The slab is now hidden.

8 Click the arrow control on the second beam.7 Click the arrow control on the first beam. 226 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model .

The miter lock is used to lock geometry but allows symbolic manipulation (in Coarse View). Adding Miter Joins | 227 . 9 Click the padlock icon to lock the miter join.The miter join is complete.

12 On the View Control Bar. 11 Click the arrow on the beam symbolic line. Notice the symbolic line is no longer joined. 228 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model .View the miter join in coarse view 10 On the View Control Bar. select Detail Level: Fine. select Detail Level: Coarse. Notice the miter lock remains locked.

click File menu ➤ Save As. 2 On the View toolbar. under Structural Plans. click . Adding Curved Beams on page 229. or close the exercise file without saving changes. click Modify. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and draw a zoom box around the atrium. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Curved_Beams. To save changes. Adding Curved Beams In this exercise. Adding Curved Beams | 229 . double-click Level 4. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. click Training Files. 14 Click File menu ➤ Close. you add a curved beam to the atrium. 13 On the Design Bar. The next exercise uses a new training file. Zoom in on the atrium 1 In the Project Browser. and save the exercise file with a unique name.Notice the miter lock remains locked. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt.

select Chain. 4 In the Type Selector. 5 On the Options Bar.Place the curved beams 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 6 Click the atrium column to select the beam start point. 230 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 7 Click the column to select the beam endpoint. and click . select W-Wide Flange: W14 X 22. click Beam.

Adding Curved Beams | 231 .8 Click the grid line so the beam snaps to the grid.

9 Press ESC twice. place additional curved beams between the atrium columns. 10 Using the same method. Set the curved beam properties 11 Select one of the curved beams. 13 On the Options Bar. click . 12 While pressing CTRL. select the remaining curved beams.The beam is placed. 232 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model .

select Maximum Spacing. Click OK. double-click Level 4. select 3D. enter -0' 7" for Start Level Offset Under Constraints. Under Pattern. select Top. For Beam Type.14 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. Click OK. under Structural Plans. Scroll down to Analytical Model. click Beam System. 22 Select the bottom beam. 17 Click or drag the ViewCube to rotate the view so the curved beams are visible. Adding Curved Beams | 233 . and for Vertical Projection. select W-Wide Flange: W14 X 22.Atrium. double-click 3D . 20 On the Options Bar. enter 6' 0". 16 Select the floor. and on the View Control Bar. under Structural Plans. View the analytical model of the curved beams 15 In the Project Browser. Add a beam system to the atrium 18 In the Project Browser. select Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. select Top of Beam. For Maximum Spacing. for Layout Rule. enter -0' 7" for End Level Offset For z-Direction Justification. enter 0' 0". 21 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. Notice the orange lines representing the curved beam analytical model are placed at the top of beam. For Elevation. 19 On the Modelling Tab of the Design Bar. click ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ .

place a beam system in the remaining bays of the atrium. 234 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 23 Using the same method.The beam system is placed.

27 In the Project Browser. select Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. enter 0' 4". Adding Curved Beams | 235 . under Structural Plans. Click OK. click . the analytical model will end at points on the curve where other framing members are joined.Atrium. and on the View Control Bar. click 26 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Analytical Model. select Approximate Curve. Additional line segments will be added to satisfy the Maximum Discretized Offset parameter.Approximate the curve of the analytical model 24 On the View toolbar. 25 Select the beam. For Maximum discretized offset. . and draw a zoom box around one of the curved beams. NOTE When hard-points are enabled. Select Use hard-points. 28 Select the floor. and on the Options Bar. double-click 3D .

The next exercise uses a new training file. 30 Click File menu ➤ Close. under Structural Plans. 2 On the View toolbar. click . In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 31 Proceed to the next exercise. and draw a zoom box around the stairway. click Training Files.29 Click or drag the ViewCube to rotate the view so the curved beams are visible. click File menu ➤ Save As. or close the exercise file without saving changes. Adding an Opening In this exercise. you add an opening (doorway) to the structural walls of the stairway. Adding an Opening on page 236. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Openings.rvt. you then copy the opening to each level. double-click Ground Level. and save the exercise file with a unique name. To save changes. Notice the analytical line of the curved beam is represented by segments instead of a single curved line. 1 In the Project Browser. 236 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model .

3 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar. 6 Select the door opening. 4 Click stairway wall to place the door opening approximately as shown. click Modify. Adding an Opening | 237 . click Door. 5 On the Design Bar.

select 3D View. so that levels 2-7 are highlighted. click stairway. . under 3D Views. 8 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. 13 Click or drag the ViewCube to rotate the view so the stairway is visible. 9 In the Select Levels dialog.. select Level 7. 7 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. select Level 2. 14 On the View toolbar. 11 Click OK. 10 While pressing SHIFT. 12 In the Project Browser. and draw a zoom box around the opening created in the 238 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model .

You then add an opening to selected beams by creating an extrusion in the beam family. and save the exercise file with a unique name. under Structural Plans. you add an opening to the face of a single beam and add stiffener plates to the beam opening. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Opening_in_Beam. click File menu ➤ Save As. Add an opening (by face) to a single beam 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click 3D View. Adding an Opening in a Beam In this exercise. The next exercise uses a new training file. you import the revised beam back into the project. click Training Files. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Adding an Opening in a Beam | 239 .15 Click File menu ➤ Close. click . click Opening ➤ Opening by Face. 2 On the View toolbar. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. 4 Select the beam that requires the opening. To save changes. Finally. In the left pane of the Open dialog. or close the exercise file without saving changes.rvt. and draw a zoom box around any beam on an upper floor. expand 3D Views. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Adding an Opening in a Beam on page 239.

draw a stiffener plate on both horizontal surfaces of the opening. 10 On the Design Bar. select Linear Stiffener-Plate: Standard. Make sure the opening forms a closed loop. 8 In the Type Selector. 240 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 6 On the Design Bar.Press TAB to make sure you are selecting the beam and not the floor or beam system. click Finish Sketch. click Component. 9 Using the sketch tool. Add stiffener plates to the opening 7 On the Modelling Tab of the Design Bar. draw an opening in the beam approximately as shown. 5 Using the sketch tools. click Modify.

Adding an Opening to a Beam Family In this exercise. Click OK. You then modify the beam by adding an opening. The next exercise uses a new training file. click ■ ■ . and draw a zoom box around any beam on a lower floor. Finally. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Opening_in_Beam. Adding an Opening to a Beam Family | 241 . enter 0' 2". for d. 15 Continue with the next exercise. Select the beam 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. 2 On the View toolbar. under Structural Plans. expand 3D Views. select both stiffener plates. and double-click 3D View. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you load the new family into the project. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Change the stiffener plate properties 11 While pressing CTRL. or close the exercise file without saving changes. 14 Click File menu ➤ Close. To save changes. click . click File menu ➤ Save As. Adding an Opening to a Beam Family on page 241. 13 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Dimensions. 12 On the Options Bar. and save the exercise file with a unique name.rvt. you open an existing beam family using the Family Editor.

242 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . and double-click Front. 12 Click the centerline of the beam. The Front elevation of the beam is displayed. click Modify. 9 In the Work Plane dialog.3 Select the beam. and click (Circle). click . under Specify a New Work Plane. and draw a circle approximately as shown. 13 Press ESC. 14 On the Family Design Bar. The beam is displayed in a new window. click Void Form ➤ Void Extrusion. Open the beam family 4 On the Options Bar. Add an opening by extrusion 6 In the Family Project Browser. 8 On the Family Design Bar. and select Reference Plane: Center (Front/Back). 7 On the View toolbar. click Yes to open the W-Wide Flange beam type for editing. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Elevation 1). 5 In the Revit dialog. click Edit Family. click located to the left of Offset. 10 Click OK 11 On the Options Bar. click Name. and draw a zoom box around the center line of the beam.

25 On the View toolbar. 23 Click the lock to lock the reference plane to the centerline of the circle. and click OK. and the select the centerline of the circle. click Finish Sketch. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. 17 On the Options Bar. click (Align). and select the centerline of the circle. select the Center Mark Visible parameter. 22 Select the horizontal centerline reference plane. 24 On the Design Bar. regardless of the length. NOTE Aligning and locking the centerline of the circle to the reference plane ensures the circle will remain in the center of the beam. 20 Press ESC. click (Align). 19 Click the lock to lock the reference plane to the centerline of the circle. 18 Select the vertical centerline reference plane. Adding an Opening to a Beam Family | 243 . click The centerline of the circle is now visible.15 Select the circle. click . and on the Options Bar. 21 On the Options Bar. .

The extrusion is displayed as a cylinder.rfa. 30 Navigate to a folder of your preference. and slide the cylinder to the right so the extrusion passes through the beam. and save the revised beam family file as W-Wide Flange with Opening.26 Select the circle on the beam. 29 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Extrude the opening 28 Click the right directional arrow. 27 On the View Control toolbar. select Model Graphic Style: Shading w/Edges. 244 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model .

32 In the Load into Projects dialog. 35 Click on the lowest beam located on the corner of Level 2. The project file reopens.Load the modified beam family into the project 31 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. and draw a zoom box around the beams for the lower floors. Select the new beam family 37 In the Type Selector. click . 36 While pressing CTRL. Adding an Opening to a Beam Family | 245 .rvt located in the Imperial project file.rfa. select i_RST_CSM_Add_Opening_in_Beam. 38 Click in the drawing area. 33 Enter ZF. 34 On the View toolbar. select the beams for Levels 2 through 4. select the modified beam type W-Wide Flange with Opening: W18X40. click Load into Projects. and click OK.

Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and save the exercise file with a unique name.The modified beams with openings display. click File menu ➤ Save As. The next exercise uses a new training file. Adding Foundation Walls In this exercise. You add these walls using the Ground Level view.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you add structural walls. the atrium columns on Levels 6 and 7 have been deleted. In this new training file. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_6. 246 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 40 Continue with the next exercise. or close the exercise file without saving changes. click Training Files. In addition. and walls are generated downward to the foundation. a roof with tapered insulation has been added over Level 7. 39 Click File menu ➤ Close. Adding Foundation Walls on page 246. To save changes.

double-click Ground Level. 6 On the Options Bar.12" Concrete. Adding Foundation Walls | 247 . The imported DWG file was copied and paste-aligned to this level for you. 4 On the Options Bar. enter -0' 6". click 7 Click the arc line of the imported DWG file. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. under Structural Plans. select Basic Wall: Foundation . click ■ ■ ■ ■ . For Base Constraint.Sketch the atrium walls 1 In the Project Browser. 5 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. Click OK. click Structural Wall. select Foundation. 3 In the Type Selector. For Top Offset. . for Location Line. select Wall Centerline.

you can use an arc or a chain of small wall segments.A foundation wall is added and aligned with the wall centerline. Sketch the remaining foundation walls 8 On the Options Bar. 13 Click File menu ➤ Close. On portions of the south wall. Use the center of the curtain wall lines in the DWG file as an underlay to trace over. 10 Press ESC twice to finish the wall sketch. 248 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . and select Chain. double-click 3D View. click . 9 Use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to add foundation walls to the remaining perimeter of the model. under 3D Views. 12 Click or drag the ViewCube to rotate the view so the foundation wall is visible. 11 In the Project Browser.

make sure you delete the columns outside the structure perimeter. click Modify. and select the foundation wall chain. click Structural Column. 3 In the Type Selector. double-click 3D View. 4 In the Options Bar. press TAB.To save changes. 8 Place the cursor over one of the foundation walls. In addition. TIP You can use the Grid Intersection tool to speed up this process. select Foundation for Depth. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click the Temporary Hide/Isolate control. Concrete pier centered on steel column 6 On the Design Bar. click Training Files. The next exercise uses a new training file. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. or close the exercise file without saving changes.rvt. 14 Proceed to the next exercise. and save the exercise file with a unique name. and click Hide Element. select Concrete-Square-Column: 18x18. click File menu ➤ Save As. If you select all the grid lines and add columns to all intersections. 7 In the Project Browser. you will still need to manually add piers to the locations that are not on a grid line. Adding Piers or Pilasters In this exercise. Add concrete piers 1 In the Project Browser. 9 On the View Control Bar. you add piers or pilasters and concrete columns at each steel column location. under 3D Views. add a concrete column centered on each steel column location. Adding Piers or Pilasters on page 249. double-click Ground Level. under Structural Plans. Adding Piers or Pilasters | 249 . 5 Within the perimeter of the structure model. such as the atrium. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Piers. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Framing Ground and Parking Garage Levels on page 250. Framing Ground and Parking Garage Levels In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 11 Click File menu ➤ Close. click File menu ➤ Save As. enter 0. or close the exercise file without saving changes. Click OK. For Height Offset From Level. double-click Ground Level. click Floor Properties.This provides a better view of the new below-grade piers. click Training Files. The next exercise uses a new training file. click Pick Walls. 250 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 12 Proceed to the next exercise. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 10 On the View Control Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The foundation wall is displayed. 5 On the Design Bar. click Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. To save changes. click Slab. sloped slabs. 3 On the Design Bar. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_7. and concrete beam framing.rvt Frame ground and parking levels 1 In the Project Browser. select 6" Concrete. you frame the garage and ground levels by adding slabs. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Type. under Structural Plans.

WARNING If an error dialog displays regarding the span direction component. click Delete Type. 8 In the Project Browser. click Yes. under 3D Views. TIP Press TAB to select the wall chain. double-click 3D View. Framing Ground and Parking Garage Levels | 251 . NOTE When prompted whether you would like the walls that go up to this floor’s level to attach to its bottom. If necessary. 9 Click or drag the ViewCube to rotate the view so the slab is visible. 7 Click Finish Sketch.6 Select the exterior face of the foundation walls. use the flip controls to toggle to the exterior face.

click Finish. select the line. click Grid. 18 Manually delete the beams added to the atrium. 15 Remove grid line G from the selection: while pressing SHIFT. 17 Manually add a beam between G3 and G4. It will display as selected in the drawing area. 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 14 Select all grid lines. 19 Manually delete the beams placed between grid F2 and G2. 16 On the Options Bar. expand the warning and select the framing element. 12 In the Type Selector. NOTE If you are warned of a problem with keeping elements joined. This prevents a beam being added between the atrium at G1 and G3. click Beam. 252 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . double-click Ground Level. 20 On the Design Bar. select Concrete-Rectangular Beam:16x32.Frame concrete girders 10 In the Project Browser. click Modify. 13 On the Options Bar. under Structural Plans. Resolve the problem by clicking the appropriate solution. and another between G4 and G5. It is most likely a segment that can be deleted or unjoined.

27 In the Project Browser. NOTE The foundation walls have been hidden in this view so the girders are visible. Other) and Floors. 26 In the Select Levels dialog. and then click OK. 22 On the Options Bar. select Structural Framing (Girder. Framing Ground and Parking Garage Levels | 253 . select Garage Level -1. double-click 3D View. click Modify. 25 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. click Check None.Copy the framing and slab to Garage Level -1 21 Drag a pick box around the entire model. 23 In the Filter dialog. Joist. 28 Click or drag the ViewCube to rotate the view so the concrete girders are visible. under 3D Views. 29 On the Design Bar. click . and click OK. 24 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard.

41 In the Project Browser. 40 On the Design Bar. and select Element Properties. 39 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. For Level at Head. 33 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 32 Zoom in around the lower-left corner of the model. 38 Right-click the slope arrow. 34 On the Design Bar. 37 Sketch a slope arrow from left to right. 254 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . For Height Offset at Tail. 35 Sketch the slab in the southwest exterior corner of the structure. 42 On the View Control Bar. select Ground Level for Level at Tail. Click OK. select Garage Level-1. click Slab. For Height Offset at Head. and click Hidden Line. enter 0' 6". and click Hidden Line. double-click South Elevation. click the Model Graphics Style control. 31 On the View Control Bar. click Lines. under Elevations (Building Elevation).Add the garage entrance exit ramp 30 In the Project Browser. click the Model Graphics Style control. 43 Zoom in on the lower-left corner to see the ramp. under Structural Plans. 36 On the Design Bar. double-click Garage Level -1. enter 0. click Slope Arrow. click Finish Sketch.

Framing Ground and Parking Garage Levels | 255 . select Pick a plane. and zoom in on the ramp. click . and click OK. double-click 3D View. 45 On the View toolbar. 49 Select the underside face of the existing ramp.Completed ramp Add a sloped beam system under the ramp 44 In the Project Browser. click Set Work Plane. select Ground Level. 50 On the Design Bar. under Number of Lines. For Value. select Structural Beam System Properties. 53 On the View toolbar. under 3D Views. . click Lines. select Concrete-Rectangular Beam: 16 X 32. 47 On the Design Bar. Under Pattern. Click OK. 52 In the Project Browser. 51 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Beam Type. click Beam System. select Fixed Number for Layout Rule Value. 48 In the Work Plane dialog. 55 Draw an outline of the ramp. under Structural Views. enter 5. under Specify a new Work Plane. click 54 On the Design Bar. 46 On the Modelling Tab of the Design Bar. and draw a zoom box around the ramp.

click . click Finish Sketch. under 3D Views. there are no drawing tools to select. 61 Select the foundation wall that faces the short edge of the new ramp. 57 In the Project Browser. 62 Sketch the opening. 58 On the View toolbar.56 On the Design Bar. When you are adding a wall opening. corner to corner. NOTE Ignore the warning regarding the analytical point of the beam and slab. double-click 3D View. You can immediately draw the rectangular opening. click Opening ➤ Wall Opening. click . and zoom in on the ramp. 256 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . and zoom in on the wall that faces the end of the new ramp. Add a wall opening at the garage entrance 59 On the View toolbar. 60 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

Placing a Wall Foundation In this exercise. you add an isolated foundation beneath the piers. The next exercise uses a new training file. you add a continuous foundation beneath the exterior walls of the structural model. and save the exercise file with a unique name. To save changes. 65 Click File menu ➤ Close. 64 Select the garage opening. click Modify. and continue with the next step. In this case. 66 Proceed to the final exercise. you may get a warning message that elements cannot remain joined. 63 On the Design Bar. click File menu ➤ Save As. In addition. or close the exercise file without saving changes. click Unjoin Elements. Placing a Wall Foundation on page 257. Notice that you can adjust the opening extents using the controls.NOTE Depending on where you draw the opening. Placing a Wall Foundation | 257 .

and click to select the foundation wall chain. under Structural Plans. 2 Enter ZF. click Foundation ➤ Isolated. click Training Files. double-click Foundation. clear Structural Framing. click Edit/New. enter 1' 6". 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. 4 Place the cursor over one of the foundation walls. A continuous foundation is added. for Toe length. For Foundation Thickness. select Footing-Rectangular: 72"x48"x18". 258 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . click Visibility/Graphics. Edit foundation properties 6 Select one of the foundation walls.rvt. Click OK twice. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. 13 In the Type Selector. 5 On the Design Bar. enter 1' 6". click 9 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ . under Visibility. Sketch the continuous foundation 1 In the Project Browser. click Foundation ➤ Wall. 7 On the Options Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 14 Click the midpoint of each of the concrete columns to place an isolated foundation at each location. press TAB until the chain of walls is highlighted. enter 1' 6". For Heel length. Under Dimensions. 11 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Wall_Foundation.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Modify. Place isolated foundation 10 On the View menu.

click Modify. under 3D Views. 18 Proceed to the next tutorial. Placing a Wall Foundation | 259 . In the next tutorial a new training file is supplied.15 On the Design Bar. You have completed the Creating a Structural Model tutorial. double-click 3D View. 16 In the Project Browser. You can save the open file if you wish. Precast Concrete on page 261. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save.

260 .

double-click Roof. 1 In the Project Browser. under Structural Plans. Creating a Precast Beam System In this lesson. In the first lesson. You then modify the precast beam type within the Revit Structure family editor. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\i_RST_Precast_Concrete. you work with precast concrete components using the tools available in Revit Structure 2009. you add a precast concrete beam system to an existing project.Precast Concrete 6 In this tutorial. click Training Files. you add a precast beam system to the roof of an existing structure. you add a precast concrete beam system to an existing structure. 261 . click Beam System. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Adding a Beam System to the Structure In this exercise.rvt.

4 In the Element Properties dialog. do the following: For Layout Rule. under 3D Views. NOTE The dotted lines represent the beam system direction. select Center. click ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . select Precast-Double Tee: 8' x 20". Click OK. The longitudinal axis of the beam system members will be placed parallel to these lines. under Pattern. For Beam Type.3 On the Options Bar. 262 | Chapter 6 Precast Concrete . enter 0' 1". select Clear Spacing. For Justification. The beam system is displayed. 7 In the Project Browser. 6 Click to place the beam system. For Clear Spacing. 5 Select the top girder on the north side of the structure as shown. double-click 3D.

click shown. and save the model to a location of your choice using the following filename: i_RST_Precast-in progress.rvt. Changing the Beam System Properties In this exercise. 9 Proceed to the next exercise. you change the construction properties so the beam system will extend to the concrete support beam.8 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 1 On the View Toolbar. Training File ■ Use the project file that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. i_RST_Precast-in progress. Changing the Beam System Properties on page 263. Changing the Beam System Properties | 263 . and draw a zoom box around the edge of the beam system as Notice the gap between the edge of the beam system and the concrete beam. 2 Click one of the precast beams as shown.rvt. .

5 In the Element Properties dialog. 7 Proceed to the next exercise. under Structural Plans. Training File ■ Use the project file that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. under Construction. The beam system now extends to the concrete support beam. 4 On the Options Bar. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. 2 In the Project Browser. Changing the Beam System Clear Spacing In this exercise. click . enter 0' 5". you change clear spacing of the beam system to adjust the gap between each beam. under Sections (Building Section). Changing the Beam System Clear Spacing on page 264.rvt 1 In the Project Browser. and click Select All Instances. i_RST_Precast-in progress. double-click Roof. for Start and End Extension. double-click Section 1. 264 | Chapter 6 Precast Concrete . and click OK. 3 Select the beam system. Notice the spacing between each precast beam.3 Right-click the selected beam.

double-click Section 1. 8 Proceed to the next lesson. and click OK. 6 In the Project Browser. you add a chamfer to the existing double-tee beam family.4 On the Options Bar. Modifying the Precast Beam Family In this lesson. click . Notice the clear spacing between each precast beam is removed. for Clear Spacing. Modifying the Precast Beam Family on page 265. 7 Click File menu ➤ Save. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 0' 0". Modifying the Precast Beam Family | 265 . you open the precast beam within the family editor and add a chamfer to both beam supports. under Sections (Building Section). Adding a Chamfer to the Beam In this exercise. under Construction. You then import the revised beam back into the project.

The beam is displayed in a new window. Open the beam type for editing 1 Click one of the precast beams as shown. click Yes to open the Precast-Double Tee Family for editing.Training File ■ Use the project file that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. 2 On the Options Bar. 266 | Chapter 6 Precast Concrete . 4 In the Family Project Browser. and double-click Left. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Elevation 1). 3 In the Revit dialog.rvt. 5 Select the beam. click Edit Family. i_RST_Precast-in progress.

and drag them above the top horizontal surface of the beam profile as shown. 10 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. The reference planes and dimensions are now visible. 7 Right-click Double Tee-Profile. click . click Yes to open the Double Tee-Profile for editing. 9 Click View menu ➤ Visibility Graphics. click Dimensions and Reference Planes.Open the beam profile 6 In the Family Project Browser. ■ ■ Under Visibility. 8 In the Revit dialog. Zoom in on the left tee of the beam 11 On the View Toolbar. NOTE The dimensions should be visible under normal circumstances but are purposely hidden for this demo. click the Annotations Categories tab. 12 Select each of the dimensions representing the slope length. and then click OK. and click Edit. and draw a zoom box around the left tee of the beam. Click Apply. Adding a Chamfer to the Beam | 267 . expand Families ➤ Profiles ➤ Double Tee-Profile.

18 On the Options Bar. 15 Click the reference plane dimension and enter 0' 2". click Ref Plane. 268 | Chapter 6 Precast Concrete . 16 Press ESC. 14 Draw a horizontal reference plane below the existing plane.Draw horizontal reference plane 13 On the Design bar. and click Modify. click . 21 Draw a vertical reference plane to the left of the center line as shown. click Ref Plane. 17 Select the horizontal reference plane. and click OK. select Not a Reference. Draw vertical reference planes 20 On the Design Bar. for Is Reference. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. under Options.

24 Press ESC. for Is Reference. select both vertical reference planes. click Dimension. 30 Add a dimension for the left vertical reference plane. click . 28 In the Element Properties dialog. select Not a Reference. Adding a Chamfer to the Beam | 269 . 27 On the Options Bar. and click the lock symbol next to the dimension to lock the distance. Add dimensions to each reference plane 29 On the Design Bar.22 Press ESC. 26 While pressing CTRL. 25 Use the same technique to draw a vertical reference plane to the right of center as shown. under Options. and click OK. 23 Click the reference plane dimension and enter 0' 2".

and draw a zoom box around the left tee of the beam. 32 Add a dimension for the horizontal reference plane as shown. NOTE Make sure the top dimension line snaps to the horizontal reference plane and not the horizontal line of the beam.31 Repeat for the vertical reference plane on the opposite side as shown. click . 270 | Chapter 6 Precast Concrete . Align the bottom horizontal surface of the beam 35 On the View Toolbar. 34 Press ESC. 33 Click the lock symbol next to the dimension to lock the distance.

38 For the align-to point. 39 Select the line representing the bottom surface of the beam as shown. 41 Press ESC. Adding a Chamfer to the Beam | 271 . 37 Enter AL (this is the keyboard shortcut for Align). Press TAB to make sure you are selecting the end point of the line and not the reference plane. Sketch new profile 43 Select the angled line as shown. and drag the end point away from the angled line as shown. 40 Click the lock symbol to lock the alignment.36 Click the bottom horizontal line of the beam. 42 Repeat this technique for the inside of the same tee. select the vertical reference plane as shown.

Snap to the end of the top horizontal line. 48 Repeat this technique for the opposite side of the beam. 46 Sketch the new profile for the beam as follows: ■ ■ ■ Snap to the end point of the lower horizontal plane. 47 Press ESC.44 Press DELETE. 272 | Chapter 6 Precast Concrete . 45 On the Design bar. click Lines. Snap to the intersection of the horizontal and vertical reference planes.

and draw a zoom box around the right tee of the beam. 51 On the View Toolbar. click . 50 Click the horizontal reference plane and drag it beyond the right tee of the beam as shown.Modify the right tee of the beam 49 Enter ZF (this is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit). Adding a Chamfer to the Beam | 273 .

Creating Drawings on page 275. Add dimensions to each reference plane. click Family Types. Sketch the new profile. select Override parameter values of existing types. Flex the design 53 On the Design bar. 57 In the Reload Family dialog. Align the bottom horizontal surface. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ For Tee Width. Reload the family into the project 56 On the Design Bar. 274 | Chapter 6 Precast Concrete . fix any problems with alignment or constraints. 55 Click Edit menu ➤ Undo Family Type to undo the dimension changes. ■ ■ ■ ■ Draw vertical reference planes.52 Repeat the following techniques for the right tee of the beam. The beam should adapt to all changes. 54 In the Family Types dialog. and then click OK. For Width. 58 Proceed to the next tutorial. and click Yes. enter 6' 0". Notice the project file becomes active and the beam updates with the latest changes. Click Apply. enter 10' 0". click Load into Projects. If it does not.

which are a type of view in a project. elevation. begin by first creating sheets. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project In this lesson. section. The project used in the following exercises is the same one used in the previous lesson. Sheet views update automatically when you modify your model. how to add views to the sheets. The model views that you can add to sheets include plan. 275 . and section views. and three-dimensional (3D) views. To create a printed or plotted set of drawings from the views in your structural model. Depending on the type of drawing that you want to create. usually contain a title block. you learn how to create sheets within a Revit Structure project.Creating Drawings 7 In this tutorial. you learn how to create drawings from a building information model using Revit Structure 2009. and are accessible from the Project Browser. Sheets are defined by borders. and how to create new views from a model. 3D view. you can add different views of the model directly to the sheet. Creating a Drawing Sheet In this exercise. you create a drawing sheet that includes a plan view.

Smith. click Sheet. 5 Specify the remaining instance parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. The text fields in the title block family (shown below) contain labels that automatically display the corresponding project information that you entered. For Project Name. enter 2006-01. Enter the project information to display in the title block of the drawing sheet 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. enter J. For Project Number. TIP If the View tab is not displayed in the Design Bar. For Project Status. enter Initial Draft. and click OK. and open Imperial\i_RST_Drawings. MA 12345. enter 31 March 2006. A title block and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal: E1 30x42 Horizontal. enter the following address: 123 Main Street. 4 Click OK.rvt. 2 In the Element Properties dialog box. 276 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings . enter Office Structure. 8 In the Select a Title block dialog box. 3 In the Edit Text dialog box. The title block that you selected is a family that has already been loaded into the project. click Training Files. and click View. click Edit for Project Address.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. right-click. 6 Click OK. Create a sheet 7 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Anytown. For Client Name.

Under Identity Data ➤ Sheet name. and click Add View to Sheet. 11 When the title block highlights. The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser with the name S-2 . expand Sheets (all). and click to place the view. click Add View. Add a plan view to the sheet 14 On the View tab of the Design Bar. on the Options Bar. click Modify. enter S-1. Creating a Drawing Sheet | 277 . and select the title block. select Structural Plan: Level 2. 13 Click OK. Under Identity Data ➤ Sheet number. 9 In the Project Browser.NOTE The Project Path parameter in the lower-right corner of the sheet view automatically updates every time the project file is saved. enter Plans and Elevations. do the following: ■ ■ . 16 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet. 15 In the Views dialog box.Unnamed. click 12 In the Element Properties dialog. The sheet name and number are displayed in the title block and in the Project Browser. Change the sheet name and number in the title block 10 On the Design Bar.

select Elevation: South Elevation.0" for View Scale. 20 Adjust the length of the title line by selecting the view. 24 With the view selected. and click View Properties. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. right-click. Add an elevation to the sheet 21 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. you can select the view title separately and move it to a new position. specify 1/16" = 1'. 26 Position the view below the Structural Plan: Level 2. specify 1/16" = 1'. The scale of the view on the sheet changes. 22 In the Views dialog box. NOTE If necessary. click Add View. right-click. and dragging the right end control until it fits under the view. and click Element Properties. and click Element Properties. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics.0" for View Scale. you would see that the scale plan view is now 1/16" = 1'0". Under Extents. under Graphics. Click OK. If you were to open the Structural Plan: Level 2. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box. 278 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings .17 With the view selected. and dragging the right end control until it fits under the view. and click Add View to Sheet. right-click. 27 Drag the title line under the elevation view. 28 Adjust the length of the title line by selecting the view. clear Crop View. 23 Click on the lower half of the sheet to place the view. 19 Drag the view to the upper-left corner of the sheet.

NOTE If necessary. Creating a Drawing Sheet | 279 . 33 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 34 Navigate to a folder of your preference. you can select the view title separately and move it to a new position. click Add View. 31 Click on the upper-right corner of the sheet to place the view.Perspective. Add a 3D view to the sheet 29 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and save the file as i_RST_Drawings-in progress. 30 In the Views dialog box. you can select the view title separately and move it to a new position.NOTE If necessary. and click Add View to Sheet. Adding a Sheet to the Project on page 280.rvt. and dragging the right end control until it fits under the view. select 3D View: East Section . 35 Proceed to the next exercise. 32 Adjust the length of the title line by selecting the view.

click Sheet. i_RST_Drawings-in progress. under Sheets (all). Creating New Views to Add to Sheets In this exercise. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. enter Section Views for Sheet Name. 6 Proceed to the next exercise. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal: E1 30x42 Horizontal. The new sheet. click . and adjust the scale of the view. you learn how to create a new section view and a new callout view. and then add them to a new drawing sheet. and on the Options Bar.Adding a Sheet to the Project In this exercise. Creating New Views to Add to Sheets on page 280. 4 In the Element Properties dialog box. Section Views is displayed in the title block as the sheet name. 280 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings . add a section view.rvt. you add a new sheet to the project. and click OK. 3 Select the title block. 2 In the Select a Title block dialog box. 5 Click File menu ➤ Save. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. under Identity Data. is displayed in the Project Browser. and click OK. Add a new sheet to the project 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. incrementally named S-2 Section Views.

rvt. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. and add it to the sheet 1 In the Project Browser under Structural Plans.0" for Scale. 5 Add a section line that cuts through the right side of the building: ■ Click between grid lines G and H to place the start point of the section line and the section head (section tag). double-click Level 2. and zoom in on the east area of the structure as shown.NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. click . 2 On the View Toolbar. Creating New Views to Add to Sheets | 281 . Create a section view of Level 2. 4 On the Options Bar. i_RST_Drawings-in progress. select 1/16" = 1'. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Section.

select Section: Section 1. Create a callout view. 12 Drag the title line under the elevation view. double-click S-2 Section Views. and add it to the sheet 14 In the Project Browser.0" for View Scale. and click Add View to Sheet. 8 In the Views dialog box. NOTE If necessary. 6 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 7 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 10 With the view selected.■ Move the cursor to the right and click between grid lines J and K to place the section tail and complete the section line. click Add View. under Sections (Building Sections). you can select the view title separately and move it to a new position. right-click. 282 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings . 13 Adjust the length of the title line by dragging the right end control until it fits under the view. under Sheets (all). under Graphics. 11 In the Element Properties dialog box. 9 Click on the upper-left corner of the sheet to place the view. specify 3/16" = 1' . and click Properties. double click Section 1.

16 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. click . specify 3/4" = 1'. 21 With the view selected. and position it approximately as shown. as shown. 22 In the Element Properties dialog box. 23 Drag the title line under the elevation view. 20 In the Project Browser.15 On the View Toolbar. and click Properties. and drag the view onto the sheet. double-click S-2 Section Views. under Graphics. click Callout. 19 In the Project Browser. right-click. under Sheets (all). 18 Select the drag bar attached to the callout balloon. Creating New Views to Add to Sheets | 283 . under Sections (Building Sections). 17 Draw a box around the column of Garage Level 1. 24 Adjust the length of the title line by dragging the right end control until it fits under the view. and zoom in on the lower floors of the structure. click Callout of section 1.0" for View Scale.

you can select the view title separately and move it to a new position. you will learn how to save both the individual views and complete detail sheets as a new detail library and then import these details into a different project. Creating a Drafting View Detail Library In this exercise.TYPICAL DETAILS. you learn how to create a detail library of components that can be imported into different projects. and open Imperial\i_RST_Save_Detail. Save a group of views to the library 1 In the Project Browser. expand Sheets (all).NOTE If necessary.1 . you begin by opening a project that contains common drafting view details. Creating a Detail Library In this lesson.rvt. Instead of having to draw these details for every project. 26 Proceed to the next lesson. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and double-click S. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 25 Click File menu ➤ Save. 284 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings . Creating a Detail Library on page 284. click Training Files.

Notice there are 3 typical detail views on this sheet. 4 In the Save As dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Locate a common drive that can be accessed by all team members. 3 In the Save Views dialog. Open the new folder. Click the icon to the right of Save In to create a new Folder. 2 Click File menu ➤ Save to Library ➤ Save Views. Enter Detail Library for the folder name.1 . and click OK. select Drawing Sheet: S.TYPICAL DETAILS. Creating a Drafting View Detail Library | 285 .

Revit Structure will save views that contain 3D objects. Save individual views to the library 5 Click File menu ➤ Save to Library ➤ Save Views. only the 2D elements will be inserted. when you insert these views into a new project. ■ ■ 7 In the Save As dialog. however. 9 Proceed to the next exercise. navigate to the Detail Library folder created in step 4. Importing Details from the Library on page 287. Click Save. Under Views. Click OK. For File name. Click Save. enter Typical Column Beam and Girder Details.TYPICAL DETAILS. 6 In the Save Views dialog. clear Drawing Sheet: S. NOTE When you save your file.■ ■ Under File name. Only the drafting views will be displayed. 8 Click File menu ➤ Close. select Show drafting views only. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Save in.1 . Select both Footing Section views. 286 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings . do the following: ■ ■ In the list of views. enter Footing Section.

In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. close the warning dialog that appears. Creating a Drafting View Detail Library on page 284 before proceeding. Select the file TYPICAL COLUMN BEAM AND GIRDER DETAILS. click Training Files.rvt. Click OK. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise.TYPICAL DETAILS. 3 In the Insert Views dialog: ■ ■ Select Drawing Sheet: S. select the Detail Library folder you created in the previous exercise. Insert drawing sheet from the library 1 Click File menu ➤ Insert from File ➤ Views. you learn how import details from the newly created library. Click OK. and open Imperial\i_RST_Insert_Detail. 2 In the Open dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Look in.1 . 4 Once the drawing sheet opens.Importing Details from the Library In this exercise. Importing Details from the Library | 287 . Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Click Open. a duplicate types dialog displays. Because you are importing element types that may already exist in the project.

1 . Select the file FOOTING SECTION. 288 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings . 7 In the Open dialog.5 In the Project Browser. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Look in. 8 In the Insert Views dialog: ■ Under Views. Insert separate footing sections from the library 6 Click File menu ➤ Insert from File ➤ Views. expand Sheets (all). and double-click S. select the folder Detail Library you created in the previous exercise. select Drafting View: FOOTING SECTION.TYPICAL DETAILS.rvt. Click Open.

a duplicate types dialog appears. Importing Details from the Library | 289 .■ Click OK. Because you are importing element types that may already exist in the project. Click OK.

rvt. select the folder Detail Library you created in the previous exercise. 290 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings . Select the file Footing Sections.9 Click File menu ➤ Insert from File ➤ Views. 10 In the Open dialog: ■ ■ For Look in.

11 In the Insert Views dialog: ■ ■ Under Views. Click OK.■ Click Open. Importing Details from the Library | 291 . a duplicate types dialog appears. select Drafting View: Footing Section 2. Click OK. Because you are importing element types that may already exist in the project.

Using Legends on page 292. annotation legends are often referred to as symbol legends. concrete schedule. Using Legends Legends provide a way to display a list of the various structural components and annotations used in a project. You have created a library of common drafting details that can be shared by each member of the structural team. component legends are often called schedules (beam schedule. You have also imported both individual detail views as well as the entire detail sheet into an existing project. Annotation legends are made up of components such as section markers which are paired with text that identifies them. 292 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings . using a text type you create by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. The two most common types of legends produced for construction documents are annotation legends and building component legends. On construction documents. you add the completed symbol legend to a sheet for the construction documents. you create a legend view and add symbols and text to it. Finally. 13 Proceed to the next lesson. On construction documents. Creating a Symbol Legend In this exercise.12 Click File menu ➤ Close. Legends list and identify components such as weld symbols and rebar tags. and so on).

rvt.Spacer: Spacer Weld Symbol-w-Preparation: Melt Thru Creating a Symbol Legend | 293 . enter Symbol Legend for Name. and click Rename. i_RST_Drawings-in progress. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Section Head . selecting each from the Type Selector and placing it in the drawing area as shown. Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend.Filled Span Direction Fixed: 1/2” Rebar Tag Weld Symbol: Both Weld Symbol . click Symbol. 3 Right-click Legend 1. and click OK. 6 Add the following symbols to the legend view. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. expand Legends. 2 In the Project Browser.NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Add symbols to the legend 5 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 4 In the Rename View dialog box.

9 On the Options bar. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. 8 In the Type Selector. 14 Enter Level Marker (Level Name/Elevation) or the text note. 12 Under Text. and click OK. click . enter 1/8" for Text Size. select Text: 1/4" Arial text. 11 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Duplicate. 294 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings . click Edit/New. and click OK twice. verify that Text: 1/8" text is selected. enter 1/8" text for Name.Create a text type 7 Because the text size for the symbol legend is not available in the Type Selector. click Text. You do this by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. and click to the right of the first symbol to specify the text start point. On the Design Bar. you create a text type with the necessary size. Add text to the legend 13 In the Type Selector.

click Modify to end the command.15 Working from the top down.Melt thru Place the symbol legend on a sheet 16 In the Project Browser. enter the following text for the remaining symbols in the legend: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Span Direction Fixed: 1/2” Rebar Tag (Tag#) Weld Symbol Weld Symbol . click Symbol Legend.Plans and Elevations to open it in the drawing area. and click to place it. Creating a Symbol Legend | 295 . expand Sheets (all). 17 In the Project Browser. drag it to the lower-right corner of the sheet. and double-click S-1 .Spacer Weld Symbol . 18 On the Design Bar.

The symbol legend is added to the sheet. 19 Click File menu ➤ Close. 20 You can save the open file if you wish. In the next tutorial, a new training file is supplied. 21 Proceed to the next tutorial, Scheduling on page 297.

296 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings

Scheduling

8

In this tutorial, you learn how to create a customized schedule of structural framing elements in your Revit Structure 2009 projects.

Scheduling Beam Quantities
In this lesson, you learn how to create a beam schedule for the structural model as shown below. When you schedule structural components in Revit Structure, you can list each component as a separate line item (an instance schedule), or you can group components of the same type into a single line item (a type schedule).

Creating a Structural Framing Schedule
In this exercise, you learn how to create a structural framing concrete beam schedule. Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_RST_Schedules_Framing.rvt.

Create the schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click in the Design Bar, and click View. 2 In the New Schedule dialog, under Category, select Structural Framing, and click OK. Choose which fields to include in the beam schedule 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab.

297

4 Under Available fields, select Mark, and click Add. The Mark field is moved under Scheduled fields. 5 Using the same process, add the following fields to the schedule:
■ ■ ■

Comments Reference Level Family and Type

NOTE The width and depth parameters will be added to the schedule in the next exercise, Creating Shared Parameters. 6 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click Add Parameter. 7 In the Parameter Properties dialog, do the following:
■ ■ ■

Under Parameter Data, enter REBAR for Name. Under Type of Parameter, select Text. Click OK.

NOTE Rebar is now a project parameter that can also be found in the properties of all structural framing components including beams. 8 Under Scheduled fields, order the fields as shown by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down.

9 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click OK. A schedule is created that includes all structural framing elements in the project.

298 | Chapter 8 Scheduling

10 Click File menu ➤ Close. To save changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name, or close the exercise file without saving changes. The next exercise uses a new training file. 11 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating Shared Parameters on page 299.

Creating Shared Parameters
In this exercise you learn how to use shared parameters to define additional elements that are usually not included in the beam schedule when it is created within the project template. Shared parameters can be added to any family, regardless of category, and are defined and stored in an external file, ensuring consistency across families and projects. Their values may also be aggregated and reported within Revit Structure multi-category schedules. An example of the use of shared parameters is the need to add width and depth information in a concrete beam schedule. This requires assigning the existing width and depth parameters originally defined as family parameters to shared parameters in the beam family. The following exercise demonstrates the solution for this situation and covers the process of setting up shared parameters and adding them to a family. Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_RST_Schedules.rvt.

Editing the family parameters 1 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Ground Level. NOTE Some beams have been added to this view to better demonstrate the scheduling tool. 2 Select one of the concrete beams as shown.

Creating Shared Parameters | 299

3 On the Options Bar, click Edit Family. 4 Click Yes when prompted about opening the beam for editing. NOTE You are now in the Family Editor. The selected beam family is displayed in the drawing area. 5 On the Family design bar, click Family Types. 6 In the Family Types dialog, under Dimensions, select the b parameter, and click Modify.

7 In the Parameter Properties dialog, select Shared Parameter, and click Select. 8 When asked if you want to choose a shared parameter file, click Yes. 9 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog, click Create. 10 In the Save As dialog, specify a location for the file, and enter Project Shared Parameters for name. Click Save. 11 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog, under Groups, click New. 12 In the New Parameter Group dialog, enter Dimensions for name, and click OK. 13 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog, under Parameters, click New. 14 In the Parameter Properties dialog, do the following:
■ ■

Under Name, enter b. Under Type of Parameter, select Length.

300 | Chapter 8 Scheduling

Click OK.

15 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog, under Parameters, click New. 16 In the Parameter Properties dialog, do the following:
■ ■ ■

Under Name, enter h. Under Type of Parameter, select Length. Click OK.

17 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog, click OK. 18 In the Shared Parameter dialog, select the b parameter, and click OK. 19 In the Parameter Properties dialog, click OK. 20 In the Family Types dialog, under Dimensions, select the h parameter, and click Modify. 21 In the Parameter Properties dialog, select Shared Parameter, and click Select. 22 In the Shared Parameter dialog, select the h parameter, and click OK. 23 In the Parameter Properties dialog, click OK. 24 In the Family Types dialog, click OK. NOTE The b and h parameters, which were originally family parameters, are now shared parameters. They will appear in the structural framing schedule field once they are reloaded into the project file. 25 On the Family design bar, click Load into Project. 26 When prompted to overwrite the existing version of the family, click Yes. Remove Family and Type parameter 27 In the Project Browser, under Schedules/Quantities, right-click Structural Framing Schedule, and select Properties. 28 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Fields, click Edit. 29 In the Schedule Properties dialog, under Scheduled fields (in order), select Family and Type, and click Remove. The Family and Type field is removed from the Scheduled fields column. Add depth and width parameters to the beam schedule 30 Under Available Fields, select b (Width) and h (Depth), and click Add. The b and h fields are moved under Scheduled fields. 31 Under Scheduled fields, order the fields as shown by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down.

Creating Shared Parameters | 301

32 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click OK. 33 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. 34 Click File menu ➤ Close. To save changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name, or close the exercise file without saving changes. The next exercise uses a new training file. 35 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating a Type Schedule on page 302.

Creating a Type Schedule
In this exercise, you learn how to create a type schedule. Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_RST_Schedules_Custom.rvt.

Modify the table elements 1 In the Project Browser, under Schedules/Quantities, double-click Structural Framing Schedule. 2 Modify the schedule headings as follows:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Select Mark, and enter MARK. Select b (Width), and enter W. Select h (Depth), and enter D. Select Comments, and enter REMARKS. Select the title, and enter GROUND LEVEL CONCRETE BEAM SCHEDULE.

NOTE Under the Project Browser, click Schedules/Quantities. Notice that the schedule name has changed. 3 Select headings W and D. 4 On the Options bar, click Group.

302 | Chapter 8 Scheduling

A new blank cell is created above columns W and D. 5 Click the new heading, and enter SIZE.

Select a filter 6 Right-click the open area next to the schedule, and select View Properties. 7 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Filter, click Edit. 8 In the Schedule Properties dialog, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Click the Filter tab. Select Reference Level for Filter by. Select Ground Level. Click OK.

9 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. Notice the schedule is filtered and shows only the structural framing elements of the ground level.

Format units 10 Right-click the open area next to the schedule, and click View Properties. 11 In the Element Properties dialog, under Formatting, click Edit for Value. 12 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Formatting tab. 13 Under Fields, click b, and click Field Format. 14 In the Format dialog, do the following:
■ ■ ■

Clear Use project settings. Under Units, select Fractional inches. Under Rounding, select To the nearest 1/2".

Creating a Type Schedule | 303

Click OK.

15 Using the same method, format units for field h. 16 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click OK. 17 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. Columns W and D now display fractional inches.

Add structural usage parameter to the beam schedule 18 In the Project Browser, under Schedules/Quantities, right-click the Ground Level Concrete Beam Schedule, and select Properties. 19 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Fields, click Edit. 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab. 21 Under Available Fields, select Structural Usage, and click Add. The Structural usage is moved under Scheduled fields. 22 Under Scheduled fields, order the fields as shown by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down.

304 | Chapter 8 Scheduling

23 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click OK. 24 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. The schedule now displays the structural usage of each item.

Sort by Structural Usage 25 Right-click the open area next to the schedule, and select View Properties. 26 In the Element Properties dialog, under Sorting/Grouping, click Edit for Value. 27 In the Schedule Properties dialog ➤ Sorting/Grouping tab, do the following:
■ ■ ■

Under Sort by, select Structural Usage. Select Header. Select Footer.

Creating a Type Schedule | 305

■ ■

Select Blank Line. Click OK.

28 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. The schedule is updated to provide both a header and footer for each type, sorted by structural usage.

29 Click File menu ➤ Close. To save changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name, or close the exercise file without saving changes. The next exercise uses a new training file. 30 Proceed to the next exercise, Customizing the Type Schedule on page 307.

306 | Chapter 8 Scheduling

Customizing the Type Schedule
In this exercise, you first add mark information to identify each beam type, you then sort the schedule by mark, hide specific columns, and finally, you add rebar information. Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_RST_Schedules_Custom_Type.rvt.

Add mark data 1 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Ground Level. 2 On the Window menu, click Tile. The screen is split into two separate windows, showing both the beam schedule and Ground Level view. NOTE Close any additional views that may be opened. If prompted to save the changes to the beam family, click Yes, and provide a location for the new family file. 3 While pressing CTRL, select multiple joists on the Ground Level window as shown.

4 On the Options bar, click
■ ■

.

5 In the Element Properties dialog, do the following: Under Identity Data, enter B1 for Mark Value. Click OK.

NOTE Ignore the warning regarding elements having duplicate Mark values. The schedule is updated with the joist information.

Customizing the Type Schedule | 307

6 While pressing CTRL, select multiple joists on the Ground Level window as shown.

7 On the Options bar, click
■ ■

.

8 In the Element Properties dialog, do the following: Under Identity Data, enter B2 for Mark Value. Click OK.

NOTE Ignore the warning regarding elements having duplicate Mark values. The schedule is updated with the joist information.

308 | Chapter 8 Scheduling

9 While pressing CTRL, select multiple joists on the Ground Level window as shown.

10 On the Options bar, click
■ ■

.

11 In the Element Properties dialog, do the following: Under Identity Data, enter B3 for Mark Value. Click OK.

NOTE Ignore the warning regarding elements having duplicate Mark values. The schedule is updated with the joist information.

Customizing the Type Schedule | 309

Sort and filter the schedule by mark 12 Maximize the schedule window. 13 Right-click the open area next to the schedule, and select View Properties. 14 In the Element Properties dialog, under Sorting/Grouping, click Edit for Value. 15 In the Schedule Properties dialog, do the following:
■ ■

Clear Footer, Header, Itemize every instance, and Grand totals. Under Sort by, select Mark.

16 In the Schedules Properties dialog, click the Filter tab, and do the following:

Under Filter by, select Mark, then select contains, and enter B.

310 | Chapter 8 Scheduling

Click OK.

17 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. Notice the schedule is not itemized and does not show each beam, but instead groups all the beams of the same mark in a single row.

Hide/unhide columns 18 Right-click the open area next to the schedule, and click View Properties. 19 In the Element Properties dialog, under Formatting, click Edit for Value. 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog, do the following:
■ ■ ■

Under Fields, select Reference Level. Under Field Formatting, select Hidden field. Click OK.

21 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. The Reference Level column is now hidden. NOTE To show all hidden columns, right-click the open area next to the schedule, select Unhide All Columns. You can also hide a column by right-clicking the desired column, and selecting Hide Column(s) from the drop-down menu. Rename existing rebar parameter 22 Right-click the open area next to the schedule, and click View Properties. 23 In the Element Properties dialog, under Formatting, click Edit for Value.

Customizing the Type Schedule | 311

Add new rebar parameter 26 Right-click the open area next to the schedule. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Fields. 28 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. Under Type of Parameter. enter Bottom Bars. click Edit for Value. enter Top Bars for Name. 312 | Chapter 8 Scheduling . click OK. Under Heading. The new rebar field is added. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. click Add Parameter. The Rebar field is renamed. Click OK. click OK. click OK. 29 In the Parameter Properties dialog. select REBAR. Rebar will not be added to the model with the data entered in this dialog. and click View Properties. under Fields.24 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Click OK. order the fields as shown by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. 30 Under Scheduled fields. select Text. 31 In the Schedule Properties dialog. This parameter provides text information that is added to all beams within the model.

under Schedules/Quantities. Create the formula 1 In the Project Browser.Group rebar columns 33 Select both the Bottom Bars and Top Bars headings. For Joists B2. and save the exercise file with a unique name. and click View Properties. Enter rebar data 36 Enter the following rebar set information for each rebar instance as follows: ■ ■ ■ For Joists B1. under the Fields parameter. 35 Click the new heading. select2-#5C. click Group. For Joists B3. and under Top Bars. enter 2-#5A 1-#5B. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. as well as the total cost of all structural items for the ground level of the structure. you create a formula to calculate the unit cost for each joist instance. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Bottom Bars. enter 2-#5 C. and under Top Bars. under Bottom Bars. 38 Proceed to the next exercise. double-click Ground Level Concrete Beam Schedule. and open Imperial\i_RST_Schedules_Formula. Creating an Instance Schedule In this exercise. The schedule is updated with the joist information. Creating an Instance Schedule on page 313. click Edit for Value.rvt. Creating an Instance Schedule | 313 . and enter REBAR. click File menu ➤ Save As. click Training Files. enter 2-#6A 1-#6B. The next exercise uses a new training file. 37 Click File menu ➤ Close. or close the exercise file without saving changes. select 2-#5C. A new blank cell is created above the columns. and under Top Bars. To save changes. enter 2-#7A 1-#7B. 2 Right-click the open area next to the schedule. 34 On the Options bar. under Bottom Bars. 3 In the Element Properties dialog.

Enter Volume*Cost/1'^3 for Formula. ■ Click OK. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Total Cost for Name. 314 | Chapter 8 Scheduling . The schedule will calculate the total cost for all joists. the value will be applied to all elements of the same type. 6 In the Schedule Properties dialog.4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and click Add. Click Calculated Value. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Available Fields. select Volume. and press ENTER. 5 In the Calculated Value dialog. Note that the formula will calculate the total cost based on a volume unit of 1 cubic yard. and click Add. enter 3 for Cost. click OK. select Cost. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. Under Available Fields. Select Number for Type. Because cost is a type parameter. 8 Under Joist B1. click OK.

Under Field formatting. select $. In the Format dialog. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. under Formatting. select Calculate totals. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the Formatting tab. Click OK.5 for Cost. select Currency. Also notice that the Total Cost parameter does not have a unit value assigned. Format total cost to include currency value 14 Right-click the open area next to the schedule.NOTE The cost value represents a random value chosen for demonstration purposes only. 12 In the Schedule Properties dialog. click Field Format. clear Use default settings. click Edit for Value. and click View Properties. enter 1. Under Unit Symbol. The schedule now includes the sum for Total Cost. Under Units. and click View Properties. click OK. Under Fields. under Formatting. Creating an Instance Schedule | 315 . select Total Cost. Under Fields. 9 Under Joist B2. click Edit for Value. 16 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Under Rounding. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. select 2 Decimal Places. Under Field Formatting. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the Formatting tab. 10 Right-click the open area next to the schedule. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. and press ENTER. select Total Cost.

20 Proceed to the next lesson. click OK. click File menu ➤ Save As. To save changes. Creating a Graphical Column Schedule on page 316. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. 19 Click File menu ➤ Close. 17 In the Schedule Properties dialog. click Training Files. or close the exercise file without saving changes. The Total Cost column displays a currency value in Dollars. and open Imperial\i_RST_Schedules_Create_GCS. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. The next lesson uses a new training file. Create the Graphical Column Schedule In this exercise you learn how to create a graphical column schedule. 316 | Chapter 8 Scheduling . Creating a Graphical Column Schedule In this lesson. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click OK.rvt. you learn how to create a graphical column schedule for the current project. and save the exercise file with a unique name.■ Click OK.

2 Right-click the column schedule. and zoom in on the schedule. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. The schedule is created automatically.Create the schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 6 On the Toolbar. and click OK. and Ground Level. and select View Properties. click Graphical Column Schedule. NOTE These levels will not appear on the graphical column schedule. 4 In the Levels Hidden dialog. select Foundation. click . Notice that the first level on the schedule is Level 2. click Edit for Hidden Levels. Garage Level . under Other. click OK. Create the Graphical Column Schedule | 317 .1.

NOTE The graphical column schedule includes columns located at off-grid locations as shown below. The schedule also provides the nearest grid intersection and the value for the offset distance between the grid and column. Columns located at off-grid locations 318 | Chapter 8 Scheduling .

For Column Locations. and click OK. enter 3". do the following: ■ ■ Under Graphics. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. and select View Properties. click OK. Create the Graphical Column Schedule | 319 . and for Grid Appearance. for Below Bottom Level. under Vertical Heights. under Horizontal Widths. select Group Similar Locations. In the Graphical Column Schedule Properties dialog. enter 3". click Edit. ■ In the Element Properties dialog. Notice that all columns located at off-grid locations are now grouped together under a single column.Columns displayed in plan view Grouping and formatting off-grid columns 7 Right-click the schedule.

and then select Bold and Italic. 2 Right-click the schedule. or close the exercise file without saving changes. 4 In the Graphical Column Schedule Properties dialog. and then select Bold. and click OK.Include/Exclude columns at off-grid locations In the graphical column schedule view. you learn how to add a title to the schedule and how to customize text and graphic appearance. Customize text 1 In the Project Browser. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. The next exercise uses a new training file. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Change the Schedule Appearance In this exercise. select Courier New from the drop-down list. and select View Properties. under Graphics. To save changes. 11 Click File menu ➤ Close. select Arial Black from the drop-down list. double-click Graphical Column Schedule 1. 320 | Chapter 8 Scheduling . and open Imperial\i_RST_Schedules_Customize_GCS. click Edit for Value. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. Notice the schedule view only displays those columns located at grid intersections. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click File menu ➤ Save As. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you can include or exclude columns located at off-grid locations. Change the Schedule Appearance on page 320. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. For Level text. click Training Files. and select View Properties. do the following: ■ ■ For Title text. 9 Right-click the schedule. under Graphical Column Schedules.rvt. under Text Appearance. clear both Include Off-Grid Columns and Group Similar Locations.

Enter 2" for Level Names. enter Steel Column Schedule for Title.5 Click the Grid Appearance tab. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. 9 Click OK. under Identity Data. 7 Click OK. Change the Schedule Appearance | 321 . 6 Under Horizontal Widths: ■ ■ Enter 2" for Column Locations.

11 On the Options bar. click Tag All Not Tagged. 17 On the Options bar. 16 Draw a pick box around the entire schedule. click Vertical. and clear Leader. and click OK. select Structural Column Tags. select Vertical. Under Orientation. 322 | Chapter 8 Scheduling . 15 Enter ZF to fit the entire column schedule in the drawing area.Tag the columns 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. clear Structural Columns. 12 Click any column on Level 7 to place the tag. Click Apply. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. 14 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. 18 In the Filter dialog. 13 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Click OK. click Tag ➤ By Category. click .

.19 On the Toolbar. Split the column schedule 21 Right-click the schedule. and zoom in on one of the column tags. and select View Properties. click . Change the Schedule Appearance | 323 . click 20 On the Toolbar. and move the tags until they are positioned approximately as shown.

enter Steel Column Schedule. click Sheet. A titleblock and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. The next exercise uses a new training file. or close the exercise file without saving changes. 324 | Chapter 8 Scheduling . 3 In the Project Browser. enter S-3. The schedule is split into multiple segments with 10 column locations per segment. 5 On the Options bar. do the following. Create a sheet 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and select the titleblock. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. Under Column Locations per Segment. 23 Click OK. Creating Multiple Sheets for the Graphical Column Schedule on page 324. click Training Files.22 In the Element Properties dialog. expand Sheets (all). and click OK. ■ ■ Under View Scale. and open Imperial\i_RST_Schedules_Multiple_Sheets_GCS. Change the sheet name and number 4 On the Design Bar. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. To save changes. click Modify. do the following: Under Identity Data ➤ Sheet Name. Click OK. enter 10. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal: E1 30x42 Horizontal.0". In the left pane of the Open dialog. The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser. Creating Multiple Sheets for the Graphical Column Schedule In this exercise.rvt. you create multiple sheets for the graphical column schedule. enter 1/4" = 1' . and save the exercise file with a unique name. Under Sheet Number. click ■ ■ ■ . click File menu ➤ Save As.

10 Select the schedule. 9 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet. and double-click Sheet S-4. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. Click OK. click . 17 Repeat previous steps to add 2 additional sheets. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Add View to Sheet. Add the column schedule to the sheet 7 On the View tab of the Design bar. Add additional sheets 12 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. select Graphical Column Schedule. expand Sheets (all). and select the titleblock. and enter S-5 and S-6 for sheet numbers.The sheet name and number are displayed in the titleblock and in the Project Browser. click Add View. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal: E1 30x42 Horizontal. Place remaining views 18 On the Project Browser. The first segment will be placed on Sheet S-3. 8 In the Views dialog. Under Sheet Number. under Extents. and click to place the view. click OK. enter S-4. click Modify. and click OK. 13 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. select Steel Column Schedule. do the following: Under Identity Data ➤ Sheet Name. Creating Multiple Sheets for the Graphical Column Schedule | 325 . Enter Steel Column Schedule for name. 15 On the Options bar. click ■ ■ ■ . enter 1 for Segments in Viewport. click Sheet. 14 On the Design Bar.

and double-click Sheet S-5 23 On the Project Browser. 9 Under Directories. 6 Click Finish. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access In this exercise.rvt. 8 In the New Database dialog. 27 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet. 22 On the Project Browser. and click Next. click File menu ➤ Save As. click OK. 10 When the confirmation message displays. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. under Graphical Column Schedule. you learn how to export project information into a Microsoft® Access 2000 database. 3 Click New. and click to place the view. 12 Click OK in the remaining dialogs. under Database. under Graphical Column Schedule. and drag it onto the sheet. click Training Files. select a location for the database file. 21 Position the schedule as necessary. 20 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet. 7 In the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog. click Graphical Column Schedule 1. and then open the database in Microsoft Access. select the Microsoft Access driver (*mdb). Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access on page 326. and click to place the view. you learn how to export project information to an ODBC (Open DataBase Connectivity) compliant database. click OK. 11 In the OBDC Microsoft Access Setup dialog. The process that you use to export the database is similar for any other ODBC-compliant database. and drag it onto the sheet. under Graphical Column Schedule. click Graphical Column Schedule 1. 5 Enter RevitDSN for the name of the DSN. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click OK to create the database. 4 In the Create New Data Source dialog. click the File Data Source tab. under Database Name. expand Sheets (all). click Create. 2 In the Select Data Source dialog. enter Revit_Project. and drag it onto the sheet. and double-click Sheet S-6. 26 On the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Graphical Column Schedule 1. 28 Click File menu ➤ Close. 25 On the Project Browser. and click Next. To save changes. expand Sheets (all). Export the schedule 1 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ ODBC Database. 326 | Chapter 8 Scheduling . and click to place the view.19 On the Project Browser. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 24 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet. Exporting Project Information with ODBC In this lesson. The next exercise uses a new training file. and open Imperial\i_RST_Schedules_Export_Project_Info.mdb. or close the exercise file without saving changes.

13 Click File menu ➤ Close. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click File menu ➤ Save As. and one that lists all of the element types in a project (see below). The next tutorial uses a new training file.Revit Structure creates 2 tables: one that lists all of the element instances in a project. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access | 327 . 14 Proceed to the next tutorial. so that each table of elements includes an ID column. instance tables include a Type ID column containing the ID of the instance’s type. To save changes. For example. and some instance tables include a Room ID column containing the ID of the room that the instance is in. A unique element ID is used to identify exported elements. or close the exercise file without saving changes. Steel Details on page 329. Elements IDs are also used to establish relationships between elements in different tables.

328 .

and open Imperial\i_RST_DET. and how to create a drafting detail using the tools provided (drafting-detail). In the left pane of the Open dialog. Prepare the welded brace elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click Level 4. you begin with a framed model as the basis of your details.rvt. click Training Files. Detail drawings describe how particular pieces of the structure go together and are typically created in the middle to later portion of the design process after the general building shape and structural elements have been decided upon. You cut a section in plan. you learn how to use Revit Structure 2009 to create steel details from the structural model (model-based). and add these views to a sheet. 2 Select . This tutorial comprises the following model-based steel detail exercises: ■ ■ ■ Welded Brace Connection Bolted Angle Connection Glazing Support Connection Setting Up Section Views on Sheets In this lesson. Cutting Sections and Adding Views to Sheets Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and draw a zoom box around the northwest stair opening as shown.Steel Details 9 In this tutorial. Structural Plans. revise a callout view. revise an existing elevation view. expand Views (all). 329 .

and select 3/4" =1' . 5 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ ■ Click Scale control. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 8 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select the elevation crop view. click Section. and draw a zoom box around grid line intersection 1-E. under Structural Plans. 330 | Chapter 9 Steel Details .3 Double-click the elevation bubble to open the elevation view. Click Detail Level ➤ Fine. double-click Level 4. and drag the controls to resize such that only the Level 4 area is visible.0". 4 In the elevation view. Create the section view 6 In the Project Browser. 7 Select .

and zoom in on the south wall at Level 4. 15 Select . 11 Double-click the section bubble to open the section view. double-click West Elevation. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. A callout symbol is located in this view at the south wall. and select 1/2" =1' . Cutting Sections and Adding Views to Sheets | 331 . 10 On the Design Bar.0". and drag the view controls so that only Level 4 is visible. Click Detail Level ➤ Fine. Revise the callout view 14 In the Project Browser. 16 Double-click on the callout head to open the view. 13 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ ■ Click Scale control.9 Draw a section as shown. click Modify. 12 Select the section crop view. under Elevations (Building Elevation).

and click Add View to Sheet. and click Rename. right-click S-6 . select E1 30x42 Horizontal. Create a sheet and place the section. and click to place the view. select Elevation: Elevation 1-a.0". select Elevation: Callout of West Elevation. 19 In the Select a Title block dialog. and click Add View. 24 In the Views dialog. and click to place the view. and select 3/4" =1' . 21 Right-click S-6 Unnamed. 27 In the Views dialog. Click Detail Level ➤ Fine. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. and click to place the view.Steel Details. 30 In the Views dialog. 28 Move the cursor onto the sheet.17 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ ■ Click Scale control. and click Add View. expand Sheets (all). 31 Move the cursor onto the sheet. elevation. and callout views on the sheet 18 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. right-click S-6 . right-click S-6 . and click Add View. and click OK. and click OK. and click Add View to Sheet. and click Add View to Sheet. 22 In the Sheet Title dialog. enter Steel Details for Name. 25 Move the cursor onto the sheet.Steel Details. 26 In the Project Browser. 20 In the Project Browser.Steel Details. 332 | Chapter 9 Steel Details . 23 In the Project Browser. 29 In the Project Browser. select Section: Section 1.

under Elevations (Interior Elevation). a bolted angle detail. 33 Proceed to the next lesson. Creating a Welded Bracing Detail Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. Detailing Steel In this lesson. 2 On the Toolbar.rvt.rvt. i_RST_DET-in progress. . You will sketch the lines in a model view. and a facade support detail to the model. double click Elevation 1-a. click braces meet at Level 4.32 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and draw a zoom box around the midpoint of the beam where the Detailing Steel | 333 . Detailing Steel on page 333. and save the model to a location of your choice using the following file name: i_RST_DET-in progress. The first part of the exercise involves adding a plate to the underside of a beam to support the bracing. Sketch line work 1 In the Project Browser. you add a welded bracing detail.

click Detail Lines. enter the value. and drag the shape handle (two small triangles at the brace end) to move the brace so it is not touching the beam flange. 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 5 Place the cursor near the bottom flange of the beam. 6 Sketch a vertical line down 1' -1 3/8" from the bottom flange as shown.3 Select the left brace. 334 | Chapter 9 Steel Details . and enter SM to snap to the midpoint. TIP After establishing the line direction.

A line displays that is offset from the highlighted line. Creating a Welded Bracing Detail | 335 . click Offset. 13 On the Options Bar. 12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select Numerical. and enter 1' 8" for the Offset value. 14 Place the cursor on the bottom flange of the beam as shown.Next. click . click Detail Lines. 8 On the Options Bar. and select Copy. enter 2' 6" for Offset. and click to place the detail line. 7 On the Options Bar. 10 Click to place this line. you create 2 detail lines that are offset from this vertical line. 11 Repeat the same steps to place a vertical line on the opposite side. 9 Place the cursor near the vertical line to highlight it.

and select the horizontal detail line.15 On the Design Bar. click Detail Lines. and sketch 2 detail lines to connect the horizontal line to the vertical lines as shown. 336 | Chapter 9 Steel Details . 17 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 16 Enter 3' 9" for the temporary dimension value as shown. click Modify.

and enter 3/8. and enter a period. 24 On the Options Bar. and press DELETE to delete this element. click Add a Leader.18 Select the middle vertical line that you used as a reference line. 22 Click the right top weld annotation. Add weld symbols 19 In the Project Browser. click the left top weld annotation. Repeat for the left bottom value. expand Families ➤ Annotation Symbols ➤ Weld Symbol ➤ Select Both. 20 Click Modify. click Modify. 21 Select the weld symbol. Repeat for the right bottom value. The weld symbol has 4 numerical parameters that are currently set to 0. and select the weld symbol. drag it into the view as shown. Creating a Welded Bracing Detail | 337 . 25 Drag the leader arrowhead to the position as shown. and click to place it. 23 On the Design Bar.

select Weld All Around. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Structural. 27 Right-click the new weld symbol. 338 | Chapter 9 Steel Details .26 Use the same technique to add another weld symbol as shown. Click OK. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. select Weld Contour-Empty for Top Symbol. and click Properties. Under Graphics.

click . Creating a Bolted Angle Detail Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. click Text. and enter 3/8" PL for text. TYPICAL for text as shown. i_RST_DET-in progress. double-click Section 1. Creating a Bolted Angle Detail on page 339. In the first part of the exercise. 34 Draw a leader to the brace and enter L8x8.rvt. Creating a Bolted Angle Detail | 339 . Then you add some annotations. 31 Draw a text leader to the plate. 35 Click File menu ➤ Save. 1 In the Project Browser. click .Label the angles and the plate 29 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Text. 36 Proceed to the next exercise. you add 2 angles to the model using an angle family that has been loaded into the project. 32 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 33 On the Options Bar. 30 On the Options Bar. under Sections.

3 Drag the family onto the grid line in the view as shown. 7 On the Options Bar. click . 5 Sketch a vertical line through the center of the left set of bolts as shown. under Families ➤ Detail Items ➤ L-Angle-Bolted Connection Section. 6 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Add annotations 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select L4x4x5/16. click Detail Lines.2 In the Project Browser. click Text. 340 | Chapter 9 Steel Details .

In this exercise. 2 On the Toolbar. double-click West Elevation. you add members to support exterior wall glazing.rvt. Creating a Facade Support Detail on page 341. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Facade Support Detail Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. under Elevations (Building Elevation).8 Enter the text notes as shown. click Level 4 at Grid 4. i_RST_DET-in progress. . 9 Click File menu ➤ Save. and draw a zoom box around the callout at the intersection on Creating a Facade Support Detail | 341 . 1 In the Project Browser.

5 Drag the channel onto the drawing area. 4 In the Project Browser. You will attach a channel in section to the outrigger for use as a member of the facade support system. select C5x6. click .7. move it to the position shown. and select the left side of the column as shown.3 Double-click the callout head to open Callout of West Elevation. 8 On the Edit toolbar. and click to place it. expand Families ➤ Detail Items ➤ C-Channel Section. 342 | Chapter 9 Steel Details . 6 Click Modify and select the channel. 7 Press the SPACEBAR to rotate the channel twice. On the right side of the view is an imported symbol that represents a curtain wall.

Creating a Facade Support Detail | 343 .9 Next. select the back of the channel as shown. 10 Continue to use the align tool to align the channel to the bottom of the outrigger as shown.

In the next lesson. Add annotations 12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Drafting View Detail In this lesson. you learn how to create a drafting view detail for a deck span transition using the drafting tools provided in Revit Structure. Creating a Drafting View Detail on page 344.11 In the Project Browser. 344 | Chapter 9 Steel Details . click Text. select the bolt. 14 Click near the bolt and enter 3/4" DIA. 17 Click File menu ➤ Close. double-click S-6 Steel Detail to view the results of your work in the sheet view.7. You can save the open file if you wish. 15 Press ESC twice to exit the Text tool. expand Families ➤ Detail Items ➤ Bolt-Section. 13 Click the open area outside of the channel and enter C5x6. under Sheets. and drag it onto the outrigger and channel as shown. a new training file is supplied. 18 Proceed to the next lesson. 16 In the Project Browser. A325 BOLT.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter Typical Detail . 11 On the Design bar. Create the drafting view 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 2 In the New Drafting dialog. 10 Position the joist on the right side of the beam.Deck Span Transition.rvt.0". Load detail components 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 6 Click the drawing area to place the component. select Detail Component. 3 In the Project Browser. 7 On the Design bar. 5 In the Type Selector.Deck Span Transition. select K-Series Bar Joist . and open Imperial\i_RST_Deck_Span_Detail. click Modify. Creating a Deck Span Transition Detail | 345 .Creating a Deck Span Transition Detail Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 9 In the Type Selector. select AISC Wide Flange Shapes . select Detail Component.Side: 14K3. click Modify. and double-click Typical Detail . click Training Files. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Name. Align the bottom of the joist seat with the top of the beam as shown. expand Drafting Views. click Drafting View. Under Scale. select 1 1/2" = 1' . 8 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Click OK.Section: W18x35.

18 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 15 Move the pointer to the right to begin placing the deck. select Detail Component.5 WR 22. select Repeating Detail.12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select Repeating Detail : Metal Deck. click Modify. select Detail Component. 21 On the Design bar.Section: HSS2-1/2x2-1/2x. 24 Align the bottom of the decking with the top of the joist and move the deck to the left approximately as shown. 13 In the Type Selector. and continue to move the pointer to the right until the deck is drawn as shown. 14 Click the end of the joist. 16 Press the SPACEBAR to rotate the orientation of the deck. select AISC Tube Shapes . 17 On the Design bar. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 20 Place the tube on the top flange of the steel beam directly next to the end of the joist seat as shown. select Roof Decking-Side: 1.125. 346 | Chapter 9 Steel Details . 23 In the Type Selector. 19 In the Type Selector. click Modify.

28 Place the joist to the left of the beam. click Modify. and align the top of the joist with the bottom of the deck as shown. 33 In the Element Properties dialog.25 On the Design bar. Click OK. click Modify. click ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . change the following instance parameters: Under Structural. click Modify. Enter 2 @ 12 for Bottom Weld Length. Creating a Deck Span Transition Detail | 347 . 29 On the Design bar. select K-Series Bar Joist-Section: 14K3. Add weld symbols 30 In the Project Browser. clear Symbol Left. 31 On the Design Bar. expand Families ➤ Annotation Symbols ➤ Weld Symbol ➤ select the bottom. 27 In the Type Selector. drag it into the view as shown. and click to place it. Under Other. and select Symbol Right. and on the Options Bar. select Field Weld. 26 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Enter 3/16" for Bottom Weld Size. select Detail Component. 32 Select the weld symbol.

click Modify. 348 | Chapter 9 Steel Details . 42 Repeat the previous steps to add the remaining text and leader to the detail view as shown. click Add a Leader. 40 On the Design bar. and select the weld symbol. click Text. 39 Draw a text leader to the steel deck and enter STL DECK SEE PLAN for text.34 On the Design Bar. click . 38 On the Options Bar. 36 Drag the leader arrowhead to the position as shown. 41 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Text. click Modify. Add text to the detail view 37 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 35 On the Options Bar.

44 Proceed to the next tutorial. and navigate to a folder location of your choice.43 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Creating a Deck Span Transition Detail | 349 . Concrete Reinforcement Modelling on page 351.

350 .

you model reinforcement in a concrete beam. Reinforcement in a Beam In this exercise. This tutorial comprises the following concrete reinforcement modelling exercises: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Reinforcement in a Beam Reinforcement in a Column Area Reinforcement in a Structural Wall Area Reinforcement in a Slab Path Reinforcement in a Slab Sketching Reinforcement in a Footing Sketching Reinforcement in a Structural Wall Concrete Modelling Examples In this lesson. you learn how to model reinforcement using the sketching tools and rebar library provided with Revit Structure.Concrete Reinforcement Modelling 10 In this tutorial. you learn how to use Revit Structure 2009 to model concrete reinforcement from the structural project. 351 . using the Revit Structure rebar shapes library. Each exercise shows how specific reinforcement elements are built while demonstrating the modelling capabilities of Revit Structure.

Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Parallel. Some of the rebar line weights were increased in the illustrations for training purposes. double-click Beam Detail. Open detail view 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. and draw a pick box around the section view of the beam located in the center of the drawing area. This browser provides multiple rebar shape types that can be placed within the specified host. 2 On the Toolbar. positioned to the right of the drawing area. click . In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\i_RST_Concrete_Reinf. Launch the rebar shape browser 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. The Rebar Shape Browser launches. under Detail Views (Detail). NOTE The line weights in your file may differ from the examples shown. The active rebar shape is highlighted and corresponds to the shape specified on the Options bar. click Training Files. 352 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling .

The library is located in the Rebar Shapes folder in the Imperial Library. For training purposes. Place rebar parallel to the beam face 4 In the Type Selector. 6 Hover over the section view. select Rebar Bar: #4. the Rebar Shape Library is already loaded in this training file. Notice that the rebar shape changes as you select a different beam edge. Reinforcement in a Beam | 353 . 7 Click the bottom edge of the beam to place the rebar. and select Rebar Shape: S3. 5 Click in the Rebar Shape Browser. scroll down the list of available shapes.NOTE You can open or close the Rebar Shape Browser by clicking on the Options Bar.

and select Rebar Shape: 01. 354 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling .8 Click in the Rebar Shape Browser. Set rebar spacing 11 Select the rebar shapes that you placed in the previous steps. 10 On the Design Bar. scroll down the list of available shapes. click Modify. select Maximum Spacing. scroll down the list of available shapes. and on the Options Bar. and select Rebar Shape: T9. do the following: ■ ■ For Layout. scroll down the list of available shapes. click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Perpendicular. 9 Click the top edge of the view to place the rebar. 15 On the Design Bar. For Spacing. click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Perpendicular. Place rebar perpendicular to the beam face 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 14 Place 2 rebar in the detail view. 13 Click in the Rebar Shape Browser. enter 0’ 6”. 17 Click in the Rebar Shape Browser. and select Rebar Shape: 01. approximately as shown. click Modify. 16 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Rebar Size. approximately as shown. select Rebar Bar: #6. enter 4. select Fixed Number. and on the Options Bar. Set rebar visibility 22 Draw a pick box to select the rebar as shown. Set rebar spacing 20 Select the single rebar that you just placed. For Layout. 19 On the Design Bar. Reinforcement in a Beam | 355 . For Quantity. click Modify. 21 On the Design Bar. click Modify.18 Pace a single rebar at the bottom of the detail view.

and draw a zoom box around the beam as shown 356 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . click .23 On the Options Bar. select Detail Level: Fine. select both View unobscured and View as solid. 28 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. click . double-click 3D. click OK. 30 On the Toolbar. 29 Click or drag the ViewCube to re-orient the view until the south side of the structure is visible. under Graphics. 26 In the Element Properties dialog. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. 25 In the Rebar Element View Visibility States dialog. View rebar in 3D 27 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. click Edit for View Visibility States. for 3D View.

Reinforcement in a Beam | 357 . Modify the rebar length 31 On the Toolbar. and draw a zoom box around the end of the beam.Notice that the rebar sets are visible. click 32 Select the rebar as shown. .

35 Proceed to the next exercise. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Reinforcement in a Column on page 359. 34 Click File menu ➤ Close. 358 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling .33 Click and drag the rebar shape handles to change the length of the rebar as required. The next exercise uses a new training file. or close the exercise file without saving changes. click File menu ➤ Save As. To save changes.

The Rebar Shape Browser launches. double-click Column Detail. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and draw a pick box around the section view of the column located in the center of the drawing area. using the Revit Structure rebar shapes library. positioned to the right of the drawing area. Open detail view 1 In the Project Browser. Launch the rebar shape browser 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. This browser provides multiple rebar shape types that can be placed within the specified host. click Training Files. The active rebar shape is highlighted and corresponds to the shape specified on the Options bar.Reinforcement in a Column In this exercise. you model reinforcement in a concrete column. Reinforcement in a Column | 359 .rvt. Some of the rebar line weights were increased in the illustrations for training purposes. click . NOTE The line weights in your file may differ from the examples shown. 2 On the Toolbar. under Detail Views (Detail). click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Parallel. and open Imperial\i_RST_Concrete_Reinf.

select Rebar Bar: #4. Set rebar spacing 9 Select the rebar that you just placed. Place rebar parallel to the column face 4 In the Type Selector. and select Rebar Shape: T1. the Rebar Shape Library is already loaded in this training file. click Modify. For training purposes. For Layout. select Rebar Bar: #4. 7 Click the bottom edge of the column to place the rebar as shown. The library is located in the Rebar Shapes folder in the Imperial Library. For Spacing. 5 Click in the Rebar Shape Browser. and on the Options Bar. enter 0’ 3”. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Rebar Size. 8 On the Design Bar. scroll down the list of available shapes. Notice that the rebar shape changes as you select a different column edge. 6 Hover over the section view. 360 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . select Maximum Spacing.NOTE You can open or close the Rebar Shape Browser by clicking on the Options Bar.

12 Click on the Rebar Shape Browser. 17 On the Edit toolbar. and select Rebar Shape: 00. select Fixed Number. For Quantity. Set rebar spacing 14 Select the single rebar. enter 3. 15 On the Design Bar. Reinforcement in a Column | 361 . For Layout. scroll down the list of available shapes. Place rebar perpendicular to the column face 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 13 Click to place a single rebar as shown.10 On the Design Bar. as shown. and on the Options Bar. click Modify. select Rebar Bar: #8. click (Copy). do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Rebar Size. 18 Click the rebar centerline as the copy starting point. Copy the rebar 16 Select the rebar. click Modify. click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Perpendicular.

20 On the Design Bar. Set rebar visibility 21 Select the rebar in the detail view as shown. click Modify. 362 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling .19 Move the cursor to the opposite side of the column to select the copy end point as shown.

for 3D View. double-click 3D. click OK.22 On the Options Bar. and click OK. select both View unobscured and View as solid. View rebar in 3D 26 In the Project Browser. 29 On the Toolbar. click . under Graphics. under 3D Views. click . click Edit for View Visibility States. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. 27 On the View Control Bar. and draw a zoom box around the column as shown Reinforcement in a Column | 363 . 28 Click or drag the ViewCube to re-orient the view until the south side of the structure is visible. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. 24 In the Rebar Element View Visibility States dialog. select Detail Level: Fine.

or close the exercise file without saving changes. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. The next exercise uses a new training file. and open Imperial\i_RST_Area_Reinf_Wall. Area Reinforcement in a Structural Wall In this exercise.Notice that the rebar sets are visible. 364 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . click File menu ➤ Save As. you model area reinforcement in a structural wall. 31 Proceed to the next exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. To save changes. Area Reinforcement in a Structural Wall on page 364. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 30 Click File menu ➤ Close. click Training Files.

2 On the Toolbar. and draw a zoom box around the upper north wall of the structure.0" for Scale. and drag the controls to resize the view such that only the foundation wall is shown. click . Some of the rebar line weights were increased in the illustrations for training purposes.Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser. select 3/4" = 1' . NOTE The line weights in your file may differ from the examples shown. 5 Double-click the section bubble to open the section view. double-click Garage Level-1. Area Reinforcement in a Structural Wall | 365 . click Section. 4 Add a section line that cuts through the north wall of the structure as shown. under Structural Plans. 6 On the View Control Bar. 7 In the section view. select the crop view. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

Sketch the area reinforcement 8 Select the foundation wall. 366 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . double-click 3D. under 3D Views. 9 In the Project Browser.

The foundation wall will be highlighted as shown below. 12 On the Design Bar. and trace the outline of the foundation wall as shown. click (Sketch Area Reinforcement) to enter sketch mode. click Lines. 11 On the Options Bar.10 Use the ViewCube to rotate the model so the north side of the structure is visible. Area Reinforcement in a Structural Wall | 367 .

Minor bars will be placed perpendicular (inside position) to the major bars (outside position). on the Design Bar. under Sections (Building Sections). and select one of the horizontal lines of the outline. To change the major direction. click Finish Sketch.NOTE The 2 short lines adjacent to the vertical line of the outline represent the rebar major direction. click Major Direction Edge. Bars will be placed parallel to the major direction near both wall faces. and is indicated on the 3D view with an X as shown. 13 On the Design Bar. 368 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . adjacent to the major bars. double-click Section 3. The area reinforcement is automatically applied to the selected foundation wall. 14 In the Project Browser.

The area reinforcement for the foundation wall is displayed. Remove the major bars 15 Select the area reinforcement. Area Reinforcement in a Structural Wall | 369 .

under Layers. 370 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling .Notice the graphical controls to toggle the hook orientation appear at the base of the reinforcement. clear the values for Exterior Major Direction and Interior Major Direction. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. click . and click OK. 16 On the Options Bar.

and click OK. enter 30. for Value. Click OK. For Interior Minor Number of Lines. Reselect Interior Major Direction and Exterior Major Direction. enter 30. select Fixed Number. Change the number of rebar for the exterior and interior layers 18 In the Element Properties dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Exterior Major Number of Lines. For Exterior Minor Number of Lines. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. and that the minor bars move out to the clear cover setting for the wall. Area Reinforcement in a Structural Wall | 371 . enter 30. For Interior Major Number of Lines.Notice the rebar for the major span direction of the foundation wall is deleted from the section view. enter 30. under Layers. under Construction.

change all Bar Types to #4. click Modify. 26 Click the area reinforcement to place the tag.Notice that additional bars are added to the section view. 28 Using the drag control. move the area reinforcement tag approximately as shown. and click Zoom to Fit. 372 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . click Modify. click Add annotation 24 Right-click in an empty part of the drawing area. under Layers. and click OK. 27 On the Design Bar. 20 On the Design Bar. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. Change bar type 21 Select the Area Reinforcement. . click Tag ➤ By Category. 22 On the Options Bar. 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

To save changes. Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Area Reinforcement in a Slab In this exercise. NOTE The line weights in your file may differ from the examples shown.rvt. under Structural Plans. click File menu ➤ Save As. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 2 On the Toolbar. Area Reinforcement in a Slab | 373 . you model area reinforcement in a concrete slab. The next exercise uses a new training file. click Training Files. Area Reinforcement in a Slab on page 373. click . and open Imperial\i_RST_Area_Reinf_Slab. or close the exercise file without saving changes. Some of the rebar line weights were increased in the illustrations for training purposes. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 30 Proceed to the next exercise. double-click Garage Level-1.29 Click File menu ➤ Close. and draw a zoom box around the circular foundation on the north side of the structure as shown.

4 Add a section line that cuts through the circular foundation as shown. 5 Double-click the section head to open the section view. select 1/4" = 1' . select the crop view. 374 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . select Shading w/Edges. 6 On the View Control Bar.0". do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Scale. For Model Graphics Style. and drag the controls to resize the view such that only the concrete slab on Garage Level-1 is shown. 7 In the section view. click Section. For Detail Level. select Fine.3 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

11 Using the line tool. Area Reinforcement in a Slab | 375 . 9 Select the concrete slab as shown. double-click Garage Level -1. draw an area reinforcement box as shown. to enter sketch mode.Sketch the area reinforcement 8 In the Project Browser. click . 10 On the Options Bar. under Structural Plans.

376 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling .12 On the Design Bar. 13 In the Project Browser. under Sections (Building Sections). click Finish Sketch. double-click Section 4.

Notice the bars in the top major direction are deleted from the section view. 23 Select the rebar tag. 19 On the Design Bar. Notice the graphical controls to toggle the hook orientation appear at each end of the area reinforcement. clear Top Major Direction. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. under Layers. click Tag ➤ By Category. 21 Click the area reinforcement to place the tag. 22 On the Design Bar. Change the area reinforcement properties 14 Select the area reinforcement. Add annotation 20 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify. Change bar type 17 On the Options Bar. and click OK.The area reinforcement for the slab is displayed. 15 On the Options Bar. and click OK. click . click Modify. under Layers. select Attached End. move the rebar tag approximately as shown. click . Area Reinforcement in a Slab | 377 . change all Bar Types to #4. and on the Options Bar. 24 Using the drag control.

under Structural Plans. and draw a zoom box around the slab opening on the north side of the structure as shown. You are now in sketch mode. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Path Reinforcement in a Slab on page 378. Sketch the path reinforcement 1 In the Project Browser. and save the exercise file with a unique name.rvt. To save changes. 26 Proceed to the next exercise. double-click Level 3. click File menu ➤ Save As. and open Imperial\i_RST_Path_Reinf. The next exercise uses a new training file. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Path Reinforcement in a Slab In this exercise. you model path reinforcement in a concrete slab. 378 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . In the left pane of the Open dialog. click . or close the exercise file without saving changes. 2 On the Toolbar. click Training Files.25 Click File menu ➤ Close. click Rebar ➤ Sketch Path Reinforcement. 4 Select the slab opening.

The path reinforcement for the slab opening is displayed. Change bar type 9 Select the Path Reinforcement. click . Path Reinforcement in a Slab | 379 .5 On the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch. 6 Draw a path reinforcement box approximately as shown. and enter 1' 0" for Offset. 8 On the Design Bar. click Modify. NOTE The lines you sketch for the path reinforcement box cannot intersect and must not form a closed loop. 7 On the Design Bar.

select Fine. For Model Graphics Style. click Modify. click Section. 16 On the View Control Bar. click Create a section view . select the crop view. select Shading w/Edges. select 1/4" = 1' . select #4. 15 Double-click the section head to open the section view.0". 11 In the Element Properties dialog. under Layers. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Scale. and drag the controls to resize the view such that only the edge of the opening in the slab and the path reinforcement on Level 3 is shown. 17 In the section view. 12 On the View tab of the Design Bar. for Primary Bar . and click OK. 13 Add a section line that cuts through the slab opening as shown. 380 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling .10 On the Options Bar. 14 On the Design Bar.Type. For Detail Level.

20 Click the toggle control to change the rebar hook type as shown. click Modify. Path Reinforcement in a Slab | 381 . and draw a zoom box around the edge of the slab opening. 24 Select the rebar tag. 23 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. 25 Using the drag control. click 19 Select the rebar. select Free End. Some of the rebar line weights were increased in the illustrations for training purposes. click Tag ➤ By Category. Notice the toggle hook orientation icon appears. . move the rebar tag approximately as shown.NOTE The line weights in your file may differ from the examples shown. 22 Click the path reinforcement to place the tag. Change rebar properties 18 On the Toolbar. Add annotation 21 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Open section view 1 In the Project Browser. click structure. To save changes. and save the exercise file with a unique name. or close the exercise file without saving changes. . 2 On the Toolbar. draw a pick box. you use the tools provided with Revit Structure to sketch reinforcement in a concrete footing. under Structural Plans. NOTE The line weights in your file may differ from the examples shown. Some of the rebar line weights were increased in the illustrations for training purposes. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. click File menu ➤ Save As. and position the upper drag bar as shown. double-click Ground Level. The next exercise uses a new training file. and zoom in on the southwest corner of the 3 Click the section line. 382 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . Sketch Reinforcement in a Footing on page 382.26 Click File menu ➤ Close. and open Imperial\i_RST_Footing_Detail. Sketch Reinforcement in a Footing In this exercise.rvt. click Training Files.

click . 5 Double-click the section bubble. Sketch Reinforcement in a Footing | 383 . Add wall keys at the bottom of wall 6 On the Toolbar. and draw a zoom box around the wall footing as shown.4 Press ESC. The Section 1 view opens.

NOTE For training purposes. Model Graphics Style is set to Shading w/Edges (on the View Control Bar). 10 On the Design Bar. 7 On the Toolbar. click (Edit Cut Profile). 9 Select the boundary between the wall and footing. click (Draw). and click (Line). Sketch 3 lines as shown. select Boundary between faces. 384 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . select Chain. click Finish Sketch. 11 On the Design Bar. 8 On the Options Bar.

16 Press ESC. 21 Sketch a rebar by clicking inside the footing first and then moving the cursor into the wall as shown. Sketch rebar parallel to the footing and wall 18 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 19 On the Options Bar. click Sketch. 15 Sketch a straight bar by clicking inside the footing first and then moving the cursor to the right as shown. click Finish Sketch. 13 On the Options Bar. The Design Bar changes to sketch mode. 14 Select the continuous footing as the host element. 20 Select the continuous footing as the host element. Sketch Reinforcement in a Footing | 385 . 17 On the Sketch tab.Sketch rebar parallel to the footing 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Sketch. click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Parallel. click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Parallel.

NOTE Rebar only contributes to the estimated reinforcement volume of its host. 26 Click OK. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. 22 Press ESC.90 deg. select Standard . Add hook 24 Right-click the rebar you added in the previous steps. under Construction. click Finish Sketch. 386 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . This rebar will not be included in rebar estimates of the structural wall. and click Element Properties. for Hook At Start.NOTE Be sure to sketch from the footing to the wall. 23 On the Sketch tab.

Sketch Reinforcement in a Footing | 387 . select Rebar Bar: #8. and place the pointer between the hooked and straight bars approximately as shown. click wall.Mirror the rebar 27 On the Options Bar. Place rebar perpendicular 29 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. (Mirror). and select the center reference plane of the structural 28 Click to place the rebar. click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Perpendicular. 30 In the Type Selector. 31 Select the end of the straight bar.

click Modify. select Minimum Clear Spacing. 36 On the Options Bar. 35 Press the SPACEBAR to change the direction of rebar placement. 388 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling .Notice the footing cover settings display when placing the rebar. 32 Click to place the first rebar as shown. 37 Select the rebar set. For Spacing. 38 Drag the shape handles so the rebar set aligns with the end of the horizontal rebar as shown. enter 4". do the following: ■ ■ For Layout. 33 On the Design Bar. Place rebar set 34 Select the single rebar.

Set rebar cover by element 40 On the Toolbar. click 42 Select the footing. (Pick Elements). Notice the default rebar cover settings are displayed in the section view as dotted lines. click (Edit Rebar Cover).39 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Sketch Reinforcement in a Footing | 389 . 41 On the Options Bar.

. 44 On the Rebar Cover Settings dialog. Notice that the rebar cover has changed to the new setting.43 On the Options Bar. click ■ ■ ■ ■ (Edit Cover Settings). do the following: Click Add. enter Exposed/Cast against Earth. For Description. Click OK. For Setting. 47 Select the face of the structural wall. Set rebar cover by face 45 On the Toolbar. (Pick Faces). 390 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . click 46 On the Options Bar. enter 0' 2".

click Dimension. select Exposed/Cast against Earth.48 On the Options Bar. 52 Move the cursor over the first rebar in the footing array as shown. Check rebar clear spacing 51 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Click OK. 49 On the Rebar Cover Settings dialog. do the following: Under Description. Notice the rebar cover has changed to the new setting. Sketch Reinforcement in a Footing | 391 . click ■ ■ . 50 Repeat the same process to set the rebar cover on the opposite face of the structural wall.

NOTE The dimension is placed to check the clear space distance from the concrete face to the rebar array. Delete the dimension after verifying the clearance requirements have been met. and move the cursor to the edge of the footing as shown. click File menu ➤ Save As. 53 Click to select this plane. 54 Click to select this plane and place the dimension. The next exercise uses a new training file. or close the exercise file without saving changes. 392 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . Sketch Reinforcement in a Structural Wall on page 393. 56 Proceed to the next exercise. To save changes.The vertical snapping plane of the bar is highlighted. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 55 Click File menu ➤ Close.

move the cursor down. double-click Garage Level . 6 Click the section line. under Structural Plans. 4 Click inside the wall between grid lines B and C. draw a pick box. In the left pane of the Open dialog.1.rvt. click Training Files. Create section view 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the Toolbar. click Modify. and zoom in on the southwest corner of the 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and position the drag bar as shown.Sketch Reinforcement in a Structural Wall In this exercise. click structure. and click the outside wall to place the section as shown. and open Imperial\i_RST_Wall_Detail. Some of the rebar line weights were increased in the illustrations for training purposes. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you use the tools provided with Revit Structure to sketch reinforcement in a structural wall. Sketch Reinforcement in a Structural Wall | 393 . click Section. NOTE The line weights in your file may differ from the examples shown. 5 On the Design Bar. .

7 Press ESC. The Section 2 view opens. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. Click Detail Level ➤ Fine. 8 Double-click the section bubble. and select 3/4" = 1'. 10 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ ■ Click Scale control.0". 9 In the section view. select the crop view. and drag the controls to resize the view such that only the foundation wall is shown. 394 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling .

12 In the Type Selector. 14 On the Design Bar. Place rebar set 15 Select the single rebar. 13 Place the rebar at the base of the wall approximately as shown. until a vertical line appears indicating the direction of placement.NOTE For training purposes. do the following: ■ For Layout. click Modify. the graphics style is used to display detail in the section view. Sketch Reinforcement in a Structural Wall | 395 . 17 On the Options Bar. select Rebar Bar : #7. 16 Press the SPACEBAR. Place horizontal rebar 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. as shown. select Maximum Spacing. click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Perpendicular.

and drag the rebar shape handle down to Garage Level . and zoom in on the Ground Level of the structure. 23 Move the cursor to the right until the center line reference plane of the wall appears as shown. 396 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . enter 1' 6". 19 Select the rebar set. click Modify.1. 22 On the Edit toolbar. The quantity of rebar adjusts to the extents of the structural wall on the garage level. draw a zoom box. click (Mirror). click . Resize the rebar set 18 On the Toolbar.■ For Spacing. Mirror the rebar set 21 Select the rebar set. 20 On the Design Bar.

28 On the Options Bar. 29 Select the concrete wall as the rebar host. click . 27 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and draw a zoom box around the lower half of the wall. Sketch Reinforcement in a Structural Wall | 397 . 26 On the Toolbar.24 Click to place the rebar. Place vertical rebar 25 Right-click in an empty part of the drawing area. and click Zoom to Fit. click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Parallel. click Sketch.

33 Press ESC. 37 Move the cursor over the wall until the center line reference plane appears. 32 Click to place the rebar. 398 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling .1. 30 Click the base of the structural wall to establish the sketch start point.You are now in sketch mode. Mirror the rebar 35 Click the vertical rebar. Notice the cursor snaps to the rebar cover. 34 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. 31 Drag the sketch line up towards the top of the wall at Garage Level . click . 36 On the Edit toolbar.

Sketch Reinforcement in a Structural Wall | 399 . Set rebar visibility 39 Select the outside vertical rebar as shown.38 Click to place the rebar.

and select the outside horizontal rebar as shown. 400 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling .40 Press CTRL.

under 3D Views. click . Sketch Reinforcement in a Structural Wall | 401 . click Edit for View Visibility States. double-click 3D. click OK. 43 In the Rebar Element View Visibility States dialog. 46 Click or drag the ViewCube to re-orient the view until the garage ramp side of the structure is visible. under Graphics. and click OK. for 3D View. select View unobscured and View as solid. 42 In the Element Properties dialog. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. 45 In the Project Browser.41 On the Options Bar.

50 Proceed to the next tutorial. Notice the rebar is visible. Extend the vertical rebar for the garage wall 48 Select the single rebar. click File menu ➤ Save As. do the following: ■ ■ For Layout. select Maximum Spacing. or close the exercise file without saving changes. and on the Options Bar. enter 1' 6". 402 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . Annotating and Dimensioning on page 403. To save changes. For Spacing. and save the exercise file with a unique name. and draw a zoom box around the garage ramp. The rebar automatically extends the entire length of the garage wall. 49 Click File menu ➤ Close.47 On the Toolbar. click .

dimensions are aligned and snap to wall centerlines. click Dimension. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. The default dimensioning options display on the Options Bar. baseline. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. radial. Creating Dimensions In this exercise. and double-click Floor. click Training Files. angular. Temporary dimensions display automatically when you create and insert components and select existing components. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. By default. 4 When the centerline of the wall highlights. you learn how to annotate and dimension your Revit Structure 2009 projects. linear. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The dimension types include aligned. Dimensioning In this lesson. move the cursor over the north wall of the proposed North Building.Annotating and Dimensioning 11 In this tutorial. you learn how to create and modify different types of permanent dimensions that you can add to your drawings. there are 2 types of dimensions: temporary and permanent. select it. 403 . and ordinate. and open Imperial\i_RST_Dimensioning. 3 Without making any changes on the Options Bar. Permanent dimensions must be explicitly created. In Revit Structure.rvt. multi-segmented. Create permanent dimensions 1 In the Project Browser. you learn how to create permanent dimensions to control and document your designs.

and click to place the dimension. toward the empty space outside the wall.5 Move the cursor toward the south wall and when the centerline of the wall highlights. 404 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . select it. 6 Move the cursor to the left.

indicating that the dimension can be modified. and press DELETE. 14 Select the north and south walls of the North Building. 9 Select the north wall and move it upward. 11 Select the dimension. 16 Select the exterior faces of the top and bottom walls of the South Building. (Undo).The dimension displays in the drawing. select Wall centerlines for Prefer. click Create a multi-segmented dimension 12 On the Design Bar. 15 On the Options Bar. 13 On the Options Bar. The lock displays as locked. Creating Dimensions | 405 . and the distance between them does not change because the dimension is constrained. and click to set the dimension location. 10 On the Toolbar. Notice that the south wall moves with the north wall. indicating that you cannot change the distance between the referenced walls without first unlocking the dimension. click Dimension. click Modify. 17 Move the cursor to the left of the South Building. 8 On the Design Bar. click the lock to unlock it. A lock symbol that is unlocked displays next to it. select Wall faces for Prefer. 7 Click the lock.

Create a radial dimension 18 On the Design Bar. an equal symbol with a slash through it is displayed. and select Wall centerlines for Prefer. Move the cursor to the inside of the curved wall. 19 On the Options Bar.An unlocked lock symbol displays next to each dimension segment. indicating that the dimension segments are not equal in length. and draw a zoom box around the curved wall. 406 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . 20 Dimension a curved wall of the North Building: Select the southwest corner wall to display the radial dimension. and click to place the dimension. click Dimension. click ■ ■ (Create Radial Dimensions). 21 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. In addition.

■ (Create Angular Dimensions). click for Prefer. and place the dimension as shown. 26 Adjust the zoom settings so that you can add a dimension to the upper-left portion of the North Building. the default dimension option. Select the inside face of the wall. as shown. and verify that Wall faces is selected 28 Dimension the angled wall at the top left of the North Building: Select the inside face of the angled wall below the opening. ■ Creating Dimensions | 407 . 23 On the Design Bar.The dimension is snapped to the wall centerline. 22 On the Design Bar. click ■ ■ . 25 Dimension the curved wall again: Move your cursor over the inside face of the wall until it highlights. select the dimension line of the radial dimension. and click to place the dimension. click Modify. and select Wall faces for Prefer. and then select the inside face of the vertical wall below it. and press DELETE. 24 On the Options Bar. Create an angular dimension 27 On the Options Bar. Move your cursor to the right to size the dimension arc. click Dimension.

and zoom in on the footings located just outside the exterior wall of the south building as shown. 34 On the Options Bar. 408 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . 35 In the Element Properties dialog. do the following: ■ ■ Under Graphics. and depends on the cursor tracking behavior. Move your cursor to the right. Select the interior corner of the bottom left wall join of the room. 30 Dimension interior walls in the South Building: ■ In the top room on the left side of the building. 38 Select the reference line for grid 1 to start the dimension string as shown. and OK. and click to place the dimension. 37 In the Element Properties dialog. ■ ■ 31 On the Design Bar. Notice that the Prefer and Pick options are no longer available on the Options Bar. click OK. The linear dimension tool has a more restricted selection filter so that you can select only points. . Click Apply.Create a linear dimension 29 On the Options Bar. click Modify. click Edit/New. click Dimension. 36 In the Type Properties dialog. Create a baseline dimension 32 On the Toolbar. click . 33 On the Design Bar. select Baseline. You can override the cursor tracking by pressing the SPACEBAR. click (Create Horizontal or Vertical Dimensions). select a point at the interior corner of the top left wall join. click . for Dimension String Type. The dimension is always constrained to either the horizontal or vertical axis.

Creating Dimensions | 409 .39 Select the reference line for grids 2 and 3 as shown. and OK. click Modify. for Dimension String Type. 43 On the Options Bar. click OK. 40 Select the reference lines for grids 4 and 5 to place the remaining dimensions as shown. 41 On the Design Bar. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. select Ordinate. Create an ordinate dimension 42 Select the baseline dimensions placed in the previous steps. 45 In the Type Properties dialog. 46 In the Element Properties dialog. Click Apply. . click . do the following: ■ ■ Under Graphics. Notice the multiple dimensions display the distance from the same baseline (grid 1). click Edit/New.

D. and enter S.A. 410 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . 49 Click the dimension text placed in the last step.A.M. do the following: ■ ■ For Below. (See Architectural Drawing).F. 51 On the Design Bar. to each additional element (grids 2 through 5).I. 48 In the Dimension Text dialog. under Text Fields. Controlling Witness Line Location on page 411. 53 Proceed to the next exercise. 50 In the Dimension Text dialog. 52 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Notice the new text appears below the supplemental text. click Replace with Text. and save the model to a location of your choice using the following file name: i_RST_Dimensioning-in progress. Add supplemental text to a permanent dimension 47 Click the value for the ordinate dimension at grid 2. Notice the dimension value is replaced with the new text S.rvt. click Modify.6" Click Apply and OK. Click Apply and OK. +/. do the following: ■ ■ Under Dimension value.Notice the perpendicular dimensions display the distance from the origin point or datum (grid 1). enter V.

select it.Controlling Witness Line Location In this exercise. 10 Move the cursor to the south wall of the South Building. 5 Alternate the cursor position over the inner and outer wall face. i_RST_Dimensioning-in progress. and press TAB repeatedly. 7 When the exterior face of the wall highlights. but do not select anything. click Dimension. 4 Move the cursor over the north wall of the North Building. Notice that only the wall faces highlight when you move the cursor over them. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.rvt Override dimension defaults 1 Delete the multi-segmented vertical dimension that you placed along the left side of the building model in the previous exercise. press TAB until the wall centerline highlights. For example. Each time you press TAB. and change the origin of dimension witness lines. you specify their origin on the Options Bar. and select the exterior face. including the wall centerline. 8 Move the cursor over the south wall of the North Building. However. 3 On the Options Bar. you may want to locate the 2 outermost witness lines on the exterior face of each wall. you learn to add. When you place dimensions. and select it. delete. 9 Move the cursor to the top horizontal wall of the South Building. you may need to override their settings on an instance basis. because the Prefer wall faces option is selected instead of the Prefer wall centerline option. and select the exterior face. verify that Wall faces is selected for Prefer. Controlling Witness Line Location | 411 . 6 Position the cursor over the wall. whereas the witness lines referring to interior walls would be located on the centerline of each wall. 11 Place the dimension as shown. a different wall selection choice highlights. for a multi-segmented dimension. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. in some cases.

and control boxes display on each witness line. 412 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning .Edit dimension witness lines 12 On the Design Bar. 13 Select the dimension that you just placed. The dimension highlights. click Modify.

17 Right-click the control box. The witness line is deleted. but do not select it. 15 Click the control box again. 16 Move the cursor to the control box on the witness line that references the north wall of the South Building. The witness line moves to interior wall face. and click Delete Witness Line. Controlling Witness Line Location | 413 .14 Click twice on the control box on the witness line that references the south wall of the North Building. The witness line moves to the wall centerline.

3 In the Element Properties dialog. and select the multi-segmented dimension that you modified in the previous exercise. 19 Select the outside face of the north wall of the South Building. 2 On the Options Bar.18 Right-click the dimension line that references the face of the south wall of the North Building. Change the type parameters of the floor plan dimensions 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click Edit Witness Lines. 20 To end the editing command. IMPORTANT Be careful to right-click the witness line and not the control box on the witness line. i_RST_Dimensioning-in progress.rvt. The full dimension string is displayed. a context menu with different options is displayed. 414 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . click . you learn to modify the type parameters of dimensions. click Modify. click Edit/New. 22 Proceed to the next exercise. If you right-click the control box. click in the drawing area away from the floor plan. 21 Click File menu ➤ Save. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Modifying Dimension Properties In this exercise. Modifying Dimension Properties on page 414.

You can save the open file if you wish. then Up for Read Convention.rvt. you learn to align components and lock their alignment to better work with them in your drawings. As you create components. if 2 or more walls are colinear. 7 Click File menu ➤ Close. Aligning components is similar to dimensioning components with a value of zero. and open Imperial\i_RST_Alignment. select Right. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. a new training file is provided. click Training Files. not the direction it is read. Working with Alignments and Constraints | 415 . 6 On the Design Bar. 5 Click OK twice.4 In the Type Properties dialog. click Modify. Working with Alignments and Constraints on page 415. Under Text. The dimension updates as shown. enter 3/16" for the Text Size. Working with Alignments and Constraints In this exercise. In the next exercise. allowing you to lock the alignment of the walls. alignments can be made and locked with minimal effort. a lock symbol immediately displays. In the left pane of the Open dialog. This controls which side (of the dimensioning arrow) the text is on. change the following type parameter values: ■ ■ Under Text. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. For example. when sketching walls. A locked alignment is a constraint that is maintained if any of the aligned components are moved or modified.

The shorter horizontal wall on the left moves to align with the upper horizontal wall.Align the 2 uppermost horizontal walls in the floor plan 1 On the Toolbar. Align the 3 short horizontal walls 4 On the Options Bar. 3 Click the lock. the first component that you select is the target and remains fixed in position. 416 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . When you align 2 components. 2 Align the walls: ■ ■ Select the exterior face of the uppermost horizontal wall. indicating that the Align command is active. and select Wall centerlines for Prefer. Select the exterior face of the shorter horizontal wall on the left. 6 Select the short wall to the left. select Multiple Alignment. indicating that the alignment of the 2 walls is now locked. while the second component moves to complete the alignment. indicating the 2 walls are not constrained to each other. The cursor displays 2 arrows at its tip. 5 Select the lower center wall to define it as the target fixed wall to which the other walls will align. click (Align). The lock symbol displays as unlocked. The symbol changes to a closed lock.

The wall on the left moves with the middle wall when you drag it. Working with Alignments and Constraints | 417 . 12 Click the right wall. 11 On the Toolbar. click (Undo) once to undo the move.7 Click the lock to lock the alignment of the walls. and then click the lock to align the wall with the middle wall. click Modify. Do not lock this segment of the alignment. 10 Select the middle horizontal wall. and drag it downward. but the wall on the right does not because the alignment between the 2 walls is not constrained (locked). 9 On the Design Bar. 8 Select the short horizontal wall on the right.

14 On the Options Bar. 16 Select the window on the far left in the lower wall.Move the walls to verify the alignment. 15 Select the window in the upper horizontal wall on the left side of the floor plan. clear Multiple Alignment. Align the windows on the floor plan 13 On the Toolbar. 418 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . click (Align).

click . 19 To view the constraint.The 2 windows align. 20 Click the lock to unlock it. indicating the constraint. and align the windows. on the Design Bar. 21 On the Toolbar. A lock is displayed. Working with Alignments and Constraints | 419 . as shown. 22 Align the remaining windows. and select the dimension between the second window and the right wall. 17 Select the far right window in the bottom wall. The second window does not align because it is already constrained by a locked dimension. 18 Select the far right window in the top wall. click Modify.

instead of selecting the wall and all the openings as dimension references.rvt. 24 Proceed to the next exercise. 420 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Creating Automatic Linear Wall Dimensions on page 420. Creating Automatic Linear Wall Dimensions In this exercise. you learn how to automatically dimension a linear wall with openings (windows) by selecting the wall. You want to dimension the wall so that the width of each opening displays in the dimension string. and notice that it includes 5 openings. 1 View the south wall.rvt.23 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and save the model to a location of your choice using the following file name: i_RST_Alignment-in progress. i_RST_Alignment-in progress.

the windows). select Entire Walls. select Openings and Widths. 9 Click File menu ➤ Close. These options ensure that the wall dimension includes the openings (in this case. For Pick. Working with Spot Dimensions In this exercise. 4 In the Auto Dimension Options dialog. a new training file is provided. In the next exercise. For Prefer. and that the window widths are referenced in the overall dimension string. 6 Select the south wall. You can save the open file if you wish. 10 Proceed to the next exercise.2 On the Design Bar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. click (Create Aligned Dimensions). Working with Spot Dimensions | 421 . and click to add the dimension. click Dimension. 3 On the Options Bar. you learn how to use the spot dimension feature of Revit Structure. verify that Wall centerlines is selected. Click Options. 5 Click OK. click Modify. The 2 vertical walls highlight. Working with Spot Dimensions on page 421. 8 On the Design Bar. indicating the start and end of the dimension string. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 7 Move your cursor below the south wall.

4 In the Type Selector. Click the center of the tapered insulation to create the first leader point as shown. and double-click New Roof. expand Structural Plans. click Spot Dimension ➤ Spot Elevation. 2 On the Options Bar. 422 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . select Current Level. Click to place the spot dimension. select Leader. and draw a zoom box around the upper view as shown. 5 On the Options Bar. click . Move the cursor to the left. Notice that the value of the spot elevation is displayed as the cursor is moved. and open Imperial\i_RST_Spot_Dimensions_Tapered_Roof. and for Relative Base. click Training Files. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor up and to the left. 6 Place the spot dimension as follows: ■ Move the cursor along the edge of the tapered roof. Click to create the second leader point. select Spot Elevations: No Symbol (Relative).■ In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Add spot dimensions to the tapered roof 1 In the Project Browser.

Working with Spot Dimensions | 423 . Move the cursor to the right. select Current Level. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor up and to the right. click Modify. Click to create the second leader point. 9 In the Type Selector. click 8 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 11 Place the spot dimension as follows: ■ Click the corner of the slab (grid location A1) to create the first leader point as shown. select Spot Elevations: No Symbol (Relative). Drag the leader to the right to place the dimension. select Leader. . 7 On the Options Bar. and draw a zoom box around the structural columns as shown. and for Relative Base. 10 On the Options Bar. click Spot Dimension ➤ Spot Elevation.■ On the Design Bar. Click to place the spot dimension.

Move the cursor up and to the right. 13 On the Options Bar. and Current Level for Relative Base.■ On the Design Bar. and draw a zoom box around a footing as shown. select Spot Elevations: No Symbol (Relative). and double-click Foundation. 17 Place the spot elevation as follows: ■ ■ ■ Click the upper-right corner of the footing. 15 In the Type Selector. expand Structural Plans. click Modify. click Spot Dimension ➤ Spot Elevation. 424 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . Click to create the second leader point. select Leader. Add a spot dimension to the footing 12 In the Project Browser. 16 On the Options Bar. click . 14 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

■ ■ Move the cursor to the right. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. click ■ . click Modify. for Single/Upper Value Prefix. 19 On the Options Bar. Click to create the third leader point. click Modify. 21 On the Design Bar. Working with Spot Dimensions | 425 . Notice that the elevation at the top of the footing is displayed. Change the spot dimension properties 18 Select the spot dimension. ■ On the Design Bar. do the following: Under Text. ■ Click OK. enter TOF=.

under Text. click . Notice that the value of the spot coordinate displays as the cursor moves. and then OK. 23 On the Options Bar. select In-line with Leader. ■ 426 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . click Spot Dimension ➤ Spot Coordinate. click Modify. and double-click South Elevation. Click the center of the sloped beam to create the first leader point as shown. 30 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 25 In the Type Properties dialog. 27 On the Design Bar. 26 In the Element Properties dialog. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. Add spot coordinates to a sloped beam 28 In the Project Browser. expand Elevations (Building Elevation).Change the text orientation 22 Select the spot dimension. For Text Location. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Bold. Click Apply. select Medium. click Edit/New. 29 On the View Control Bar. click OK. 31 Place the spot coordinate as follows: ■ Move the cursor along the edge of the sloped beam. for Detail Level.

click Edit/New. Click to create the second leader point. Working with Spot Dimensions | 427 . click . Click Apply. enter EL. 37 On the Design Bar. under Text. Change the spot coordinate orientation 32 Select the spot coordinate. 33 On the Options Bar. and then OK. For Text Location. On the Design Bar. Click to place the spot coordinate. click OK.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor up and to the right. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Bold. select In-line with Leader. 36 In the Element Properties dialog. Move the cursor to the right. For Elevation Indicator. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify. click Modify. Notice that the elevation indicator displays below the existing coordinates. 35 In the Type Properties dialog.

Annotating In this lesson. You learn how to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Tag beams in a plan view Tag a beam system Tag beams by category Create a custom type mark in place of the beam tag Create a custom beam tag. You also learn how to create a custom mark in place of an existing beam tag. and open Imperial\i_RST_Annotations. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. In the next lesson. You can save the open file if you wish. click Training Files. you learn how to use some of the annotation features included in Revit Structure. a new training file is provided. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Tagging Beams In this exercise.rvt. and double-click Level 2.38 Click File menu ➤ Close. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 428 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . 39 Proceed to the next lesson. and add an end reaction annotation to specific beams in the structure. Tag all beams in plan view 1 In the Project Browser. Annotating on page 428. you learn how to use the beam annotation tool to tag all beams in a plan view. click Beam Annotations. expand Structural Plans.

6 In the Beam Annotations dialog. select All beams in current plan view.The Beam Annotations dialog opens. and click OK. Notice that a beam tag has been added to the top-middle location on all beams within the plan view. do the following: ■ ■ Under Placement. In the Placement Settings dialog. Click OK. for Horizontal End Offset. click Beam Annotations. 3 In the Beam Annotations dialog. select All selected beams in current plan view. ■ ■ Tagging Beams | 429 . Add an end-reaction value to specific beams 4 Select multiple beams located inside one of the bays as shown. Click Settings. do the following: ■ Under Placement. the tags that were placed in the previous steps have been removed from this view. 5 On the Design Bar. NOTE For training purposes. and click Remove existing beam tags and spot elevations. enter 1".

to specify the top-end annotation type as shown. and click OK. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. click . click Structural Framing Tag. 430 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . Enter the reaction force 7 On the Options Bar. click the Level beams in plan tab. Click . under Select Element to Place. ■ Under Annotation location and type.0 kip for End Reaction .This dimension sets the annotation offset distance measured from the beam start location as indicated in the dialog. ■ ■ In the Beam Annotations dialog. select Structural Framing Tag-w-End Reactions : Standard. and click OK. click OK.Live. ■ ■ In the Select Annotation Type dialog. The end reaction value is added to the selected beams. enter 10. Under Structural Framing Tag. under Analysis Results.

Tagging Beams | 431 . Create a custom type mark tag 10 Enter ZF (Zoom to Fit). click Edit/New. 12 Draw a zoom box that surrounds the upper beams between grids C and D as shown. and on the Options Bar. click 14 In the Element Properties dialog. 11 Right-click the open area above the model. click Modify. enter W18.9 On the Design Bar. click OK. . 19 In the Type Properties dialog. 15 In the Type Properties dialog. click Apply. and then OK. and on the Options Bar. click Edit/New. 13 Click one of the W18X40 beams. enter W14. click 18 In the Element Properties dialog. click Apply. under Type Mark. under Type Mark. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. and then OK. 17 Click one of the W14X22 beams. . and click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region.

click . select the W14X22 beam tag. click the W18X40 beam tag. select Structural Framing Tag . (Add 25 In the Element Properties dialog. The new beam tag is applied to the selected beams. Click Save. and on the Options Bar. for Value. 432 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . and click OK. select the active file. Edit the beam tag family 21 Click one of the W18X40 beam tags. and on the Options bar. under Category Parameters. click parameter(s) to a label). click Edit. while pressing CTRL. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save As. under Label. click Yes. Enter Structural Framing Tag . You are now in the Family Editor. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. and. select Type Mark. 29 In the Load into Projects dialog.by Type Mark: Standard.20 In the Element Properties dialog. 24 In the Edit Label dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select a folder location. click OK.by Type Mark for File name. 28 On the Family Design Bar. click OK. and click OK. click Edit Family. click Load into Projects. When prompted to open the Structural Framing Tag for editing. Apply the new type mark tag to all beams 30 In the plan view. 22 Click the structural label. 31 In the Type Selector. 27 In the Save As dialog.

34 In the Filter dialog. click ■ ■ (Filter).32 Enter ZF. Tagging Beams | 433 . Select Structural Framing Tags. and draw a pick box around the entire model as shown. 33 On the Options bar. do the following: Click Check None to clear all items.

35 In the Type Selector. 36 To save your changes. and draw a zoom box around the beam system as shown. Tag the beam system 37 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click File menu ➤ Save As. The new beam tag is applied to all beams. or close the exercise file without saving your changes. select Structural Framing Tag .by Type Mark: Standard.■ Click OK. 434 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning .

You are now in the Family Editor. and open Imperial\i_RST_Custom_beam_tag. you learn how to create a custom beam tag that includes multiple categories and then apply the tag to different beam types. click Beam System Tag. click Edit Label. Move the cursor over the beams in the drawing area. Creating a Custom Beam Tag on page 435. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and notice the tag for the specific beam system displays. You can save the open file if you wish. click Training Files. 41 Proceed to the next exercise. expand Structural Plans. Creating a Custom Beam Tag | 435 . Open the beam tag family 1 In the Project Browser.NOTE For training purposes.rvt. the existing beam tags have been removed for the following steps. 38 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 2 Click one of the W14X22 beam tags. 39 Click any beam within the beam system to place the tag. click Edit Family. In the next exercise a new training file is provided. When prompted to open the Structural Framing Tag for editing. and double-click Level 2. click Yes. and on the Options Bar. and on the Options Bar. Creating a Custom Beam Tag In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Click the structural label. 40 Click File ➤ Close.

for Vertical Align. and for Suffix. Select parameter 3. click OK. select Reference Planes. and click OK. Select parameter 2. for Prefix. for Prefix. add the following categories: ■ Under Category Parameters. (Add parameter). select Camber Size. Align the beam tag 7 Click the drag control for the label until the text is positioned on two lines as shown. select Top. click . Under Visibility. enter W14X22. enter C=1/2". add the following Label Parameters: ■ ■ Select parameter 1.Add multiple categories to the beam label 4 In the Edit Label dialog. enter ) (right parenthesis). ■ 5 In the Edit Label dialog. . enter [ (open bracket). Under Category Parameters. enter ( (left parenthesis). select 3. for Sample Value. for Sample Value. 11 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 436 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . ■ 6 In the Edit Label dialog. and for Suffix. for Spaces. for Sample Value. 8 On the Options Bar. and click The new category is added to the label as parameter 2. select Number of studs. and click The new category is added to the label as parameter 3. under Graphics. enter ] (close bracket). and select Break. enter S1. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. 10 Press VV (Visibility/Graphic Overrides). do the following: ■ ■ Click the Annotation Categories tab.

and click Yes. Creating a Custom Beam Tag | 437 . and the camber size for each beam type in the structure. Notice that each beam tag now specifies a different camber setting based on the beam type. 12 Select the text on the beam label.■ Click OK. expand Structural Plans. View the framing schedule 16 In the Project Browser. In the Reload Family dialog. 15 On the Design Bar. 14 Click Modify. expand Schedules/Quantities. View the properties for beam type S2 17 In the Project Browser. and double-click Level 2. click Load into Project. 13 Press the UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW to move the text until the beam type is positioned just below the horizontal reference plane as shown. and double-click Structural Framing Schedule. Notice the Structural Framing Schedule includes the number of studs parameter. click Override parameter values of existing types.

20 In the Element Properties dialog. 438 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . do the following: Under Structural.18 Click one of the W18x40 beams. Worksets on page 439. Click OK. click ■ . and save the completed project in a folder location of your preference. 22 Proceed to the next tutorial. 19 On the Options Bar. notice that the Camber Size value reflects the parameters entered in the framing schedule. ■ 21 Click File ➤ Save As.

You subdivide the project into worksets and save the project as the central file. All other team members can view this workset. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Using Worksharing in a Project In this lesson. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing. They can also update their local files at any time in order to see the changes other team members have published. and to have all the elements coordinated by Revit Structure. you enable Worksharing within an existing project. You then learn how to work within a Worksharing-enabled project with multiple users and how to borrow particular elements from other users. In the next exercise. to allow visibility control and ownership for each assigned element. you learn how to use Worksharing to divide a project into worksets so multiple users can access the project. this collection of building elements (such as roofs. Only one user can edit each workset at a given time. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you can borrow that element without requiring the workset owner to relinquish control of the entire workset. beams. team members adding and changing elements in worksets can save their work to a local file on the network to their own hard drive. however. Enable Worksharing 1 Click File menu ➤ Worksets. Using Worksharing. In this tutorial. and open Imperial\i_RST_Worksets. This includes how to plan and execute the use of worksets in a project in order to maximize project and team performance. This prevents possible conflicts within the project. This involves simultaneously working on and saving different portions of the project. etc.) is called a workset. If you need to modify an element that belongs to a workset that someone else is actively working on.Worksets 12 On many building projects. In Revit Structure 2009. You begin by enabling Worksharing within a project and setting up the initial workset environment. they cannot make changes to it. click Training Files. slabs. 439 . engineers commonly work in teams with each person assigned to a specific functional task. you learn how to work as an individual with the central and local project files.rvt. and they can publish work to a central file whenever they choose. You can enable Worksharing for any project.

For training purposes. You cannot change your user name with an unsaved Worksharing-enabled project open. click New. Therefore. imagine 5 users including yourself. The Worksets dialog is displayed. 5 Under Show. For training purposes.2 Click OK to accept the default workset names. do the following: ■ ■ For new workset name. a fifth is assigned to the elevator shafts. and all team members must have access to all linked or imported DWG or RVT files. a second user is assigned the roof. the user name was changed in the Options dialog (accessible from the Settings menu). 7 In the New Workset dialog. a fourth is assigned the foundation and garage ramp. enter Beams and Columns. 3 In the Worksets dialog. The project is subdivided in such a way as to reflect the tasks of each user. Only User-Created worksets should display. one team member is assigned to the slabs. under Show. you must create worksets that allow each team member to work independently. Project Standards. In this simple training project. select: ■ ■ ■ Families Project Standards Views 4 Scroll down the list of workset names. Creating new worksets 6 In the Worksets dialog. Verify that Visible by default in all views is selected. and Views. a small number of team members are working on the structural model. TIP The initial owner name is assigned by the operating system of your computer. In this case. and notice all are editable by you. clear Families. and User1 is displayed as the present owner. a third is assigned all beams and columns. Notice that all worksets are open and editable by you. 440 | Chapter 12 Worksets .

Click OK. The foundation should only be visible in specific views. 9 In the New Workset dialog. 10 In the Worksets dialog. 13 In the New Workset dialog. ■ 12 In the Worksets dialog. click New.■ Click OK. This improves performance because fewer components need to be generated in each view. 11 In the New Workset dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For new workset name. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For new workset name. do the following: ■ ■ For new workset name. Click OK. enter Slabs. Verify that Visible by default in all views is selected. click New. click New. Click OK. Clear Visible by default in all views. 8 In the Worksets dialog. Verify that Visible by default in all views is selected. enter Foundation. enter Elevator Shafts. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 441 .

17 In the New Workset dialog. this improves performance. The roof should only be visible in specific views. enter Linked or imported DWG or RVT files. enter Garage Ramp. this improves performance. Clear Visible by default in all views. do the following: ■ ■ For new workset name. 15 In the New Workset dialog. Again. Again. ■ 16 In the Worksets dialog. The garage ramp should only be visible in specific views. ■ 18 In the Worksets dialog. Verify that Visible by default in all views is selected. click New. 19 In the New Workset dialog. 442 | Chapter 12 Worksets . click New. enter Roof. Click OK.14 In the Worksets dialog. click New. Clear Visible by default in all views. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For new workset name. Click OK. Click OK. do the following: ■ ■ For new workset name.

NOTE Continue using the central file for the following steps. This is imperative if you and another user intend to complete the multi-user exercise later in this tutorial. 20 In the Worksets dialog. 27 On the right side of the dialog. you must relinquish workset editability so that other users can have access to the worksets they need. click OK Create the central file 21 Click File menu ➤ Save As.You have created the required worksets for each team member working on this project. The next step is to create the central file. The central file is created automatically the first time you save the project after enabling worksets. enter Worksets Project . under Show. Now that you have created the central file.Central. Navigate to a location on a network drive that all team members have access to. select: ■ ■ ■ ■ User-Created Families Project Standards Views 26 Select all the worksets by pressing CTRL+A. for file name. 25 In the Worksets dialog. 22 In the Save As dialog. this can be accomplished by saving the central file to your hard drive and changing your user name before accessing the project. 23 Click Save. If you do not have access to a network and still want to complete that exercise. click Non Editable. but be sure not to save the file in the training files location. Check in the worksets 24 Click File menu ➤ Worksets. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 443 .

36 Enter Worksets Project_Local-User 1 for File name. under Comments. 30 In the Save to Central dialog. navigate to a folder on your local computer. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. 444 | Chapter 12 Worksets . 29 Click File menu ➤ Save to Central. and click Save. Assigning Worksets on page 445. notice that your name has been removed as the owner of the worksets and also notice that all worksets are not available for editing. and click Open. click File menu ➤ Close. Navigate to the location of the central file Worksets Project . click OK. and click OK. 34 Click File menu ➤ Save As.Central on the network drive.In the Worksets dialog. enter Initial Central File Setup. 28 In the Worksets dialog. 33 Select the file. Create a local file 32 Click File menu ➤ Open. 35 In the Save As dialog. 31 After the file is saved.

checked in all worksets.In this exercise. 4 On the Options Bar. for Workset. Assigning Worksets In this exercise. Assigning Worksets | 445 . 7 Click the highlighted column to deselect it. and created a local file. 2 Click Cancel. 8 Click File menu ➤ Worksets. you assign the structural columns workset to User1. 6 Click OK. you enabled Worksharing on a project. notice that all worksets are available for editing. You then created the central file. In the Worksets dialog. select Beams and Columns. NOTE Continue using the local file Worksets Project_Local-User 1 for the following exercise. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. This project is now ready for individuals to access it and check out their required worksets. and created new worksets to accommodate each team member. click . 3 Click one of the structural columns as shown. 1 Click File menu ➤ Worksets.

12 In the Filter dialog. 9 Click Cancel. click Check None.The Worksets dialog. click . 446 | Chapter 12 Worksets . notice that User1 is listed. and click OK. Assign the structural columns 10 Draw a pick box around the entire model to select all elements. 13 Select Structural Columns. 11 On the Options Bar. under Borrowers for Workset1.

and click Make Elements Editable. click . 15 On the Options Bar. and a workset puzzle-piece icon displays next to each column indicating it can be changed to editable. select Beams and Columns. but the columns remain highlighted. Assigning Worksets | 447 . The puzzle-piece icons disappear. 14 Right-click one of the columns.All structural columns in the model are highlighted. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. for Workset.

20 Click File menu ➤ Save. 19 In the Save to Central dialog. to save the local file. 2 Click Open. 3 Click File menu ➤ Worksets. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. Making the Entire Workset Editable In this exercise. under After save relinguish editable. clear Borrowed Elements. and click OK. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. you make the entire workset editable and assign individual elements to specific users. The columns and beams elements are now assigned for Workset1. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save to Central.17 Click OK. Making the Entire Workset Editable on page 448. Navigate to the location of the central file Worsksets Project-Central on the network drive. 448 | Chapter 12 Worksets .

Making the Entire Workset Editable | 449 . 4 In the Worksets dialog. 7 On the Options Bar. select Workset1. 5 Click OK. and select Floors. and click the Editable on the right-side of the dialog. 8 In the Filter dialog. click . notice User1 is listed under Borrowers for Beams and Columns. User1 is now listed as the Owner of Workset1. Assign the floor workset 6 Draw a pick box around the entire model to select all elements.In the Worksets dialog. click Check None.

9 Click OK. for Workset. click . 12 Click OK. 10 On the Options Bar. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. select Slabs. The slabs are now assigned for Workset1. 450 | Chapter 12 Worksets . All floors are highlighted.

Using the steps described in the previous procedure. 14 On the Options Bar. click the Worksets tab. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. click . 18 Enter VV. assign the remaining worksets for the elevator shafts. for Workset.Assign the roof workset 13 Select the roof as shown. 19 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. Making the Entire Workset Editable | 451 . Turn visibility on/off 17 Click elsewhere in the drawing area to deselect the roof. select Roof. The roof is now assigned for Workset1. foundation. and the garage ramp. This is the keyboard shortcut for Visibility/Graphic override. 16 Click OK.

Roof. 21 The elements are now hidden from the view. To turn off additional elements. Save to central file 24 Click File menu ➤ Save to Central. The elements are now visible in the view. Roof. click the Worksets tab.20 Clear Beams and Columns. and Slabs. and on the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 452 | Chapter 12 Worksets . clear the box next to the desired element. and then click Apply and OK. and Slabs. and then click Apply and OK. 23 Check Beams and Columns. 22 Enter VV.

rvt. In the following section of this exercise. please do so before continuing. and refer explicitly to User 1 and User 2. Using Worksets with Multiple Users In this exercise. 2 Start a new Revit Structure session by double-clicking the Revit Structure icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. For training purposes. and proceed to Create a local copy. each user must check out worksets. Throughout the process. select: ■ ■ User-created Worksets Borrowed Elements 26 After the file is saved. click Options. 28 Click OK. Create a local copy 5 In this exercise. enter User 2. and click OK. click File menu ➤ Save to save a local copy. return to the Settings dialog. Using Worksets with Multiple Users on page 453. This exercise requires the completion of the previous workset exercises and access to the resulting local and central files. enter Reassigning elements to their own worksets. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 453 . under User name. and reload the latest changes. instructions are staggered. User 2: Create a local file. This is a system setting. consider that person to be User 1. The next series of steps create a local file for User 2. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. 27 Under Comment. and reset the User name to your computer login name. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. one user has already created a local file. skip the following section. specifically sequenced. If both users have completed the previous worksets exercises and created central files on the network. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Structure and setting the user name to User 2. select one of those central files to be used in this exercise. 3 On the Settings menu. Regardless of which central file you choose to use. Throughout the remainder of this exercise. Use a second Revit Structure session to mimic User 2 1 Minimize the current Revit Structure window.25 In the Save to Central dialog. Each modifies the structural model within their local file and publishes it back to the central file where the other user can see the changes. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file named Worksets project-Central. make elements editable. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. For training purposes. The user who has not yet created a local file for the chosen central file is User 2. two users access the central file through a network connection. and check out worksets 6 Click File menu ➤ Open. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). If you have not yet completed these exercises. 4 Click the General Tab and. two users work on the structural model residing in the central file you created and saved in a previous exercise.

12 In the File Save Options dialog. and move it. 11 In the Save As dialog. expand 3D Views. 23 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 454 | Chapter 12 Worksets . 22 Click OK. select the central file and. and double-click 3D-Atrium. click Options. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. This file is for your use only. 16 Click OK. and click Save. select all the User-Created worksets. Notice that the Foundation workset is checked out by User 2. 14 Click File menu ➤ Worksets. under Open Worksets. User 1: Check out worksets. 19 Try to change the Editable status for Foundation to Yes. A warning is displayed informing you that you cannot check out this workset because it is already checked out by another user. and select Yes for Editable. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User 2. If you only have one workset checked out. 24 Select any column on the foundation level as shown in the following illustration. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. 20 Click OK to return to the Worksets dialog. 21 Select the Beams and Columns workset. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. In addition. select Specify. 8 Click Open. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. it becomes the active workset. verify that Make this the Central location after save is not selected. and select Yes for Editable. 18 Click File menu ➤ Worksets. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and publish changes 17 User 1 should still have the local file open. and click OK. You are now the owner of that workset. open it now. You now have a local copy of the project. modify the structural model.7 In the Open dialog. If it is not open. 9 In the Opening Worksets dialog. Notice that you own this workset and the active workset is now Beams and Columns. 13 Navigate to your preferred location on the hard drive. 15 Select the Foundation workset.

expand 3D Views.A warning is displayed informing you that a conflict exists. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save to Central. select a footing. 27 In the Save to Central dialog. User 2: Modify the building model and publish changes 29 In the Project Browser. 30 Using the following illustration as a guide. select the option to save the local file after the central file is saved. 25 Click anywhere in the empty drawing area to ignore the warning. and double-click 3D-Atrium. That is because changes made to the central file display in local files only when the worksets are explicitly updated. 28 Click OK. and move it. Notice that the changes made by User 1 do not immediately display in the local file of User 2. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 455 .

select Yes for Editable. under Structural Plans. and check out additional worksets 32 Click File menu ➤ Reload Latest. 40 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. A message displays informing you that the component you are trying to place is not visible in that view. click the Worksets tab. 38 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Therefore. Because you now have more than one workset checked out. The changes User 2 made are apparent. 33 Click File menu ➤ Worksets. You should turn on the visibility before adding a roof. the visibility of the workset is not turned on even though it is checked out and is the active workset. 41 Notice that the roof you added previously now displays. select Roof to turn on its visibility. click Slab. 34 Select Roof. click Pick Supports. 36 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and sketch a new roof between any four beams. click Visibility/Graphics. and click OK. Even though the Roof workset is active. 39 On the View menu.31 Click File menu ➤ Save to Central. any elements added to the structure are automatically assigned to the active workset. 35 On the Project Browser. However. and click OK. the Visible by default option was not selected. 37 In the Design Bar. double-click Roof. you are asked if you want to make the Roof workset the active workset. Click Yes. 456 | Chapter 12 Worksets . User 1: Reload latest worksets. This is because when the Roof workset was created. you still have complete access to the elements belonging to the Beams and Columns worksets.

a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Structure and setting the user name to User 2. leave this file open in its current state. NOTE When you open the training file for this tutorial. Each user checked out worksets. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users In this exercise. select the option to save the local file after the central file is saved. As each of you work. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 457 . 2 In the Worksets dialog. If you have not completed the previous workset exercises.42 Click File menu ➤ Save to Central. and these problems are rectified. In the final exercise of this tutorial. if any User-Created worksets are not open. In this exercise. At the appropriate point in this exercise. two users worked on the same structure using worksets. In subsequent steps. Each user must have network access to the central file. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. modified the structure and published their changes back to the central file. This exercise also requires two users and you can skip the first sections of the exercise and proceed directly to the section. User 1: Check out worksets 1 Click File menu ➤ Worksets. throughout this training. If you intend to complete the final portion of this tutorial by proceeding to the Element Borrowing exercise. leave this file open in its current state. There are specific instructions for each user. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. you learn how to borrow elements from worksets that other users are actively working on. select them. 43 In the Save to Central dialog. and click Open. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. you must borrow elements that belong to worksets that the other user has checked out. Only one user needs to open the training file and save the central file to a network location. you may receive a message informing you that the central file has been relocated. two users are working on the same project with separate local files. If you intend to complete the final exercise of this tutorial. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users on page 457. you need to set up your central and local files. This exercise requires two users and. you save the training file as a central file. Check out worksets. These messages are a result of the central file being relocated (to your PC). Click OK to this message and subsequent messages. 44 Click OK. You learn how to make borrowing requests and how to grant them.

select a footing. Leave this dialog open until User 1 grants permission. This allows you to select elements that belong to worksets that you do not own. a message informs you that you are waiting for permission from User 1. click File menu ➤ Editing Requests. and select Yes for Editable. User 1: Grant User 2 permission to borrow element 13 When User 2 contacts you and informs you that a borrowing request is pending your authorization. After you submit the request. You are now the owner of that workset. 11 Move the footing. select the Beams and Columns workset. User 2: Check out worksets 5 Click File menu ➤ Worksets. 7 Under Active Workset. User 2: Borrow an element from User 1 8 In the Project Browser. A warning message informs you that you must obtain permission from User 1. 12 Click Place Request to ask User 1 for permission to move the footing. and click OK. 458 | Chapter 12 Worksets . expand 3D Views. and select Yes for Editable. you should inform User 1 that you are waiting for permission to edit a borrowed element. You are now the owner of that workset. and double-click 3D-Atrium. 4 Under Active Workset.3 Select the Foundation workset. At this point. 9 On the Options Bar. and click OK. select Beams and Columns. 10 Using the following illustration as a guide. select Foundation. verify that Editable Only is cleared. 6 In the Worksets dialog. A symbol appears letting you know that it belongs to a workset you do not own.

to Local. and click OK. 18 Click OK. you requested permission to edit the element. User 2: Check for editability grant 17 In the Check Editability Grants dialog. 16 Click Close. In this case. User 1 and 2: Save to Central. In this multi-user exercise. click Check Now. ■ ■ ■ User-created Worksets Borrowed Elements (User 2 only) Save the local file after “Save to Central” completes successfully 21 Click File menu ➤ Close. you learned how to borrow elements from another workset even though that workset was actively being edited by another user. select the following. 20 In the Save to Central dialog. 15 Click Grant. and notice the footing is in the new location. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 459 . and close 19 Click File menu ➤ Save to Central. Project Coordination on page 461. 22 Proceed to the next tutorial. select the request submitted by User 2. and the other user granted it. A message informs you that your request has been granted.14 In the Editing Requests dialog.

460 .

and open Imperial\i_RST_Coordination. click Training Files. In the tutorial. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and determines the impact of each modification on the structure. When the modified file is brought back into Revit Structure. floors. or postponed. and columns for any future modifications. walls.rvt NOTE Because some of the changes from the architect involve elements that are monitored by the copy monitor feature of Revit Structure. all changes are documented using the Revit Structure revision system feature. Finally. rejected. This task is accomplished using the copy monitor feature that was activated when the project was started. Coordination Review In this lesson. you run an interference check to verify that the changes do not interfere with structural elements of the model. and the copy monitor feature was activated. depending on the impact to the design. Starting a New Project on page 149. a warning is displayed. levels. Click OK to open the file.Project Coordination 13 You have received the latest model from the architect and changes have been made to the design. which can be accepted. In this tutorial. Opening the Modified Revit Architecture file Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. This feature enabled the engineer to monitor the project grids. or window) that might interfere with elements in the Revit Structure 2009 model. you begin by opening the Revit Structure file that contains the modified Revit Architecture file. 461 . reviews each change individually. the architect’s file was imported into Revit Structure. Once each change has been reviewed. the structural engineer imports the modified Revit Architecture model. Finally. an interference check is run on the model to correct the placement of any architectural elements (door. the copy monitor feature automatically notifies you of the changes.

double-click Level 3. The modified Revit Architecture file will now be visible along with the Revit Structure file. This is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit. 462 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination . 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility Graphics. click Apply. and click OK. 3 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 7 Enter ZF. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. click . 4 Select the linked file i_RBD_After. 5 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. Selecting this discipline allows the architectural walls to be visible. under Graphics. and then click OK. select Coordination for Discipline.1 In the Project Browser. under Structural Plans. 8 On the View Toolbar. select the Revit Links tab.rvt. and notice the duplicate grid lines and the relocation of the stairway. and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the building at grid line B. Click .

click the Model Graphics Style control. 12 In the Structural Plan: Level 3 window: ■ ■ ■ Select . and draw a zoom box around the lower levels of the elevator shaft 11 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. Close all additional views that may have been opened accidentally. 13 On the Options Bar. click Opening the Modified Revit Architecture file | 463 . and draw a zoom box around the elevator shaft. 10 On the Toolbar. The Revit Architecture file is highlighted. On the View Control Bar.9 Click or drag the ViewCube to re-orient the view until the elevator shaft is visible as shown. . Click to select the linked file. The Level 3 Plan view and the 3D view are displayed in separate windows. click as shown. and click Wireframe. and the Coordination Review icon displays on the Options Bar. Click between grid lines A and B until the Revit Links box is displayed. .

select the remaining messages. or changed in some way from the architect’s file. 16 In the Coordination Review dialog. Review change to Floor Sketch 15 Position the Coordination Review dialog so the 3D window is visible. and click Show. ■ Click the first message under Monitor Floor Sketches. moved.The Coordination Review lists all messages that require some type of action. Actions include: Postpone. and click Apply. Click the message Floor: Floor: 6" Concrete. select Copy Sketch to Floor: 6" Concrete. ■ 464 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination . Display the review message for any individual floor by expanding Sketches are Different. Reject. Notice each floor is highlighted on the 3D view. and a custom message that pertains to each New/Unresolved category. 14 Click the 3D Views: 3D window to deselect the plan view. These messages identify elements that were deleted. The selected floor from the structural model is highlighted in the 3D window. In the Action column. The structural engineer should address each message individually and take some form of action to resolve the conflict. Accept Difference. and then click Show. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Expand New/Unresolved ➤ Floors ➤ expand Monitor Floor Sketches. press SHIFT.

■ For Action. 18 In the Coordination Review dialog. do the following: ■ ■ Expand New/Unresolved ➤ Grids ➤ Maintain relative position of Grids ➤ Grid moved. and click Apply. Grid B from the architect’s model is highlighted on the Level 3 window. and click Show. Review location of grid B 17 Position the Coordination Review dialog so the plan view is visible.The concrete floor sketches for all levels of the structure will be adjusted to accommodate the architect’s floor sketch change. Opening the Modified Revit Architecture file | 465 . Review location of elevator walls 19 On the Toolbar. click . select Modify Grid B. Click the message i_RBD_After. and draw a zoom box around the elevator shaft in the plan view.rvt: Grids: Grid:B. The grid line is adjusted to accommodate the architect’s change.

expand Maintain wall position. There are 4 changes involving the elevator shaft walls. select Modify Wall Basic Wall: Generic 8" Masonry. Select one of the messages and notice the wall is highlighted on the Structural Plan: Level 3 plan view. For Action. press SHIFT. Click the first message under Wall centerlines are different. and select the remaining messages. do the following: ■ Under New/Unresolved ➤ Walls.20 In the Coordination Review dialog. ■ ■ 466 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination . and click Apply.

12" Concrete.The elevator walls on the structural model will be adjusted to accommodate the architect’s change. ■ ■ In the Edit Comment dialog. In the Coordination Review dialog. Select Postpone for Action. Select Postpone for Action. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Expand New/Unresolved ➤ Walls ➤ Monitor Wall Sketches ➤ Sketch is missing. Review wall modifications 21 Position the Coordination Review dialog so the lower floors of the 3D View are visible. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click OK. and OK.8" Masonry. In the Edit Comment dialog. The structural engineer will discuss this change with the architect before proceeding.rvt. Click OK. enter Need to discuss with architect. and save the model to a location of your choice using the following file name: i_RST_Coordination-in progress. Click the message Walls: Basic Wall: Generic . 22 In the Coordination Review dialog. Opening the Modified Revit Architecture file | 467 . Click the Add Comment field. click Apply. Click the Add Comment field. Click the message Walls: Basic Wall: Foundation . enter Need to discuss with architect. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save As.

24 Proceed to the next exercise. 2 On the right-side of the Interference Check dialog. The default table compares elements within the same project. The next step is to select the architect’s file so it can be checked against the structural project. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. i_RST_Coordination-in progress. 468 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination . select i_RBD_After.rvt 1 Click Tools menu ➤ Interference Check ➤ Run Check.rvt for Categories from. and the second is a structural brace that interferes with a door opening in the stairway. Interference Check on page 468. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. you use the interference tool in Revit Structure to check on 2 potential problems with the stairway. The first is the possible interference between the stairs and a relocated structural column. Interference Check In this exercise.

select Structural Columns. and Stairs for the Revit Architecture project. Interference Check | 469 .Notice the categories for the architect’s file differ from the current Revit Structure project. Run interference check on columns and stairs 3 In the list for the current project.

5 In the Interference Report dialog. do the following: ■ Under Structural Columns.4 Click OK. 470 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination . expand the message for Level 3 Stairs as shown. A report is generated showing all instances of interference between columns in the structural project and the upper-left stairway in the Revit Architecture project.

Click Save. The report provides detail on the interference and should be used to discuss the problem with the architect. Each representing a different level. ■ ■ Export the Column interference report 6 In the Export dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Save in. select Revit Interference Report (*. Stair Check. Click Export to generate an interference report. Interference Check | 471 . Under File name. Under Save as type. enter Columns vs. ■ Select i_RBD_After. and that it interferes with the stairway. select a folder location on your local computer.rvt: Stairs: Stair: 7" max riser 11" tread.There are 7 instances of interference between structural columns and the upper-left stairway. Notice the column of the structural model is highlighted on the Structural Plan: Level 3 window. Notice the stairway of the architect’s model is highlighted on the Structural Plan: Level 3 window Select Structural Columns: W-Wide Flange Column: W10X33.html).

Run interference check on vertical bracing 8 Click Tools menu ➤ Interference Check ➤ Run Check. click Close. 10 Select Structural Framing ➤ Vertical Bracing for Current Project. 472 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination . and Doors for the Revit Architecture project. 11 Click OK. There is 1 instance of interference between structural bracing and the door for the upper-left stairway.rvt for Categories from.7 In the Interference Report dialog. 9 In the Interference Check dialog. select i_RBD_After.

rvt: Doors: Door Single. enter Brace vs. also the brace interferes with the opening. Under File name. do the following: ■ ■ Under Structural Framing ➤ expand Doors.html).12 In the Interference Report dialog. Export the Brace and Door interference report 13 In the Export dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Save in. select Revit Interference Report (*. Select Structural Framing: L-Angle: L4X4X3/4 ■ . Interference Check | 473 . Notice the door from the architect’s model is highlighted on both the 3D View and Structural Plan view windows. Under Save as type. ■ Click Export to generate an interference report. select a folder location on your local computer. Select i_RBD_After. Notice the brace from the structural model is highlighted on both the 3D view and Structural Plan view windows. Door opening.

and can then display the revisions in schedules that appear in the title block of each project sheet. When Issued is selected. Specify a revision numbering method 1 On the Settings menu. and open Imperial\i_RST_Revision. This is the date the revisions were identified. 15 In the Interference Report dialog. The report provides detail on the interference and should be used to discuss the problem with the architect. click Training Files. Using Revision Tracking on page 474. yet as concise as possible. 474 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination . If you select By Project. 4 Click on the value for Description. all tags and schedules display the numeral 1. In general. a new training file is provided. and enter 2/15/06. 16 Proceed to the next lesson. In the next lesson. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence of revisions in the Revisions dialog. click Revisions. Add a revision for grid B 3 Click on the value for Release Date. if the active revision is number 1. 6 Verify that Visible is selected.■ Click Save. Using Revision Tracking Revit Structure provides tools that enable you to track revisions to your project. verify that By Sheet is selected for Numbering Method. revision descriptions should be comprehensive.rvt. and enter Moved Grid B west by 2'. 5 Verify that Issued is cleared. For example. and you can draw revision clouds around elements in your project that have changed. You can create a sequence of revisions. You can use revision tags to notate the revision clouds. 2 In the Revisions dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence in which they are added to a sheet. Setting Up a Revision Table Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. the revision is locked and issued to the field. When you use this option. click Close. 14 Click File menu ➤ Save and save the file in a folder of your preference.

any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. The Activate View command activates a viewport on the sheet.If Visible is not selected. allowing you to edit the model directly from the sheet. Sketching Revision Clouds | 475 . and select Activate View. 6 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. Add a revision cloud for grid B 1 In the Project Browser.Level 3 Framing Plan. Each cloud is visible only in the view in which it is sketched. which are inherited from the revision table you created for the project. Sketching Revision Clouds on page 475. Sketching Revision Clouds In this exercise. you can add a revision cloud to the 3D view once it is placed on a sheet. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. You can sketch revision clouds in all views except 3D model views. 3 Right-click the view on the sheet. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. under Sheets (all). 7 Click Apply. 5 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. In most instances. click near grid line B. You can draw multiple revision clouds for each revision. However. Revit Structure is now in sketch mode. click Revision Cloud. Revision clouds have read-only properties. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. double-click S. and OK. you indicate the changes made by the architect graphically with a revision cloud. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.1 . including revision number and revision date. 4 In the drawing area.

rvt. the revision is locked and issued to the field. 3 Click on the value for Release Date. In this tutorial. In general. 4 Click on the value for Description. the revision for grid line B should be issued to the field to prevent any changes to the revision cloud. i_RST_Revision-in progress. This is the date the revisions were sent out for review. click Finish Sketch. The revision cloud is displayed around the modified grid line. and save the model to a location of your choice using the following file name: i_RST_Revision-in progress. 8 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 5 Verify that Issued is cleared. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 2 In the Revisions dialog. NOTE At this point. yet as concise as possible. Add Remaining Revisions on page 476. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. the revisions to the project will be issued after all the revision clouds have been drawn. A new row is added below the existing row in the revision table. 6 Verify that Visible is selected.7 On the Design Bar. Add a revision for the elevator stairs 1 On the Settings menu. 9 Proceed to the next exercise. click Add: New. click Revisions. Add Remaining Revisions In this exercise. 476 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination . the remaining revisions for the project are documented. When Issued is selected. and enter Moved Stair exit 2' west. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. and enter 2/20/06.rvt.

In most instances. 11 On the Design Bar. 10 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. 13 Click on the value for Release Date. 8 In the drawing area. 9 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment.If Visible is not selected. click Revision Cloud. and enter Research brace. 14 Click on the value for Description. and enter 2/21/06. The revision cloud is displayed around the modified stairs. A new row is added below the existing row in the revision table. Add a revision cloud for the elevator stairs 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. This is the date the revisions were sent out for review. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. You can change the appearance of the cloud from the Settings menu. Add a revision for the brace interference 12 In the Revisions dialog. click above the elevator shaft. Add Remaining Revisions | 477 . and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. Revit Structure is now in sketch mode. click Add: New. click Finish Sketch.

click above the brace. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. The Activate View command activates a viewport on the sheet. When Issued is selected. 18 Right-click the center view on the sheet. under Sheets (all).2 . yet as concise as possible. 20 In the drawing area. double-click S. the revision is locked and issued to the field. Revit Structure is now in sketch mode.In general. 21 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. and select Activate View. 19 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. If Visible is not selected. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. In most instances. 478 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination . 16 Verify that Visible is selected. allowing you to edit the model directly from the sheet. Add a revision cloud for the brace interference 17 In the Project Browser. 15 Verify that Issued is cleared.Stair Shafts Sections. click Revision Cloud. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. 22 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed.

A new row is added below the existing row in the revision table. 25 Click on the value for Release Date. You can change the appearance of the cloud from the Settings menu. Add Remaining Revisions | 479 . the revision is locked and issued to the field. Add a revision for the door interference 24 In the Revisions dialog. click Finish Sketch. 26 Click on the value for Description. When Issued is selected. yet as concise as possible. 28 Verify that Visible is selected.23 On the Design Bar. In general. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. and enter Research door. 27 Verify that Issued is cleared. The revision cloud is displayed around the brace. This is the date the revisions were sent out for review. click Add: New. and enter 2/22/06.

The revision cloud is displayed around the door. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. 33 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. 30 Right-click the right view on the sheet. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. 480 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination . Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. You can change the appearance of the cloud from the Settings menu. 31 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.Stair Shafts Sections.rvt. 35 On the Design Bar. click above the door. Tagging Revision Clouds In this exercise.If Visible is not selected. Tagging Revision Clouds on page 480. The Activate View command activates a viewport on the sheet. allowing you to edit the model directly from the sheet. In most instances. under Sheets (all). 36 Click File menu ➤ Save. 34 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. you apply a revision tag to the revision cloud in the current drawing. and select Activate View. click Revision Cloud. The tag number that is displayed in the drawing is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table in a previous exercise. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. double-click S. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. click Finish Sketch. i_RST_Revision-in progress. Revit Structure is now in sketch mode. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. Add a revision cloud for the door interference 29 In the Project Browser.2 . 32 In the drawing area.

If the cursor is just inside the cloud. Because you chose to number by sheet. The tag displays the revision number of the cloud. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. under Sheets (all). and because the revision is the first in the project. i_RST_Revision-in progress.Place a revision tag 1 In the Project Browser. 9 Proceed to the next exercise. Working with Revisions In this exercise. the tag is displayed inside the cloud. Working with Revisions on page 481. The Activate View command activates a viewport on the sheet. allowing you to edit the model directly from the sheet. and then issue the revisions to create a record. 6 Click to place the tag.Level 3 Framing Plan. 7 Repeat steps 2 through 5 to add revision tags for all remaining revision clouds. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise.rvt. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Tag ➤ Tag By Category. 8 Click File menu ➤ Save. and lock it from further changes. Working with Revisions | 481 . 5 In the drawing area. The number is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table. double-click S. and select Activate View. clear Leader. 4 On the Options Bar.1 . 2 Right-click the view on the sheet. position the cursor just outside the revision cloud for grid line B. the cloud is tagged as number 1. you first view the revisions that were created in the previous exercise.

Stair Shafts Sections.View the revisions 1 In the Project Browser.1 . You do this by issuing the revision.2 . and click OK. click Revisions. On the Settings menu. 482 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination . you can no longer modify it. you prevent further changes to the revision. under Sheets (all). double-click S. and draw a zoom box around the title block as shown. double-click S. NOTE After you issue a revision. 6 Select Issued for each revision entry. and draw a zoom box around the title block as shown. You cannot add revision clouds to the revision in the drawing area. 2 Select . 3 In the Project Browser. 4 Select . under Sheets (all). nor can you edit the sketch of the existing clouds.Level 3 Framing Plan. Issue a revision 5 After you make the necessary changes to the project and add the revised views to a sheet.

Click Yes when prompted to save the drawing. Working with Revisions | 483 . 8 Proceed to the next tutorial. Structural Analytical Modelling on page 485.7 Click File menu ➤ Close.

484 .

You can save the View Template from one type of view and apply those same properties to any other geometric view. you can reapply the modified template. material properties. View Templates help standardize the look of all views. You can also apply an existing view’s view properties using the Apply View Template command. component properties. Discipline. As you create objects and the physical model. Revit Structure applies only the properties applicable to both. you can apply that same template to a 3D view. Because each view in Revit Structure consists of different properties. NOTE Reapplying a view template overrides previous view property modifications and View templates can only be applied to geometric views. The view inherits view properties such as View Scale. Detail level. To update a view. Revit Structure View Templates provide initial conditions for a view. geometry. if you save a template from a plan view. 485 . Though the View Range property applies only to plan views. For example. You can apply a template to an existing or new view. When working with the analytical model. you learn some basic concepts of the Revit Structure 2009 analytical model and how to prepare the model to be analyzed by a third party analysis software. the template is still applied to the 3D view. The analytical model consists of structural components. interaction with steel detailers and fabricators and also the analytical model that can be consumed by multiple 3rd party analysis software.Structural Analytical Modelling 14 In this tutorial. All views created with that template are not automatically updated. The physical model that is used for documentation. and the visibility settings of categories and subcategories. Applying the Analytical Model to the Design Process Revit Structure combines 2 models. the analytical model is created automatically based on engineering rules and logical relationships between the structural objects. the View Template saves and applies only common properties. loads and load combinations. quantity take off. Views and View Templates are not linked.

and open Imperial\i_RST_SAM_Analytical_Checks. Apply the view template 1 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. The Structural Analytical Stick view template will present structural components in this new analytical plan with only the analytical model displayed as shown. Analytical checks should be run at different phases of the project and the model adjusted accordingly. click Training Files.rvt. The Structural Analytical Normal view template will present structural components in this new analytical plan view with both the analytical model and the physical model displayed as shown. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Analytical Checks In this exercise. you learn how to check member supports. 486 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . 2 In the Select View Template dialog. and run an analytical consistency check on the analytical model shown below. select Structural Analytical Normal or Structural Analytical Stick. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

This tutorial will run both the Member Supports Check and Analytical/Physical Model Consistency Check for all elements selected from the Settings menu ➤ Structural Settings dialog. 5 Close the Warning dialog. Review support warnings 6 Click Tools menu ➤ Review Warnings. Analytical Checks | 487 . Revit Structure checks for instances where a structural element (column) is missing a foundation support (slab. select the Analytical Model Settings tab. Verify analytical settings 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Structural Settings. Notice that the structural element is highlighted on the model as each warning is selected. wall. or isolated).NOTE If the visibility of loads is tuned off in the view. 4 In the Warning dialog click . to view each warning. 2 In the Structural Settings dialog. applying either the stick or normal analytical view template to the view will cause loads to be displayed. Check member supports 3 Click Tools menu ➤ Analytical Model ➤ Check Member Supports. under the Analytical Model Settings tab. A Warning dialog appears notifying you that there are structural elements that may not be supported properly.

488 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . Click Structural Columns: W-Wide Flange-Column: W10X33 ■ ■ Click Show. Click OK in the Viewing Tips dialog.7 In the Warning dialog: ■ ■ Expand Structural Element may not be supported ➤ Warning 1.

Analytical Checks | 489 .The unsupported element is highlighted and displayed in the drawing area. 9 In the Warning dialog: ■ ■ Expand Circular Support Chain Detected ➤ First Warning Click Structural Framing: W-Wide Flange-Column: W18X40 ■ Click Show. Review circular reference warnings 8 Click Tools menu ➤ Review Warnings. Notice the column is not supported by an isolated footing.

■ Click OK in the Viewing Tips dialog. under Structural Plans. D-4. Notice that there are missing isolated footings at specific grid locations. Correct circular reference 15 In the Project Browser. 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. E-3. and H-4. click Modify. under Structural Plans. double-click Level 2. click Close. 14 On the Design bar. 16 Correct the placement of the structural beams as shown. 10 In the Warning dialog. 490 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . Notice the highlighted beam requires an adjacent beam for support on one end. click Foundation ➤ Isolated. 13 Place an isolated footing at each of the following grid locations: E-1. double-click Ground Level. Correct member supports 11 In the Project Browser. H-3. D-2.

A Warning dialog appears notifying you that there are model elements that have a zero-length. Review warnings 5 Click Tools menu ➤ Review Warnings. click to view each warning. 4 Close the Warning dialog. Revit Structure checks for consistency between the analytical and physical models. This indicates the specific element has a physical length but no analytical length. 6 In the Warning dialog: ■ ■ Expand Zero-length Analytical Model Detected ➤ first Warning. Click Structural Columns: W-Wide Flange-Column: W10X49 Analytical Checks | 491 . expand 3D Views. Notice that the structural element is highlighted on the model as each warning is selected. 3 In the Warning dialog.Run a consistency check 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click 3D. 2 Click Tools menu ➤ Analytical Model ➤ Analytical / Physical Model Consistency Check.

In the Element Properties dialog. The Zero-length element is highlighted and displayed in the drawing area. under Analytical Model. Click OK in the Viewing Tips dialog. click Close. 8 Select the column that was previously highlighted.■ ■ Click Show. 7 In the Warning dialog. notice that Ground Level is selected as the value for Top Vertical Projection. and on the Options Bar. click . 492 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling .

9 In the Element Properties dialog. click OK. and select the 3 columns identified in the warning dialog as shown. Analytical Checks | 493 . 12 Press CTRL. 11 Click or drag the ViewCube to re-orient the view until the south side of the structure is visible as shown. Correct zero-length elements 10 Enter ZF (Zoom To Fit).

14 Under Analytical Model. 17 Click File menu ➤ Close. You can save the open file if you wish. The following illustration shows the Structural Settings dialog with the Load Cases tab selected.13 On the Options Bar. Load Cases In the Structural Settings dialog. a new training file is provided. Load Cases on page 494. click OK. 16 Click Tools menu ➤ Analytical Model ➤ Analytical / Physical Model Consistency Check. 18 Proceed to the next exercise. This indicates the zero-length warnings have been fixed. for Top Vertical Projection. In the next exercise. click . 15 In the Element Properties dialog. The Warning dialog does not appear. 494 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . you edit and add load cases. select Top of Column.

select Dead Loads. Revit Structure provides several default load case types that you can use to generate loads in the model. and rename it to Roof Hung. click Training Files. A new load nature record is added to the bottom of the table. The second table is the Load Natures table. NOTE You can also create a new load case with the Duplicate command. 2 Click Add. select the Load Cases tab. Load Cases | 495 . In this table. you learn how to add new load cases. In this table. The selected load case is copied in the table. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.The first table is the Load Cases table. 5 Under Category. In this exercise. 4 Click in the name cell of the new load case. 3 Click Add.rvt. Revit Structure provides a default number. you add or delete load natures. Add a Load Case 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Structural Settings. you add. then click Duplicate. NOTE The Case Number column of the table is read-only. 2 In the Structural Settings dialog. Add a load nature 1 Click in the Load Natures table. A new load case is added to the bottom of the table. or delete load cases. and the Add button changes to Duplicate. and open Imperial\i_RST_SAM3. edit. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Select an existing load case record in the table.

and enter an appropriate name. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. The orientation of the project coordination is as illustrated: A view has a work plane that can be used for object placement. 4 Click OK to close the Structural Settings dialog.rvt Change the coordinate system orientation 1 In the Project Browser. and loads can be placed by default. Adding Loads to the Model on page 496. In this exercise. you will be adding dead loads. A host for a load has its own work plane. 5 Click File menu ➤ Save As. i_RST_SAM3-in progress. and double-click View 1 . Revit Structure has several coordinate systems for loads: ■ ■ ■ project coordinate system current work plane host work plane The project coordinate system displays in the view when you click Loads on the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. expand Views (all).Analytical. 496 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . using the project coordinate system. perpendicular to the host’s work plane. Loads are placed perpendicular to the view’s current work plane. Use the project file that you saves at the end of that exercise. and wind loads to the model. expand 3D Views. 6 Proceed to the next exercise. Then you create load combinations for use by analysis and design software. NOTE The new load nature is now available under the Nature column of the Load Cases table.rvt. Adding Loads to the Model Loads are added to the model using a coordinate system. Hosts include slabs and beams. live loads.3 Click in the cell of the new load nature. and save the model to a location of your choice using the following filename: i_RST_SAM3-in progress.

under Analytical Model. click Loads.2 On the View Control Bar. 3 Click or drag the ViewCube to rotate the model so the garage sloped slab is visible. 8 On the Options Bar. 7 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 9 Click the garage sloped slab. select 6 In the Element Properties dialog. 5 On the Options Bar. click the Model Graphics Style control. 4 Select . TIP Be sure to click the Area Load with Host option. click (Area Load). Use the tooltips to be sure you click the correct option. select Top of Slab for Vertical Projection. . draw a zoom box around the garage sloped slab and select it. and click Hidden Line. and click OK. Adding Loads to the Model | 497 .

and on the Options Bar. 498 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . expand Views (all). and double-click Level 2-Analytical. click 13 Click OK. 12 In the Element Properties dialog.The load is placed on the garage sloped slab. 3 On the Options Bar. 10 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 11 Select the load. under Structural Analysis. select Project for Orient to. The load coordinates are now parallel to the project. click (Area Load). . expand Structural Plans. click Loads. Add an area load at level 2 using slab as host 1 In the Project Browser. Notice the coordinate system indicates the load is perpendicular to the host (ramp). 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

6 On the Design Bar. 10 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 7 Right-click on the load you placed. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. Use the Tooltips to be sure you click the correct option. under Structural Plans. enter -0. Add wind load at Level 2 9 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Type Selector.TIP Be sure to click the Area Load with Host option. click Modify to exit the Loads tool. Adding Loads to the Model | 499 . double-click Level 2-Analytical. select Area Load: Area Load 1. and click Element Properties. and click OK. 5 Select the Level 2 slab perimeter as shown. click Loads.0300 ksf for the Fz 1 parameter.

click Duplicate. TIP You may need to press TAB to highlight the line load. click Edit/New. enter Wind Load. do the following: ■ ■ Enter 0 kip/ft for Fz 1 Enter 0. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Element Properties. 13 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Watch the Status Bar to be sure you are highlighting Line Load 1. TIP Be sure to click the Line Load option. as shown. 14 Right-click on the Line Load 1. Use the Tooltips to be sure you click the correct option. 16 In the Type Properties dialog.11 On the Options Bar. and click OK. click (Line Load). 17 In the Element Properties dialog.0400 kip/ft for Fx 1 500 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . 12 Sketch a line load from one corner of the slab to the other.

and click Hidden Line. under Structural Plans.Analytical. click the Model Graphics Style control. 18 In the Project Browser. 21 Select . 20 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all). draw a zoom box around the beams on the east side of the structure as shown. Adding Loads to the Model | 501 .Analytical in order to view the added loads. and double-click View 1 . double-click Level 2 . and click OK. expand 3D Views.■ Select WIND1(3) for Load Case. 19 On the View Control Bar.

22 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Grid. 502 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . 23 Draw a temporary grid as shown.

click Framing Elevation. 25 Place the framing elevation symbol so that it will snap to the temporary grid approximately as shown. 27 Select the temporary grid. 24 On the View tab of the Design bar. The elevation view opens. and press DELETE. 28 Double-click the new elevation bubble. 29 Select . click Modify.This grid is drawn for reference only. and will be deleted in a later step. draw a zoom box around the lower floors of the structure as shown. 26 On the Design bar. Adding Loads to the Model | 503 .

Use the Tooltips to be sure you click the correct option. under Structural Analysis.30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 34 Select the load. You will see the load is oriented to project orientation. The load projection plane is now oriented to the workplane of the temporary grid line plane to which the framing elevation was pointing. and click OK. click . click (Line Load). click Loads. 31 On the Options Bar. and on the Options Bar. select the edge of the flange as the starting point for the load. 504 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . 32 On Level 2. 33 Drawing the load from one corner of the flange to the other. 35 In the Element Properties dialog. select Workplane for Orient to. TIP Be sure to click the Line Load option. as shown.

Load Combination In this exercise. 8 Click Add. click Structural Settings.rvt Add a DL + LL combination 1 On the Settings menu. You edit and add load combinations in the Structural Settings dialog. 3 Click Add in the Load Combination section. you add a load combination to your model for use by the analysis and design software. 2 In the Structural Settings dialog. enter DL+LL. click the Load Combinations tab. Notice that the Formula field under Load Combination changed automatically to show the new factor. 9 Under Factor.4. Load Combination on page 505. Load Combination | 505 . enter 1. 37 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. and save the model to a location of your choice using the following filename: i_RST_SAM3-in progress. 6 Under Factor. select LL1.36 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 5 Click on the Edit Selected Formula table. i_RST_SAM3-in progress. 7 Under Case or Combination. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise.6. 4 Under Name. Use the project file that you saves at the end of that exercise. select DL1. 10 Under Case or Combination. and click Add. enter 1.

15 Under Case or Combination. 21 Under Case or Combination. 14 Under Factor. 12 Under Name. enter 1. select LL1. enter DL+LL+WIND. 23 Select Row 2.Add a DL + LL + wind combination with a factor 11 Click on the Load Combination table. enter 0. Add a LL1 combination with a factor 16 Click Add. 22 Click on the Load Combination table. and enter 1. and click Add. select WIND1. and click Add. 25 Under State. 506 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling .2. 20 Under Factor. 17 Under Factor. Add a WIND1 combination with a factor 19 Click Add in the Edit Selected Formula table.3.5. select Envelope. 18 Under Case or Combination. 24 Under Type. select DL1. select Ultimate. 13 Click on the Edit Selected Formula table.

28 Proceed to the next exercise. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 27 Click File menu ➤ Save. 2 Click File menu ➤ Transfer Project Standards. click OK. Use the project file that you saves at the end of that exercise. and select Load Types. Transfer Project Standards on page 507.rvt Importing load types and combinations from a previous project 1 Open an existing Revit Structure project or create a new project. select the file that contains the load table. Click Check None. 3 In the Select Items to Copy dialog.26 In the Structural Settings dialog. i_RST_SAM3-in progress. Transfer Project Standards | 507 . Scroll down the list of items. you transfer the load combination table to a new or existing project. ■ ■ ■ Under Copy from. Transfer Project Standards In this exercise.

click the Load Combinations tab. 508 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling .■ Click OK. 5 Click Settings menu ➤ Structural Settings. click Overwrite. 6 On the Structural Settings dialog. 4 In the Duplicate Types dialog.

Use the project file that you saves at the end of that exercise. 7 Click File menu ➤ Save. and creating an analytical schedule. Documenting the Analytical Model In this exercise. Documenting the Analytical Model on page 509. Documenting the Analytical Model | 509 . 3 Click the Wind Load to place the tag. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.The load combinations are displayed. and double-click Level 2 Analytical. you document the analysis by adding an annotation. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. expand Views (all). click Tag ➤ By Category. i_RST_SAM3-in progress.rvt Add annotation 1 In the Project Browser. expand Structural Plans. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise.

6 Click on the drag control for the wind load tag and position approximately as shown. click Modify. 510 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . 5 On the Design Bar.4 Click the Area Load to place the tag.

select Line Loads and click OK. 11 Using the same process.Create a load schedule 7 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Define the fields 9 In the Schedule Properties dialog. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. select Fx 1 and click Add. add the following fields to the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Fx 2 Fy 1 Fy 2 Fz 1 Fz 2 Nature 12 Under Scheduled fields. The Fx 1 field is moved under Scheduled fields. 8 In the New Schedule dialog. under Category. 10 Under Available fields. order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down. click the Fields tab. click Schedule/Quantities. Documenting the Analytical Model | 511 . and click View. right-click on the Design Bar.

In addition. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. i_RST_SAM3-in progress. Revit Structure provides a reset tool to reset analytical models back to their original location relative to the corresponding physical model. Examples of Analytical Adjustment and Reset in the Model There are some structural configurations that are not suitable for direct integration with structural analysis and design software. under Structural Plans.Analytical. double-click Ground Level . A schedule is created that includes the analytical elements in the project. the geometry of the analytical model may be adjusted in relation to those elements that it joins. For this reason. 14 Click File menu ➤ Save. 512 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling .rvt Align the analytical beam 1 In the Project Browser. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise.13 Click OK. Manual adjustment is required before a structural model is input into the analysis and design software.3. Examples of Analytical Adjustment and Reset in the Model on page 512. 2 Zoom into the column at grid line F . NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise.

and select the corner endpoint of the analytical plane of the slab.3 Click Tools menu ➤ Analytical Model ➤ Adjust Analytical Model. and select the endpoint of the analytical line of the beam. 4 Press TAB. Examples of Analytical Adjustment and Reset in the Model | 513 . 5 Press TAB.

a new training file is provided. For example. ■ Creating beams The corresponding beam to slab projection planes are matched.The analytical model lines and planes are now connected at the same location for analysis purposes. Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model The analytical model that is generated in Revit Structure has discrepancies that are not suitable for direct integration with structural analysis and design software. Revit Structure provides the capability to automatically adjust the analytical model to reduce or eliminate these discrepancies for newly created elements as well as the ability to disassociate or reassociate the auto-detect parameter for existing elements. In the next exercise. Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model on page 514. You can save the open file if you wish. NOTE The auto-detect feature automatically adjusts the analytical model when creating the following structural elements within a project. setting both planes to level 2 as shown: ■ Creating columns Places the analytical model of columns and walls in the same plane as shown: ■ Creating slabs and walls 514 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . 7 Proceed to the next exercise. 6 Click File menu ➤ Close.

Aligns the vertical and horizontal analytical projection plane of walls. the top or bottom plane of the wall’s analytical model will coincide with the slab analytical model as shown: If a wall has a portion that extends beyond the roof (commonly known as parapets). it can be excluded in the wall’s analytical model to exclude loads that extend above a level with framing members. Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model | 515 . despite any variation in wall thicknesses or projection plane location as shown: If a wall and slab are joined.

In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. They include distances for the analytical-to-physical model and analytical adjustments. and open Imperial\i_RST_SAM_Auto_Detect. select the Analytical Model Settings tab. and the auto-detect tolerances for both horizontal and vertical planes.If the analytical edge of slab coincides with the beam or wall analytical model. Auto-detect tolerances 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Structural Settings. or it can be trimmed back the analytical/physical model of the slab as shown: NOTE The following adjustments to the analytical model are applied to an existing project to better demonstrate the auto-detect feature. 2 In the Structural Settings dialog. 516 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. This exercise applies the auto-detect feature within the tolerances specified in this dialog. 3 Click OK. the exterior of the wall can be defined as the analytical projection plane. click Training Files.

2 On the Toolbar. double-click Level 2. Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model | 517 . click as shown. 4 On the Toolbar. and draw a zoom box around one of the beams. . click . 5 Move the cursor over the top of the beam as shown.Adjust the beam to slab vertical offset 1 In the Project Browser ➤ Structural Plans. and draw a zoom box around the lower-left corner of the structure 3 Double-click the section bubble to open the section view.

and then click OK. For demo purposes. and then click OK. a single beam is selected 7 In the Element Properties dialog. under Analytical Model. for Vertical Projection. for Vertical Projection. select Top of Slab. represents the vertical projection plane of the beam analytical model. 6 Click the beam. and on the Option Bar. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. 8 Click the slab. select Auto-detect. The vertical projection plane of the analytical model automatically moves to the top of the slab. under Analytical Model.The dot located at the top of the beam. click . click . and on the Option Bar. NOTE The properties for all beams of the same type should be changed. 518 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling .

double-click Level 2 . click .The vertical projection plane of the analytical model automatically moves to the top of the slab. 12 In an empty part of the drawing area. right-click. Adjust the column to wall horizontal offset 10 In the Project Browser ➤ Structural Plans. The dot located at the top of the slab. and click Zoom in Region. 13 Draw a zoom box around the column as shown. represents the vertical projection plane of the analytical model. 11 On the Toolbar.Analytical. Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model | 519 . and draw a zoom box around the column at grid location A3. Notice the green line representing the analytical model of the concrete wall is not aligned with the blue dot representing the analytical model of the column.

click .14 Click the column. Adjust the vertical alignment of different wall types 17 In the Project Browser ➤ Structural Plans. and on the Option Bar. The geometry of the column and wall are now joined. for Horizontal Projection. The horizontal projection plane for the column. click (Join Geometry). and then select the column. 18 On the Toolbar. select the wall. 520 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . and then click OK. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click Level 2. aligns with the horizontal projection plane of the wall. select Auto-detect. 16 On the Tools toolbar. under Analytical Model. and draw a zoom box around the elevator shaft located on the lower-right side of the structure as shown. click .

19 Double-click the section bubble to open the section view. Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model | 521 .

for Horizontal Projection. Check the Status Bar to verify you are selecting the chain of walls and not a single wall. click .Notice the solid green lines are not aligned. These lines represent the vertical projection plane of the upper and lower wall analytical model. select Auto-detect. under Analytical Model. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. 522 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . and then click OK. 21 Press TAB. and select Chain of Walls or Lines. 20 Move the cursor over the lower wall. The dotted green line represents reference plane 1. 22 On the Option Bar.

click . and click Zoom in Region. and on the Option Bar. 24 In an empty part of the drawing area.The vertical projection plane for the lower wall is now aligned with the vertical projection plane of the upper wall. and then click OK. right-click. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. for Horizontal Projection. 25 Draw a zoom box around the center of the upper and lower walls as shown. under Analytical Model. Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model | 523 . select Plane 1. 26 Click the upper wall.

right-click. 30 Draw a zoom box around the intersection of the beam and column. Adjust the vertical alignment of a wall and slab 28 In the Project Browser ➤ Sections (Building Section).The vertical projection plane for both the upper and lower walls are now aligned with vertical projection plane 1. and click Zoom in Region. 524 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . double-click Section 3. 29 In an empty part of the drawing area.

and on the Option Bar. Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model | 525 . The vertical projection plane for the lower wall is now aligned with the horizontal projection plane of the slab. Adjust the horizontal alignment of the slab to wall 33 Click the slab. click . 32 In the Element Properties dialog. and then click OK. select Bottom of Slab. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. and on the Option Bar. click . and then click OK. 31 Click the lower wall. select Auto-detect. for Top Vertical Projection.The brown line represents the analytical model of the slab. for Vertical Projection. and the green line represents the analytical model of the wall. Notice the green line extends to the top of the beam. under Analytical Model. under Analytical Model.

under Analytical Model. and then click OK. 39 In the Element Properties dialog. under Analytical Model. for Analytical Slab Edge. You are now in sketch mode and the slab perimeter appears in the drawing area. 526 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling .The horizontal projection plane for the slab (brown line) is now aligned with the vertical projection plane of the wall (green line). 42 Click the lower wall. double-click Section 3. Notice the analytical line of the wall moves with the analytical line of the slab. and on the Option Bar. click . 35 Click the slab. select Structural Plan: Level 2 . for Horizontal Projection. 43 In the Element Properties dialog. 37 Select the left sketch line of the slab as shown. click Finish Sketch. select Exterior Face. 41 In the Project Browser ➤ Sections (Building Section). 40 On the Design Bar. click . and then click Open View. and on the Option Bar. 36 In the Go to View dialog. and then click OK. click . 38 On the Option Bar. select Auto-detect. In the Revit dialog. click No.Analytical.

and then click OK. Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model | 527 . and on the Option Bar. under Analytical Model.The horizontal projection plane of the slab is now aligned with the exterior face of the wall. under Analytical Model. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. 46 Click the lower wall. and then click OK. and on the Option Bar. select Auto-Detect Horizontal Projection. select Top of Wall. for Top Vertical Projection. click . click . Adjust the column to the lower wall analytical projection 44 Click the column.

Analytical. Close any additional open windows. click . double-click Level 3 . 52 On the Toolbar. double-click Level 3. and draw a zoom box around the beam located in the upper-left corner of both views as shown. Adjust the horizontal alignment of a beam 48 In the Project Browser ➤ Structural Plans. 51 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. 50 In the Project Browser ➤ Structural Plans. Both windows will be visible in the drawing area.The vertical projection plane of the column (blue line) is now aligned with the exterior face of the wall (green line). 528 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . 49 Enter ZF.

. 55 In the Level 3 window. under Analytical Model. do the following: ■ ■ Move the cursor over the beam. Check the Status Bar to make sure you are selecting the shape handle and not the beam. and on the Option Bar. Extend each end of the beam as shown.53 Click the beam. 54 In the Element Properties dialog. ■ Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model | 529 . and select the beam shape handle. Press TAB. select Auto-Detect. click Notice the beam is highlighted in both open views. and then click OK. for Horizontal Projection.

57 Proceed to the next exercise. You can save the open file if you wish. 56 Click File menu ➤ Close. 530 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . In the next exercise. Boundary Conditions on page 531.Notice the beam in the analytical view remains unchanged. a new training file is provided.

Boundary Conditions In this exercise. 5 In an empty part of the drawing area. click (Point Boundary Condition). 10 Draw a zoom box around the base of one of the columns. under Visibility. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 Enter ZF. click Apply. and click Zoom in Region. 6 Draw a zoom box around the columns located on the lower-left side of the structure as shown. double-click View 1 . and open Imperial\i_RST_SAM_Boundary_Conditions. click Training Files. clear Structural Foundation.Analytical. select Fixed. 9 In an empty part of the drawing area. click Boundary Conditions. 11 Click the end of the blue line (representing the analytical model of the beam) to place the point boundary condition. 7 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. right-click. and then click OK. right-click. and click Zoom in Region. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 In the Visibility/Graphic dialog. Add a point boundary condition to the base of a column 1 In the Project Browser ➤ 3D Views. 8 On the Options Bar. Boundary Conditions | 531 .rvt. and for State. 3 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. you add a boundary condition to your model for use by the analysis and design software.

click . for State. under Structural Analysis. and then click OK. press CTRL. 14 On the Option Bar. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. 13 Click one of the boundary condition symbols. and select the other symbol. select Pinned.12 Repeat this technique to add a fixed boundary condition to the next closest beam as shown. 532 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling .

select Pinned. 17 Click or drag the ViewCube to rotate the view until the foundation wall is displayed as shown. click (Line Boundary Condition). 20 On the Options Bar. 21 Click the green line (representing the analytical model of the foundation) to place the line boundary condition. 19 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Boundary Conditions. Boundary Conditions | 533 . and draw a zoom box around the foundation.Notice the boundary condition now displays a pinned state symbol. Add a line boundary condition to the footing 16 Enter ZF. and for State. click . 18 On the Toolbar.

22 Click File menu ➤ Close. member relocation. Preparing the Analytical Model to be Calculated in Third Party Analysis Software Revit Structure links to an analysis and design software. elevations. 2 Proceed to the next tutorial. Exporting Revit Structure Files on page 535. and detail sheets are updated according to changes that you import into Revit Structure. 534 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . including structural plans. NOTE The External Tools menu is only available once an approved 3rd party analysis software application has been installed. some internal analysis software parameters are imported into Revit Structure. In the next exercise. via an Application Programming Interface (API). Size changes to your model and geometric modifications to your model involving member deletion. that you confirm in the analysis software. You can save the open file if you wish. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. the API also returns you to your Revit Structure model and updates it. For more information. click Help ➤ Structural Analysis Partners. In addition. You can open the analysis software or write to an export file for later use. Export the model to analysis software 1 Click Tools menu ➤ External Tools ➤ Send Model. If you choose to have the API open the software and run your model. or member addition. Preparing the Analytical Model to be Calculated in Third Party Analysis Software on page 534. are imported back into Revit Structure. The application programming interface (API) starts. All views. sections. a new training file is provided.

Finally.Atrium. or schedule into AutoCAD. click Training Files. Export CAD formats 1 In the Project Browser. maintains the properties of all structural elements as true AutoCAD Architecture objects. Exporting CAD Formats In this lesson. and double-click 3D . expand 3D Views. you begin by exporting a 3D view of the structural model as a DWG format and importing the file into AutoCAD Architecture 2007. elevation. or you can export a 3D view directly into AutoCAD Architecture. In this tutorial. 535 . section. etc.). You can also export the project drawing sheets and import them as 2D images. sheet. and open Imperial\i_RST_Export. you learn how to export your project into both 2D and 3D formats for improved coordination with architects and engineers. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you export sheets from the project and import them into AutoCAD 2007 or AutoCAD Architecture 2007 as 2D images. Revit Structure. You then select a 2D structural plan view and export the file as a DWG format. Exporting the 3D Model to AutoCAD Architecture 2007 Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. which is imported into AutoCAD 2007.Exporting Revit Structure Files 15 Your Revit Structure 2009 project can be exported into several different AutoCAD formats. You can export a 2D view (plan.

select Export as AutoCAD Architecture and AutoCAD MEP Options. select a folder on your local computer.2 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ CAD Formats. 4 In the Export Options dialog.dwg). select AutoCAD 2007 DWG Files (*. NOTE You can only export the 3D model in a 3D view. do the following: ■ ■ Under Save in. Under Save as type. Under File naming. click Short. The existing file name is automatically shortened. do the following: ■ Under Solids (3D views only). 536 | Chapter 15 Exporting Revit Structure Files . 3 In the Export dialog. ■ ■ Click Options.

click Save. 7 Click File menu ➤ Open. select AutoCAD Architecture objects. 5 On the Export dialog. View the 3D file in AutoCAD Architecture 2007 6 Open AutoCAD Architecture 2007. NOTE Revit Structure cannot export to earlier releases of AutoCAD Architecture. Click OK. 8 Navigate to the file location.■ ■ Under Prefer. and click Open. Exporting the 3D Model to AutoCAD Architecture 2007 | 537 .

and notice it is a true AutoCAD Architecture structural element. and save the model to a location of your choice using the following filename: i_RST_Export-in progress. Exporting a 2D view to AutoCAD on page 539 538 | Chapter 15 Exporting Revit Structure Files . and braces are converted to the corresponding type of AutoCAD Architecture structural member. 9 Select a beam as shown. Revit Structure columns. beams. 10 Minimize the AutoCAD Architecture program.When the file is opened in AutoCAD Architecture 2007.rvt. the Revit Structure model appears as shown. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. 11 In Revit Structure. click File menu ➤ Save As.

i_RST_Export-in progress. 2 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ CAD Formats. expand Structural Plans. 3 In the Export dialog. select a folder on your local computer. click Long (Specify prefix for all exports). 1 In the Project Browser. Click Save. Exporting a 2D view to AutoCAD | 539 . Under Save as type. Under File naming.dwg). and double-click Level 2. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Save in. clear the existing name and enter Framing Plan Level 2. select AutoCAD 2007 DWG Files (*. Under File name.Exporting a 2D view to AutoCAD Training File ■ Continue to use the training file that was saved in the previous exercise.rvt.

540 | Chapter 15 Exporting Revit Structure Files . When the file is opened in AutoCAD 2007 or AutoCAD Architecture 2007. 9 Proceed to the next exercise. i_RST_Export-in progress. View the 2D file 4 Maximize the AutoCAD 2007 or AutoCAD Architecture 2007 program. 7 Minimize the AutoCAD or AutoCAD Architecture program. 8 In Revit Structure.rvt. NOTE Revit Structure cannot export to earlier releases of AutoCAD Architecture. 5 Click File menu ➤ Open.If the view was set to wireframe. click Hidden Line Removal. the Revit Structure exported Level 3 Plan appears. Exporting Sheets on page 540 Exporting Sheets Training File ■ Continue to use the training file that was saved in the previous exercise. On the View’s export mode dialog. 6 Navigate to the file location. click File menu ➤ Save. a warning dialog appears. and click Open.

Exporting Sheets | 541 . 3 In the View/Sheet Set dialog. click Selected views/sheets ➤ Select. NOTE If you are exporting to a DWG file. click Save.Export sheets 1 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ CAD Formats. do the following: ■ ■ Under Show. Click No when asked if you want to save the settings for use in a future Revit session. 4 On the Export dialog. and click OK. clear Views. you can flatten xrefs by selecting the Export each view or sheet as a single file option as shown. Under Export Range. This option is automatically selected for DXF files and not available for DGN or SAT files. do the following: ■ ■ Under Save in. 2 In the Export dialog. select a folder on your local computer. Select each sheet.

On the View’s export mode dialog. 8 Navigate to the location of the files saved in the previous exercise. click Hidden Line Removal. View the Revit Structure sheets in AutoCAD 2007 or AutoCAD Architecture 2007 6 Maximize the AutoCAD or AutoCAD Architecture program. If you wish to save the changes. 5 Close the Revit Structure file. NOTE Revit Structure cannot export to earlier releases of AutoCAD Architecture.If the view was set to wireframe. 542 | Chapter 15 Exporting Revit Structure Files . 7 Click File menu ➤ Open. and click Open. a warning dialog appears. navigate to a folder of your preference and rename the file.

Exporting Sheets | 543 .When the sheets are opened in AutoCAD or AutoCAD Architecture. they appear as shown.

544 .

you learn about the various types of families and the Family Editor. 545 . You also learn about the Family Editor. because there is only one file to track. thus the term family. there is another type of family that allows you to create any shape or form required for a particular project and have Revit Structure recognize it as a particular component type. In this tutorial. or other parameter variables as designed by the family creator. Using Families and the Family Editor One of the many advantages of using Revit Structure is the ability to create your own families of components without having to learn a complex programming language. Some family types are pre-defined within Revit Structure and cannot be created or modified outside of the project environment. you learn about the three types of families and how they are used within a project and how they are created. Each family element can have multiple types defined within it. shape. exceptions to this rule. such as a curved beam. Using the Family Editor. however. In this lesson. In addition. if you create a family called wide beams that includes types with several sizes.rfa extension. and when and how to use it. Introduction to Families Most families are created in the Family Editor and saved as separate files with an . You provide the information necessary to describe uniquely the family geometry. each with a different size. Walls.” The term family describes a powerful concept used throughout Revit Structure to help you manage your data and make changes easily.About Families and the Family Editor 16 All elements in Revit Structure 2009 are “family based. and roofs are examples of these types of families. you create a family within predefined templates that contain the intelligent objects required to create the particular family type. All different types that you create are stored with the master family file. The different file types become much easier to manage. This keeps everything coordinated and saves you the time and effort of manually keeping components and schedules up to date. For example. Even though various types within a family can look different. material set. the types would all be saved as one file which can then be loaded into any project. Changes to a family type definition ripple through the project and are automatically reflected in every instance of that family or type within the project. There are. they are still related and come from a single source.

Family templates are either host-based or standalone. 546 | Chapter 16 About Families and the Family Editor . and beam. generic. The basic walls system family. while many more are stored in component libraries. and roofs. but you cannot create new system families. You work with the Family Editor to create and modify components. NOTE You can use “Transfer Project Standards” to copy system families from one project to another. exterior. and partition wall styles. You can either duplicate and modify an existing component family or create a component family based on a variety of family templates.Revit Structure has three types of families: ■ ■ ■ System Standard Component In-place System Families System families are pre-defined within Revit Structure and comprise principle building components such as walls. floors. Family templates assist you in creating and manipulating component families. Standard Component Families Standard component families are loaded by default in project templates. The following illustration shows different types within the basic walls family. has wall types that define interior. Host-based families have components that require hosts. Standalone families include columns. for example. You can duplicate and modify existing system families. foundation. The following dialog box shows how you can select a specific family template to start your family design project.

You have a choice of categories when you create in-place families. In-place Families In-place families are either model or annotation components in a particular project.Standard component families can exist outside of the project environment and have an . You can load them into projects. and the category that you use determines the appearance and display control of the component within the project. transfer them from one project to another. The following illustration shows host-based openings in a wall.rfa extension. custom step footing. so they are useful for objects unique to that project. and also a standalone pile cap family component. for example. The following illustration shows an in-place step footing. Introduction to Families | 547 . and save them from a project file to your library if needed. You create in-place families only within the current project.

how to access it.Add a family to a project 1 Open or start a project. or 3D. it is saved with the project. However. how to access it. you learned about the different types of Revit Structure families and when to use them. Families are listed in the Project Browser under their respective component category. 3 Navigate to the library or location of the family. You do not have to carry the original family file along with the project. if you change the original family. elevation. and the general procedure for creating a standard component family. or you can load it using the Load From Library. After the family has been loaded in the project. In the final exercise. Family element visibility can be dependent of your viewing direction. In this exercise. you can drag it into the document window. and when to use it. To add a family to your project. 4 Select the family file name and click Open. Load Family command on the File menu. 2 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. 548 | Chapter 16 About Families and the Family Editor . you learn about the Family Editor. In this section. such as plan. reload the family in the project to see the updated family. you learn when to use the Family Editor. Introduction to the Family Editor You can use the Family Editor to create both real-life building components and graphical/annotation components. Families store all of the necessary geometry to display the two-dimensional (2D) and three-dimensional (3D) versions of particular objects. as well as the level of detail associated with that view.

4 Add dimensions to specify parametric component geometry. you can double-click any file with an . 9 Save the newly defined family. There is a logical thought process to follow: 1 Is there a component of this type already loaded into this project? If so. It will be apparent because the only Design Bar tab available is Family. Within the Windows® environment. modify it as needed. consider checking the Web library and other Web resources. and then load it into a new project and see how it performs. 3 Next. create a component family using one of the family templates as a starting point. you will need a specific component for your design. try to find the component that most closely resembles it. presume it is a bay window that you require. 4 If you cannot find the component you require. 3 Lay out reference planes to aid in drawing component geometry. To start a new family. 5 Finally. open it in the Family Editor. With Revit Structure open. Also consider any internal family libraries that exist on the network. General procedure for creating a standard component family 1 Select the appropriate family template. When the family opens. and click Open. 8 Define family type variations by specifying different parameters. 5 Add label dimensions to create type or instance parameters.rfa extension and it opens Revit Structure in the Family Editor. How to use the Family Editor You can access the Family Editor in several ways. 6 Flex the new model to verify correct component behavior. you can click File ➤ Open. navigate to a family file. and click Open. You can have a project open and the Family Editor open simultaneously. 2 If there is not a component family loaded in the project. It is far easier to modify an existing component within the Family Editor than to create it from scratch. Introduction to the Family Editor | 549 . select the appropriate template. if you have exhausted your external resources.When to use the Family Editor During the design process. it opens within the Family Editor. 2 Define subcategories for the family to aid in controlling visibility of the object. you can search the component library loaded on your local hard drive. click File ➤ New ➤ Family. and then load it into the project. it will be available within the Type Selector. In this case. 7 Specify 2D and 3D geometry display characteristics with subcategory and entity visibility settings. such as newsgroups. If you find a close match.

550 .

you customize 2 different families with the Revit Structure family editor. and an in-place family for a step-footing. a custom castellated beam. In the second exercise. Modifications to the existing families are saved as a family (.rft) template for use in other projects.rft file). you create the following families: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ a custom metal deck profile. When you create an in-place family. a reinforcement layout with overlapping rebar. Creating a Custom Metal Deck Family In this exercise. In the first exercise.Creating Components in the Family Editor 17 In this tutorial. not within the Family template (. you modify the profile for a non-composite metal deck family by adding a dovetail rib. you create a custom. Using the installed templates. This allows you to create the family in the context of the current project. Creating Custom Families In this lesson. non-composite metal deck family by adding a dovetail rib to the deck profile. 551 . you create it within the project file. a custom titleblock. you learn how to create specific Revit Structure 2009 Families. you create a custom opening in a castellated beam family.

and press DELETE.Open the metal deck family profile 1 Click File menu ➤ Open.rfa. Delete the same parameter on the opposite side of the profile. Delete vertical reference planes 7 Select parameter wr as shown. select 1 1/2" = 1' 0" for scale. click Dimensions and Reference Planes. 552 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 4 On the Annotations Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. click Training Files. 5 In an empty part of the drawing area. 6 On the View Control Bar. 8 Delete additional vertical reference planes until the view appears as shown. do the following: ■ ■ Under Visibility. and click Zoom to Fit. Click Apply. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and then click OK. right-click. 3 Click View menu ➤ Visibility Graphics. and open Imperial\Form Deck_Non Composite.

click ■ ■ ■ (Create Angular Dimensions). click Dimension. Click the angle. click Modify. Move the cursor inside the profile. 10 On the Options Bar. 12 On the Design Bar.Modify the angular reference plane 9 On the Design Bar. Creating a Custom Metal Deck Family | 553 . and click to place the dimension as shown. 11 Place a dimension for the angle as follows: Click the horizontal reference plane.

and click Zoom to Fit. enter 66. 17 Click the top and bottom dimensions. and press ENTER. 554 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . right-click. 15 In an empty part of the drawing area.13 Select the angled reference plane. select 6" = 1' 0" for scale. Repeat this technique to add a dimension for the angle on the opposite side of the profile. and drag them approximately as shown. 14 Select the angular dimension and click the lock symbol to lock the angle to the horizontal reference plane. 16 On the View Control Bar.

and press DELETE.18 Select the dimension that refers to the width of the profile base. Creating a Custom Metal Deck Family | 555 . and add a dimension as shown. Place new dimensions 19 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. Repeat for the dimension on the opposite side.

Dimension and constrain the dovetail 27 On the Design Bar. 24 Press ESC. click Dimension. 22 On the Design Bar. and click the EQ symbol to apply equal constraints. click . under Other. 25 Select the reference planes and on the Options Bar. and draw a zoom box around the top of the profile.20 Add 2 dimensions from the center reference plane to the bottom of each side of the profile as shown. for Is Reference. 26 On the Element Properties dialog. and then click OK. 556 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click . Sketch the dovetail reference planes 21 On the View Toolbar. 23 Draw 1 horizontal and 4 vertical reference planes approximately as shown. 28 Add a dimension from the top of the profile to the dovetail horizontal reference plane as shown. click Ref Plane. select Not a Reference.

These dimensions refer to the positioning of the dovetail in relation to the profile center reference plane. and enter 0' 11/32". 33 Click the EQ symbol to constrain the dimensions as shown. 30 Select the horizontal reference plane. and click the lock symbol to lock the distance to the horizontal reference plane. and press ENTER. click the dimension. Creating a Custom Metal Deck Family | 557 . 32 Repeat the previous technique to add the remaining dimensions for the dovetail as shown.The dimensions displayed in the following steps are provided for reference only and can be customized based on your requirements. 29 Press ESC. 31 Select the dimension line.

38 Using the split tool. click Lines. 558 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 37 On the Tools toolbar click (Split). 39 Press ESC. trace the line between the dovetail and the existing element as shown. 35 Sketch the dovetail by snapping to the intersections of the vertical and horizontal reference planes as shown. and click Delete Inner Segment.Sketch the dovetail 34 On the Design Bar. Create parameters a and b 40 Select the lower dovetail dimension as shown. 36 Click Modify.

enter a for Name. under Parameter Data. and then click OK. click Label ➤ Add Parameter. Creating a Custom Metal Deck Family | 559 . enter b for Name. 43 Select the upper dovetail dimension as shown. 44 On the Options Bar. 45 In the Parameters Properties dialog.41 On the Options Bar. 42 In the Parameters Properties dialog. under Parameter Data. click Label ➤ Add Parameter. and then click OK.

560 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Family Types. enter 0' 2".Define wr parameter 46 On the Design Bar. do the following. for a. for wr. click Family Types. 47 In the Family Types dialog. 48 Select the dimension as shown. click Label. enter 0' 4 1/2". ■ Under Other. select 2" X 6". do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Name. and select wr. Under Other. Flex the new dovetail profile 50 On the Design Bar. 51 In the Family Types dialog. Click Apply. and OK. 49 On the Options Bar.

click Lines. click Save the new profile 53 Click File ➤ Save As. enter 0' 2". 61 In the Choose Template dialog. The slab size should be approximately 55' 0" long by 35' 0" wide. Notice that the dovetail adjusts automatically to the new parameters. click Slab. 54 In the left pane of the Save As dialog. do the following. click OK. 57 In the Family Types dialog. Click Apply. and click Open. 60 In the New Project dialog. for b. Click Apply. 64 On the Design Bar. and enter 2" x 5". for a. Under Other. for Sr. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ (Undo). Under Other. Creating a Custom Metal Deck Family | 561 . Under Other. enter Form Deck_Non Composite_Dovetail. and click OK.rfa. 68 On the Design Bar. You are now in sketch mode. and for File Name. Create a new project 59 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. click the Imperial Library folder. Create new parameters 56 On the Design Bar. and click Save. 52 On the Toolbar. 63 In the Project Browser. select Structural Analysis-Default. 65 On the Design Bar. double-click Level 2. Under Family Types. select Rename. 62 In the New Project dialog.rte. click Browse. 67 Draw a slab in the center of the drawing area.■ ■ Under Other. click Finish Sketch. under Structural Plans. and then click OK. enter 0' 5". click Family Types. 55 Click Profiles ➤ Structural folder. click (Rectangle). enter 0' 2 1/2". 58 Click File ➤ Save. enter 0' 2 1/2". in the Imperial Templates folder. for b. 66 On the Options Bar.

The slab is created. double-click Section 1. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Scale. For Model Graphic Style. select Fine. select 1" = 1' 0". under Sections (Building Sections). select Floor: 3" LW Concrete on 2" Composite Metal Deck. and in the Type Selector. click Section. 71 In the Project Browser. select Wireframe. 562 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . For Detail Level. 70 Click above the slab and draw a section line through the slab approximately as shown. 72 Select the slab. Create a section view of the slab 69 On the Design Bar. 73 On the View Control toolbar.

79 In the Edit Assembly dialog. Under Layers. under Construction. 75 On the Families Design Bar. ■ ■ ■ . Customizing a Castellated Beam on page 563.Apply the custom family to the metal deck 74 Click the Window menu. do the following. In the left pane of the Open dialog. open the file from the saved folder location. 82 In the Project Browser. 80 In the Type Properties dialog. If there are multiple files open. for Deck profile. click 77 In the Element Properties dialog. If it is not. Customizing a Castellated Beam | 563 . The file should still be open. and open Imperial\i_RST_Custom_Beam.rvt. and open the new family file. you create a custom opening in a castellated beam. under Sections. select Layer 3. Click OK. Customizing a Castellated Beam In this exercise. click Load into Project. 81 In the Element Properties dialog. select Edit for Structure. 78 In the Type Properties dialog. select the new metal deck profile file. click OK. select the slab project from the available files. 83 Proceed to the next exercise. click OK. The new non-composite metal deck family is loaded into the slab project. 76 Select the slab. click Training Files. Under Structural Deck Properties. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. The new profile is applied to the slab. click Edit/New. and on the Options Bar. double-click Section 1.

564 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . . . ■ ■ ■ ■ e1 = Tee length.Modify the beam opening 1 On the Options Bar. click castellated beam. b = Length of sloped portion. and on the Options Bar. and draw a zoom box around one of the openings in the 2 Select the beam. click Edit/New. Refer to the following diagram to identify and define the parameters for the beam opening. click 3 In the Element Properties dialog. 4 Position both dialogs so the opening is visible in the drawing area as shown. e2 = Space between voids (web post length). dt1 = Tee depth top beam.

Click Apply.■ dt2 = Tee depth bottom beam. enter 0' 3". enter 0' 3". Creating a Custom Reinforcement Layout In this exercise. enter 0' 5 1/2". and open Imperial\2D Rebar Shape Template. under Construction. click Rebar Lines. enter 0' 6". you create a custom reinforcement layout with overlapping rebar. For dt1. Open the 2-dimensional (2D) rebar family 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family.rft. For b. For dt2. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. click Training Files. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. click OK. Creating a Custom Reinforcement Layout | 565 . 7 Proceed to the next lesson. For e2. Notice the opening in the beam changes based on the new parameters. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter 0' 4". Creating a Custom Reinforcement Layout on page 565. and then click OK. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For e1. Sketch the rebar 3 On the Design Bar.

and draw a horizontal line to create the top surface of the rebar.4 On the Options Bar. ■ Click and draw a vertical line to create the inside loop. click ■ (Draw). ■ Click and draw a second horizontal line to create the bottom of the rebar. 566 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . as follows: Click to the right of the vertical reference plane. 5 Draw the overlapping rebar as one continuous line.

8 Place dimensions on the rebar sketch as shown. Place dimensions 7 On the Design Bar. click Dimension.■ Click and draw a second vertical line to create the outside loop. ■ Click and draw a horizontal line to complete the rebar sketch. Creating a Custom Reinforcement Layout | 567 . click Modify. 6 On the Design Bar.

Create parameter labels 10 Select the upper horizontal rebar dimension as shown. 568 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor .Make sure you snap to the reference plane when placing the dimensions. 12 Select the inside vertical rebar dimension as shown. for Label. select B. 11 On the Options Bar. 9 Press ESC.

for Label. 16 Select the outside vertical rebar dimension as shown. Creating a Custom Reinforcement Layout | 569 . select D. 14 Select the bottom horizontal rebar dimension as shown. select C.13 On the Options Bar. for Label. 15 On the Options Bar.

select C. 24 In the New Project dialog. Save the new profile 20 Click File ➤ Save As. 19 On the Options Bar. click OK. for File name. 570 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . enter Square. and click Save. for Label. in the Choose Template dialog. select Structural Analysis-Default. Create a new project 23 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. 26 In the New Project dialog. 18 Select the inner horizontal rebar dimension as shown. 22 In the Save As dialog. click Browse. and click Open. 21 Navigate to a folder of your choice. 25 In the Imperial Templates folder.rte. select B. for Label.17 On the Options Bar.

click Lines. 34 On the Families Design Bar. 30 On the Options Bar. open the file from the saved folder location. Sketch a slab 28 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 31 Draw a slab in the center of the drawing area. NOTE You can launch or close the Rebar Shape Browser by clicking Place rebar parallel to the slab on the Options Bar. Load the overlapping rebar into the new project 33 Click the Window menu. Launch the rebar shape browser 36 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 29 On the Design Bar. This browser provides multiple rebar shape types that can be placed within the specified host. click Finish Sketch. double-click Level 2. scroll down the list of available shapes. The file should still be open. Creating a Custom Reinforcement Layout | 571 . and corresponds to the shape specified on the Options bar. The active rebar shape is highlighted. 37 Click on the Rebar Shape Browser. under Structural Plans. and be certain that the Square. 35 In the Load into Projects dialog. positioned in the right-side of the drawing area.27 In the Project Browser. The new overlapping rebar family is now loaded into the slab project. The Rebar Shape Browser launches. If it is not. The slab is created. select the new project. 32 On the Design Bar. click Slab. You are now in Sketch mode. and select Rebar Shape: Square. click Load into Projects. click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Parallel. and click OK.rfa file is open. click (Rectangle).

select Detail Level: Fine. 42 Click ESC. 40 Hover over the section view. for Placement Plane. 41 Click to place the rebar. select Rebar Bar: #10. Notice that the rebar shape is positioned over the slab. 44 Select the rebar.38 On the Options Bar. Modify rebar layout 43 On the View Control Bar. 39 In the Type Selector. 572 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . select Near Cover Reference.

Creating In-Place Families In this lesson. Creating In-Place Families on page 573. Creating In-Place Families | 573 . 46 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Because in-place families interact with the structural model according to their assigned family category. 45 Select one of the shape handles and change the position or shape of the rebar as shown. you start with an incomplete foundation wall. you create an in-place family in your current project rather than in the Family (. 47 Proceed to the next lesson.Notice that the rebar shape handles appear.rft) template.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. click Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 1. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.Creating a Step Footing In-Place Family In this exercise. click .rvt. select Wall Foundation: Bearing Footing .36" x 12". 4 Click the foundation wall. click 3D Views ➤ 3D. 3 In the Type Selector. you create a step footing on an existing foundation wall. 6 On the Options Bar. 574 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Foundation ➤ Wall. Create new family category 5 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\i_RST_In-Place-Footing. The footing is placed at the base of the foundation wall. Place the foundation wall 1 In the Project Browser. and draw a zoom box around the foundation steps as shown.

9 In the Name dialog. 8 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog. Creating a Step Footing In-Place Family | 575 . Sketch the extrusion 13 Click the corner of the footing to start the extrusion sketch as shown. click Create. 11 In the Work Plane dialog. enter Structural Foundations 1 for Name. and select the bearing footing as shown. 12 Press TAB. 10 On the Design Bar.7 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. and click OK. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. Make sure the entire footing is selected. select Pick a plane. select Structural Foundations. and click OK.

18 In the Element Properties dialog. click Finish Sketch. for Name. for Depth.Cast-in-Place Concrete. Copy extrusion 23 Select the extrusion. 24 On the Options Bar. click OK. 21 On the Design Bar. 19 In the Materials dialog. click Extrusion Properties. enter -3' 0". click . 22 On the Family Design Bar. select Concrete . click the value for Material. sketch a solid extrusion as shown. The dimensions have been added for reference purposes only. 576 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 20 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify.14 Using the drawing tools provided with Revit Structure. 25 Click the corner of the step foundation and the extrusion as shown. under Materials and Finishes. Change extrusion properties 17 On the Design Bar. and then click OK. click Finish Family. 16 On the Design Bar. and select Multiple. 15 On the Options Bar.

26 Click to place a second copy of the extrusion as shown. Creating a Step Footing In-Place Family | 577 . 27 Click to place a third copy of the extrusion as shown.

28 Press ESC. Join extrusion elements to the footing 29 On the Options Bar. 32 Select the middle extrusion as shown. and click Multiple Join. 578 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 30 Select the wall foundation as shown. 31 Select the lower extrusion as shown. click (Join Geometry).

37 Select the lower extrusion as shown. and click Multiple Join. click Modify. Creating a Step Footing In-Place Family | 579 . click (Join Geometry). 35 On the Options Bar. Join extrusion elements to each other 34 On the Design Bar.33 Select the upper extrusion as shown. 36 Select the middle extrusion as shown.

click 3D Views ➤ 3D.38 Select the upper extrusion as shown. 40 In the Project Browser. 39 Press ESC. 580 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

The default titleblock template consists of 4 border lines. 2 In the New dialog. select D . you draw all of the linework necessary to create a custom D-size sheet. you create a custom titleblock sheet based on the D-size titleblock template. You customize the titleblock with a new text style. click . Create a new family based on the default titleblock template 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Titleblock. Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet In this exercise.Creating a Titleblock Family In this lesson. Sketch the inside border 3 On the Design Bar.36 x 24. and your project data. and labels. click Lines. Creating a Titleblock Family | 581 . 5 Specify the upper-left corner of the sheet for the first rectangle corner. navigate to the Titleblocks folder. The titleblock has linework. and click Open. graphics. and then specify the lower-right corner of the sheet for the second corner of the rectangle. and enter -1/2" for Offset. text.rft. 4 On the Options Bar.

and click to draw a new vertical line. and enter 4 1/2" for Offset. click . 7 Move the cursor over the right inside border line. 10 Draw a horizontal line 4'' below the upper inside border as shown.Add vertical and horizontal lines 6 On the Options Bar. 11 Draw a horizontal line 3'' below the last horizontal line as shown. 582 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and click . . click 9 Enter 0 for Offset. 8 On the Options Bar. 12 Draw a horizontal line 3'' above the lower inside border as shown.

click Modify. click . select the second and third horizontal lines. 20 Move the cursor over the fourth horizontal line. 15 Zoom in on the lower-right corner of the sheet. while pressing CTRL. 17 In the Type Selector. Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet | 583 . select Title Blocks. 21 Move the cursor over the fifth horizontal line. 22 On the Options Bar. and. enter 3/4" for Offset. 16 On the Design Bar. NOTE The wide line style is not visible until the titleblock is loaded into a new project. 23 Move the cursor over the third horizontal line.13 On the Design Bar. 26 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Type Selector. select Wide Lines. and click to draw a new horizontal line 1/2'' below the existing line. and click to draw a new horizontal line 1/2'' below the existing line. and click to draw a new horizontal line 3/4'' above the existing line. and click to draw a new horizontal line 3/4'' above the existing line. click Modify. 27 Zoom out to view the entire sheet. and enter 0' 1/2" for Offset. 24 Move the cursor over the seventh horizontal line. 19 Move the cursor over the third horizontal line. 25 Move the cursor over the eighth horizontal line. click Lines. 18 On the Options Bar. and click to draw a new horizontal line 1/2'' below the existing line. and click to draw a new horizontal line 3/4'' above the existing line.

and click Open. click Duplicate. click .jpg. Add a company logo 1 On the File menu. enter 3/8" Bold for Name. and click OK. 2 In the Open dialog. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New. click Text. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock In this exercise. enter 3/8" for Text Size. you add a company logo. click Import/Link ➤ Image. and select Bold.The titleblock linework is now complete. 9 In the Name dialog. 6 On the Options Bar. Create a new 3/8'' text style 5 On the Design Bar. 4 Zoom in on the logo. navigate to Training/Common. under Text. and labels to your titleblock. 11 Click OK twice. 584 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 3 Place the image in the upper-right corner of the sheet as shown. text notes. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. select Company Logo.

Press ENTER to add each new line of text. and click outside of the text box to complete the text. and add an address and phone number as shown. 13 Enter Arch Design Inc. select Text: Text Note 1. and drag the text note down as shown. 17 On the Design Bar. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 585 . 14 Click outside of the text box to complete the text. Add company address and phone number text 15 In the Type Selector.Add company name text 12 Draw a text box under the first horizontal line as shown. click Modify. in the text box. and select the last text note. 18 Select the drag handle. 16 Draw a text box below the initial text.

click Modify. address. 25 Click inside the Consultant text group. 24 On the Options Bar.19 Click outside the text box to complete the modification. click Text. click . and enter the following text: ■ ■ ■ ■ Consultant: Address: Address: Telephone: 22 On the Design Bar. select Constrain and Multiple. 586 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and select the consultant text note. 23 On the Edit toolbar. 21 Draw a text box below the second horizontal line. and phone number text 20 On the Design Bar. Add consultant name.

click . enter 3/16" for Text Size. enter 3/16" for Name. Create a new 3/16'' text style 28 On the Design Bar. 32 In the Name dialog. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 587 . click Duplicate. and click OK. and click to specify the second copied text note location. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. select Text: 3/16". 27 Move the cursor down another 4''. click Edit/New. Add drawing data text 35 In the Type Selector. and enter Sheet Number. under Text. 36 Draw a text box in the lower-right space of the titleblock.26 Move the cursor down 4''. 29 On the Options Bar. 31 In the Type Properties dialog. 30 In the Element Properties dialog. 34 Click OK twice. click Text. and click to specify the first copied text note position.

select Project Issue Date. and click OK. 588 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 38 Draw a text box in the next space up. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. and enter Drawn By:. and click to specify the label location. 44 Select the left drag handle on the label. and enter Date. select Right and Bottom for Text Alignment.37 Draw a text box in the next space up. click Label. 41 On the Options Bar. Add drawing data labels 40 On the Design Bar. The label displays a default value wrapped to 2 lines. and enter Checked By:. 39 Draw a text box in the next space up. 42 Place the cursor at the lower-right corner of the Date field. 43 In the Select Parameter dialog.

and click OK. select Drawn By. and click to specify the label location. 54 In the Type Properties dialog. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 589 . and click OK. 48 In the Select Parameter dialog. click Edit/New.NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text. click . select Checked By. 51 In the Element Properties dialog. under Text. 52 In the Type Properties dialog. 47 Place the cursor at the lower-right corner of the Checked By field. 53 In the Name dialog. 50 On the Options Bar. click Label. 45 Place the cursor at the lower-right corner of the Drawn By field. 55 Click OK twice. 46 In the Select Parameter dialog. enter 3/8" for Text Size. click Duplicate. Create a new 3/8'' label style 49 On the Design Bar. enter 3/8" Label for Name. and click OK. and click to specify the label location.

60 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Date field. 61 In the Select Parameter dialog. 58 In the Select Parameter dialog. 590 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and click to specify the label location. select Sheet Number. 57 Place the cursor at the lower-right corner of the Sheet Number field. click Center and Middle. and click to specify the label location. 59 On the Options Bar. and click OK. select Project Number. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. select Label: 3/8'' Label.Add sheet number and project data labels 56 In the Type Selector. 62 Select the left drag handle on the label. and click OK.

65 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Project Name field. Create a 1/16” label style 67 On the Design Bar. 71 In the Name dialog. and click OK. 66 In the Select Parameter dialog. and click to specify the label location. and select any labels that may need to be moved. Click Modify. enter 1/16" for Text Size. click . and click OK. click Left and Middle. click Label. click Edit/New. 77 In the Select Parameter dialog. and click to specify the label location. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 591 . select 1/16” Label. under Text. select Project Name. 64 In the Select Parameter dialog. click Duplicate. and click to specify the label location. 68 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 73 Click OK twice.63 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Project Number field. 72 In the Type Properties dialog. Add Project Path label 74 In the Type Selector. 78 On the Design Bar. 75 On the Options Bar. 70 In the Type Properties dialog. select File Path. click Modify. select Client Name. and then adjust the width of the File Path field so that it is approximately equal to the width of the Sheet Number field. 76 Place the cursor in the border area below the left side of the Sheet Number field. 69 In the Element Properties dialog. so that they are all aligned. enter 1/16" Label. and click OK.

3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. 6 In the Select a Titleblock dialog.rfa.79 Save the new titleblock family with the name Training D-Size Titleblock. 9 On the Options Bar. click . select it. text. 2 In the New Project dialog. Load the new titleblock family into a new project 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. and then click OK. The titleblock graphics.rte is the Template file and that Project is selected under Create new. click Load. 5 In the Open dialog. 7 Click OK. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. click Sheet.rfa file. Adding the Titleblock to a New Project In this exercise. navigate to the location of Training D-Size Titleblock. under Other. 11 Zoom in on the lower-right corner of the sheet. 4 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. enter Name for Drawn By. you add the titleblock that you created to a new project. verify that default. and select the titleblock. 592 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . select Training D-Size Titleblock. and labels are now complete. and click Open. Modify titleblock properties 8 On the Design Bar.

enter Office Building. For Project Status. For Project Name. 14 Click OK. enter Jane Smith. enter In Progress.12 On the Settings menu. 2005. click Project Information. Adding the Titleblock to a New Project | 593 . 13 In the Type Properties dialog. enter 2005-01. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. enter January 1. This completes the Creating a Titleblock Family lesson. For Client Name. For Project Number.

594 .

under Structural Plans. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. To use the Truss tool. This lesson comprises the following truss building exercises: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Add multiple trusses to an existing project by specifying the spans Create a custom truss by modifying the brace parameters Change the shape of a truss profile by attaching it to a roof Create a custom truss family using the Family Editor Create a truss using the drafting tools provided with Revit Structure Adding Trusses to a Project In this exercise. and web members. click Training Files. Add a roof truss by defining the span in plan view 1 In the Project Browser. you add predefined trusses to multiple locations within an existing project. bottom chord. placing them on the layout lines specified for the selected family. and open Imperial\i_RST_Add_Truss. The lines in the layout determine the placement of the sub-elements that comprise the truss: top chord. Revit Structure then creates the structural framing elements as necessary to draw the truss. double-click Roof. you learn how to use the truss building capabilities of Revit Structure 2009. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 595 . you select the truss family type and then specify the truss start point and endpoint in the drawing.Truss Building 18 In this tutorial. which creates the truss according to the layout and other parameters specified in whichever truss family type you select.rvt. Working with Trusses In Revit Structure you add a truss to your structure by using the Truss tool.

select Top. click ■ ■ ■ . Under Dimensions. click . 9 On the View toolbar.2 On the View toolbar. 8 Click the column at grid location A2 to select the endpoint of the truss span. do the following: Under Structural. for Bearing Chord. for Truss Height. click . 4 In the Type Selector. click Truss. and draw a zoom box around the columns on the upper-left corner of the model as shown. enter 6' 0". Click OK. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 5 On the Options Bar. 596 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . 7 Click the column at grid location A1 to select the start point of the truss span. select Howe Flat Truss: Standard. 6 In the Element Properties dialog.

12 Using the same method. Close the Warning dialog that indicates the selected flange is pinned. Modify the truss 10 Click the flange located at column location A2 as shown. 11 Press DELETE.The truss is placed between the columns. delete the extra flange at column location A1. Adding Trusses to a Project | 597 . Notice the extra flange at column locations A1 and A2 that will not be necessary for this span.

Copy the single truss 13 In the Project Browser. 16 On the Options bar. click (Copy). 15 On the View toolbar. double-click Roof. 17 Click the column at grid location A1 as shown. 598 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . 14 Select the truss placed in the previous steps. select Multiple. under Structural Plans.

click Modify. Adding Trusses to a Project | 599 . 25 On the View toolbar. 19 On the Design Bar. 23 Select the truss placed between grid location A1 and A2. 21 Enter ZF (keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit). under Structural Plans. click . click (Copy). double-click Roof. 20 On the View toolbar. Copy multiple trusses to the opposite end of the structure 22 In the Project Browser. select the remaining trusses.18 Click the columns at grid locations A2 and A3 to place copies of the original truss. 24 While pressing CTRL.

and then click the column at grid location E1 to select the copy endpoint as shown. click Truss. 28 On the View toolbar.26 Click the column at grid location A1 to select the copy start point. select Howe Flat Truss: Standard. click Modify. . 600 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . Add multiple trusses by defining the span in 3D view 30 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 27 On the Design Bar. 31 In the Type Selector. click 29 Enter ZF.

select Top. 35 Click the top endpoint of the column at grid location B4 to place the truss as shown. for Bearing Chord. enter 6' 0". do the following: Under Structural. Click OK. click ■ ■ ■ . 33 In the Element Properties dialog. for Truss Height. Adding Trusses to a Project | 601 .32 On the Options Bar. Under Dimensions. 34 Click the column at grid location B1 as shown.

click 39 Enter ZF. add trusses between columns C1.C4. 37 Using the same method.36 Enter ZF. 602 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . 38 On the View toolbar. and D1.D4. .

and draw a zoom box around the end of one of the trusses as 41 Select the flange at one end of the truss.Modify each truss 40 On the View toolbar. Adding Trusses to a Project | 603 . click shown .

select HSS-Hollow Structural Section: HSS6X6X. Click OK. 6 In the Name dialog. In the next exercise. for Structural Framing Type. ■ ■ ■ 604 | Chapter 18 Truss Building .500. and open Imperial\i_RST_Customize_Truss_Parameters.rvt. do the following: ■ Under Vertical Webs. click . enter 90. Under Diagonal Webs. click Duplicate. and click OK. 43 Close the Warning dialog that indicates the selected flange is pinned. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. a new training file is supplied. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Under Bottom Chords. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. Customizing Truss Parameters In this exercise. 7 In the Type Properties dialog.500. 45 Click File menu ➤ Close. In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Structural Framing Type. Create a new truss type for the short span 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select Howe Flat Truss: Standard. for Angle. 46 Proceed to the next exercise. click Truss.Short Span. you create a custom truss for both the short and long spans by modifying the truss type parameters. and repeat for the remaining trusses. 44 Using the same method. Customizing Truss Parameters on page 604. delete the flange on the opposite end of the same truss. 3 On the Options Bar. enter Howe Flat Truss .42 Press DELETE. select HSS-Hollow Structural Section: HSS6X6X. click Training Files. 2 In the Type Selector. You can save the open file if you wish. click Edit/New.

click 14 Enter ZF. 10 On the View toolbar. 12 Using the same method. 13 On the View toolbar. click select the truss as shown.Short Span. select Howe Flat Truss: Howe Flat Truss . Apply the new truss type 9 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. click OK. draw a zoom box around one of the short trusses. and then NOTE Check the Status Bar to make sure you are selecting the truss and not a chord or web. Customizing Truss Parameters | 605 . 11 In the Type Selector. . The truss changes to the new type.8 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click 3D. . change the remaining short trusses to the new type.

click Edit/New. click . 19 In the Type Properties dialog. for Structural Framing Type. click OK. and then 606 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . click select the truss as shown. draw a zoom box around one of the long trusses. for Structural Framing Type. and click OK. select Howe Flat Truss: Standard. . 24 On the View toolbar. 17 On the Options Bar. enter Howe Flat Truss . do the following: ■ Under Vertical Webs. 18 In the Element Properties dialog.500. under 3D Views. ■ ■ 22 In the Element Properties dialog. 20 In the Name dialog. double-click 3D. click Truss. 16 In the Type Selector.500.Roof Span. select HSS-Hollow Structural Section: HSS6X6X. Under Diagonal Webs.Create a new truss type for the roof span 15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Click OK. select HSS-Hollow Structural Section: HSS6X6X. Apply the new truss type 23 In the Project Browser. click Duplicate. 21 In the Type Properties dialog.

click 28 Enter ZF.Roof Span. 26 Using the same method.NOTE Check the Status Bar to make sure you are selecting the truss and not a single truss flange. . 25 In the Type Selector. select Howe Flat Truss: Howe Flat Truss . Customizing Truss Parameters | 607 . change the remaining long trusses to the new type. 27 On the View toolbar. The truss changes to the new type.

In the next exercise. Modifying the Shape of a Truss In this exercise. 2 On the View toolbar. 30 Proceed to the next exercise. you change the shape of a truss profile by attaching it to an existing roof. a new training file is supplied.29 Click File menu ➤ Close. double-click 3D. You can save the open file if you wish. under 3D Views.rvt. click Training Files. and then select the truss as shown. Modifying the Shape of a Truss on page 608. Select all trusses 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click . and open Imperial\i_RST_Truss_Change_Shape. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 608 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . draw a zoom box around a truss on the upper-left corner of the structure.

(Attach/Detach Top Chord). click 5 Select the roof as shown. Attach the roof 4 On the Options Bar. Modifying the Shape of a Truss | 609 . All instances of the truss will be highlighted.3 Click Edit menu ➤ Select All Instances.

9 On the View toolbar. vertical webs. and diagonal webs of each truss will attach itself to the shape of the roof. 6 On the Design bar. click . 11 Click File menu ➤ Close. a new training file is supplied. click Modify. 10 On the View Control Bar. Creating a Custom Truss Family on page 611. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. In the next exercise. Notice the shape of the top chord and structural webs are modified to match the roof profile. and draw a zoom box around a roof truss as shown. View the custom truss 7 Select the roof. You can save the open file if you wish.The top chords. 8 On the View Control Bar. 610 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. 12 Proceed to the next exercise.

click Dimension. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. 5 Sketch 5 vertical reference planes approximately as shown. Creating a Custom Truss Family | 611 . and open Imperial\i_RST_Truss_Custom_Family.Creating a Custom Truss Family In this exercise. click Ref Plane. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog.rft located in the Imperial folder. 6 On the Design Bar. you use the Revit Structure Family Editor to create a custom truss family. and place dimensions to each reference plane as shown. Open the truss family 1 Click File ➤ New ➤ Family. click the Training Files icon. 3 Open Structural_Trusses. Sketch web reference planes 4 On the Design Bar. click Training Files.

612 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . Sketch top and bottom chords 9 On the Design Bar. 8 Using the same method.7 Click the EQ symbol to apply equal constraints. click Truss Top Chord. 10 Sketch the truss top chord as shown. place additional vertical reference planes to complete the web pattern as shown.

15 Snap to the intersection of the top chord and reference plane as shown. Truss Bottom Chord. 14 Click the intersection of the bottom chord and the first vertical reference plane to set the start point of the first truss web as shown. click Truss Web.11 On the Design Bar. Sketch truss webs 13 On the Design Bar. Creating a Custom Truss Family | 613 . 12 Sketch the truss bottom chord as shown.

select Family Files (rfa). 21 In the Load into Projects dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Save in. click Modify. Save the new truss family 18 Click File menu ➤ Save As. click Load into Projects. For File name. enter Custom_Truss. 17 On the Design Bar. and click OK. Click OK. 614 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . 19 In the Save As dialog. For Save as type.16 Using the same method.rvt. You are now in the project file. add remaining truss webs to complete the pattern as shown. navigate to a folder of your choice. select i_RST_Truss_Custom_Family. Load the truss into the project 20 On the Design Bar.

27 In the Project Browser. Creating a Custom Truss Family | 615 . double-click Level 2. double-click 3D. under 3D Views. under Structural Plans. 23 On the Design Bar. click Truss.Place the custom truss 22 In the Project Browser. 25 Click the column at grid location A1 to establish the start point of the truss. 26 Click the column at grid location A4 to establish the endpoint of the truss as shown. select Custom_Truss. 24 In the Type Selector. 28 Repeat the same method to place additional trusses as shown.

a new training file is supplied. 616 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . in the Imperial Templates folder. click OK. 7 Draw 2 grid lines approximately as shown. and a framing elevation. 4 In the New Project dialog. Finally. select Structural Analysis-Default. double-click Level 2. Building a Truss with Drafting Tools on page 616. You can save the open file if you wish. create column grids. In the next exercise. you open a new project and create the top and bottom chords using the beam tool. 6 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Create grids 5 In the Project Browser. you add braces to form the steel truss. Building a Truss with Drafting Tools In this exercise.rte. 30 Proceed to the next exercise. click Browse.29 Click File menu ➤ Close. click Grid. 3 In the Choose Template dialog. under Structural Plans. Create a new project 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. and click Open. 2 In the New Project dialog.

Sketch horizontal reference planes 14 In the Project Browser. click Framing Elevation. Place support columns 10 On the Design Bar. and press ENTER. and place approximately as shown.) 13 Click the Framing Elevation symbol.Add framing elevations 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 17 Click the dimension. 15 On the Design Bar. select W-Wide Flange Column: W10 x 49. 16 Place a horizontal reference plane above Level 2. (The dimensions are displayed for reference purposes only. and drag the blue handles beyond each column as shown . double-click Elevation 1 . click Structural Column. 12 Place 2 columns on each grid line spaced approximately 70' 0" apart as shown. enter 5' 0". 9 Select each grid line. under Elevations (Interior Elevation).a. 11 In the Type Selector. click Ref Plane. Building a Truss with Drafting Tools | 617 .

and enter 15' 0". 19 Click the dimension. 18 Place a second horizontal reference plane above the first. 618 | Chapter 18 Truss Building .The dimensions are displayed for reference purposes only. Place vertical reference planes 20 On the Design Bar. 22 Press ESC. click Ref Plane. Place multiple reference planes using the array tool 23 Select the reference plane on the left column as shown. 21 Snap to the center of the left column and draw a vertical reference plane that extends beyond the top horizontal plane as shown.

29 In the Type Selector. click . select W-Wide Flange: W12 x 26. Place top and bottom chords 28 On the Design Bar. The array is complete. 27 Enter 7 for array count. and press ENTER. and snap to the center of the right column to identify the array length. click Beam. Building a Truss with Drafting Tools | 619 .24 On the Tools toolbar. 26 Drag the array to the right. 25 Click the left vertical reference plane to identify the array start point.

When placing beams. make sure you snap to the intersections of the reference planes. 31 Using reference planes as a guide. Place braces 32 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Fix corner joint 35 On the View toolbar. click truss as shown. 33 In the Type Selector. select W-Wide Flange: W12 x 26. . select 3D Snapping. When placing braces.30 On the Tools toolbar. make sure you snap to the intersections of the reference planes. click Brace. create the top and bottom chords of the truss by placing beams as shown. create cross-braces by placing braces as shown. 34 Using the vertical reference planes as a guide. and draw a zoom box around the upper-right corner of the 620 | Chapter 18 Truss Building .

click . 38 On the Tools toolbar. Building a Truss with Drafting Tools | 621 . and sketch a vertical ref plane as shown. 39 Select the vertical ref plane. 37 Snap to the outer surface of the brace.36 On the Design Bar. click Ref Plane. then select the edge of the top chord as shown.

40 The edge of the top chord will align with the vertical brace as shown. View the truss 41 In the Project Browser. 622 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . under 3D Views. double-click 3D.

Building a Truss with Drafting Tools | 623 . 43 Save the file to a folder location of you choice.The completed truss is displayed. 42 Click File menu ➤ Save. You have completed the Truss Builder tutorial.

624 .

For example.Creating Multiple Design Options 19 When working with a building model. Because all design options coexist in the project with the main model (the main model consists of elements not specifically assigned to a design option). you learn how to create and manage multiple design sets and options within a single building model. you create multiple design schemes within a single project file. 625 . These schemes can be conceptual or can be detailed engineering designs. you can have multiple sets of design options. you can study and modify each design option and present the options to the client. Using design options. you can have an option set for the roof structure with multiple subordinate structural design schemes. In this tutorial. it is common to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. In addition. you can have an option set called roofing with multiple subordinate roofing schemes. and each option set can have multiple schemes. After you and the client agree on the final design. At any time in the design process. you can designate a primary design scheme for each option set. Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project You can use design options to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops.

Each option set represents a portion of the building model wherein design alternatives are being considered. you create a unique in-place family as the structural system. the task is to develop two roof schemes for an addition to an existing house. Creating the Structural Design Options In this exercise. you set up multiple design option sets. The client has asked you to create various options. In the second exercise. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options.rvt. you create two roof system design options that work with the structural options. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Create first design option 1 On the Tools menu. In the first exercise in this lesson. Notice Option Set 1 has been created with a design option: Option 1 (primary). therefore. The first time you open the Design Options dialog within a project. In the final exercise of this lesson. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. TIP In this exercise. you set up the design option names and add the modeling elements to the structural design option set. and open Imperial\i_Urban_House. you can edit it. 2 In the Design Options dialog. under Option Set. click Training Files. the only available command is to create a new option set. you learn how to manage and organize the design options. There is no limit to the number of option sets you can create. After you create a design option. The client is interested in a pergola and sunshade for the roof terrace but is not sure of the specific layout or materials. each is constructed for interchangeability. Any new elements introduced at that time become part of that option. each with multiple design options. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. the roof and structure systems must work together. These three exercises are designed to be completed sequentially with the second and third exercises dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. make your final design decision. and delete the unwanted options from the project. click New. 626 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options . With the second option. you design each of the structural options.In this particular case. This option will be the first structural scheme consisting of 3"round columns and 2" round bars.

You should delete the dimension and unconstrain after adding the column. click 12 On the Options Bar. 7 In the Type Selector. Any new elements introduced to the building model are added to this option. Because it is important that you select the same location on the notches you copy to. make sure you select a point that is easily recognizable. and zoom in on the upper half of the building model. 9 On the Design Bar. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. Selecting Constrain limits the movement and helps ensure the post-copy alignment of the columns. select Round Column: 03" Diameter. Creating the Structural Design Options | 627 . and click the EQ symbol to equalize the segments. add three columns. or add a dimension string between the columns. The left column should be centered at the intersection of the notch and the wall. expand Floor Plans. In the following illustration. and double-click ROOF TERRACE. the midpoint of the lower notch line is selected. and the third column centered between the two. In this case. either add a centered reference plane and snap the column to it. and the second click specifies the point on the building model the reference point is copied to. click Column. the second column directly across from it at the intersection of the two walls. you can continue adding new copies without reselecting the reference point (the first click). select: ■ ■ ■ . 8 Using the following illustration as a guide. 6 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar. The first click specifies the reference point on the element to be copied. 13 Zoom in around the left column that is embedded in the notch.3 Select Option 1 (primary). 11 On the Edit toolbar. 10 Select the three columns either by dragging a pick box around them or by selecting them individually while holding CTRL. 14 Click at an identifiable part of the notch construction. TIP To center the middle column. click Modify. expand Views (all). 5 On the View menu. the three columns need to be copied three times to create a 3 x 4 grid of 12 columns. 4 In the Project Browser. By selecting Multiple. Arrows and the dimension lines have been added for training purposes only. and click Close. Constrain Copy Multiple The Copy command is a two-click process. click Edit Selected.

628 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options . using the same technique. 16 Zoom in around the notch construction. When you are finished. A copy of the three selected columns is added. 15 Zoom out and move downward to the notch just below this one.TIP You can zoom in and out easily during this process using the wheel on your wheel mouse. 17 Zoom out and. add a copy of the columns to the next two notches below this one. click . Because of the size of the columns. 18 On the View toolbar. they are difficult to see in this view. click Modify on the Design Bar to end the copy process. and click in the same location as you did for the previous notch.

double-click TOP OF CORE. select Round Bar : 2". you add the beams that span the columns. 24 Select the Beam you added previously. 19 In the Project Browser. and click on the center to set the beam endpoint. 23 On the Design Bar. Zoom in on the upper right column. 22 Add the first beam between the upper left and right columns by using the following steps: ■ ■ ■ Zoom in on the upper-left column. Adding a beam is a two-click process. click Modify. You can do this manually or use the Copy command. click Beam. Creating the Structural Design Options | 629 . and click at its center to set the beam start point. two callouts with thin lines have been added to clarify the location of the start and end points of the beam. The first click specifies the beam start point. The beam needs to be added between the remaining columns. under Floor Plans. Use the following illustration as a guide.Notice the 12 columns that you added. The second click specifies the end of the beam. 20 On the tab of the Design Bar. Next. Zoom out and move the cursor over the upper right column. 21 In the Type Selector. In it.

28 Zoom out.25 On the Edit toolbar. zoom into the left column. Constrain Copy Multiple 27 Zoom in around the upper left column that is embedded in the notch. and select the center of the column to add a copy. select: ■ ■ ■ . click 26 On the Options Bar. 30 On the View toolbar. 29 Repeat this step twice more until a beam is added to each set of columns. This is the reference point for the subsequent copies. move down to the next set of columns. 630 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options . click . and click the center point.

enter Roofing for New. 41 Under Option Set. click Rename. click Rename. and click OK. under Option. and click OK. and click OK. under Option. 38 In the Rename dialog. 46 Under Option. click Rename. There should now be two roofing design options. Organize design option sets and subordinate options 31 On the Tools menu. 40 In the Rename dialog. enter Brackets for New. under Option Set. enter Beam for New. 34 In the Design Options dialog. click New. 37 Select Option 2 and. 39 Select Option Set 1 and. 42 Select Option Set 1 and. click Rename. under Option Set. 45 Under Roofing. notice that you are still editing Option Set 1: Option 1 (primary). 43 In the Rename dialog. NOTE Be sure you are creating a new option. 33 Click Finish Editing. under Option. under Option. name the option Louvers.Notice that the beams complete the bracket structure for the proposed roof. and click OK. Logically naming the option sets and relative options allows you to more easily manage them. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. Creating the Structural Design Options | 631 . 35 Select Option 1 (primary) and. click New. and click OK. 36 In the Rename dialog. select Option 1 (primary). not a new option set. 44 Select the option set Roofing and. enter Structure for New. 32 In the Design Options dialog. click New. click Rename.

54 Zoom in toward the top of the roof terrace near the stairs. When finished. under Floor Plans. select Option 2. This allows you to more easily manage the project. double-click ROOF TERRACE. select Beam. name the option Sunscreen. you create the second design option. 53 In the Project Browser. 51 Under Edit. select Edit Selected. 50 In the Design Options dialog. click Rename. Under Now Editing. Design the second structural design option 49 In this section of the exercise. it will resemble the following illustration. notice that Structure: Beam is displayed.47 Under Roofing. and click OK. under Structure. 632 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options . 48 Under Option. 52 Click Close. You have completed the initial setup of the design option sets and their subordinate design option names. Notice that the columns added to the Brackets design option do not display.

click Component. Using the Align tool requires two clicks.55 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Align. 58 On the Tools menu. 59 Align the roof beam by clicking the lower edge of the adjacent horizontal wall and then clicking the lower edge of the roof beam. select Roof Beam. The first click sets the plane that the object will be aligned to. Creating the Structural Design Options | 633 . The second click represents the plane that is moved. 57 Place a roof beam into the drawing area as shown. Refer to the following illustration. 56 In the Type Selector.

62 Select the beam and. The first click sets the move start point. 634 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options . 61 On the Design Bar.60 After aligning the beam. Clear Group and Associate Enter 4 for number Select 2nd for Move To: Select Constrain Using the Array tool requires two clicks. click Modify. click 63 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ . click the padlock that displays to lock the alignment. 64 Click the start point at the alignment of the beam and wall as shown. The second click represents the move end point. on the Edit toolbar. 65 Move the cursor down to the next intersection of the lower edge of the horizontal wall and the beam. Click to indicate the end point of the move.

You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. click Save As. which is visible by default. 66 On the View toolbar. Notice the new design option for the structural elements supporting the roof system. 68 In the Design Options dialog. NOTE If you intend to continue with the next exercise. 69 Click Close. 70 On the File menu. 67 On the Tools menu. you need this file in its current state. the 3D view has reverted back to the brackets rather than the structural beams you just created. That is because the brackets option is set to primary. 71 Navigate to your preferred directory. click Finish Editing. Creating the Structural Design Options | 635 . name the file. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. and click Save. Design option visibility is covered in more detail later in the tutorial.Three more roof beams are placed at the same intersection as the first beam. click . i_Urban_House-in progress. Notice that even before you close the dialog.rvt.

The first option. place the rafter 3' 0" inside the wall shown and overlap the horizontal beam 3'. expand Floor Plans. is a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. If you have not completed the first exercise in this tutorial. Sunscreen. is constructed of 2" x 10"rafters and 2" x 6" louvers. In the next exercise. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. 2 On the Tools menu. the other for beams. 636 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options . 10 Referring to the following illustration. 8 In the Type Selector.rvt. click Component. Create the first roofing design option 1 If you do not have the project file that you saved at the end of the previous exercise open. 4 Under Edit. you designed each of the structural options: one for brackets. a Louver system. Creating the Roof System Design Options In this exercise. and double-click TOP OF CORE. 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you create the roof systems that compliment these structural design options. open it now. do so now. expand Views (all). After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. you set up multiple design option sets.In this exercise. delete them after the rafter is in place. each with multiple design options to pick from. You should have named it i_Urban_House-in progress. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. you created a unique in-place family as the structural system. The dimensions shown are for training purposes. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. 9 Zoom in on the lower half of the building model until you can see the bottom set of columns and the beam traversing the span. Under Now Editing. 6 In the Project Browser. 5 Click Close. 3 In the Design Options dialog. under Roofing. Roofing: Louvers (primary) should display. select Louvers (primary). you design each of the roofing options. click Edit Selected. With the second option. If you need to add dimensions. select Rafter 2 x 10. The second roofing system.

11 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 13 On the Options Bar. under Other. click in the center of the intersection to specify the array start point. Enter 5 for Number. 15 On the Edit menu. and click OK. You are creating an array of five rafters that are 3' 3" apart. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. Select Constrain. 12 Select the rafter you added previously. click Modify. click . click Array. enter 38' 6" for Length. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. 16 On the Options Bar. The rafter should now span the entire vertical length of the proposed roof system. Select 2nd for Move To. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 637 . 17 Zoom in on the intersection of the lower end of the rafter and the intersecting beam.

when the listening dimension displays.18 Move the cursor horizontally to the right and. 638 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options . and press ENTER. you do not need to type the foot and inch markers. you can enter 3 3. For example. Zoom out to see that the rafter array is created. The space separates feet and inches. TIP When entering a dimension value. rather than entering 3' 3". enter 3' 3".

click . specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 639 . 24 In the Element Properties dialog. 25 With the louver still selected. and. when the listening dimension displays. select Louver 2 x 6. The louver now spans the horizontal plane of the roof system. Select Constrain. and click OK. 26 On the Options Bar. 23 On the Options Bar. Select 2nd for Move To. click the Edit menu. Enter 34 for Number. under Other. and click Array.Add the louvers to the design option 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 28 Move the cursor vertically downward. 20 In the Type Selector. 27 For the array starting point. click Modify. click Component. 22 On the Design Bar. enter 1’. and select the louver you just placed. 21 Place the first horizontal louver in the upper left corner according to the following illustration. and press Enter. click in the center of any intersection between the louver and the beam. enter 17' 6 1/2" for Length.

click Design Options ➤ Design Options. 29 On the View toolbar.Zoom out to see that the 34 louvers array 1' 0" apart. The louver roof system is complete. 640 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options . click Finish Editing. under Edit. The louver roof system still displays in the 3D view because it is the primary option. 31 In the Design Options dialog. 30 On the Tools menu. click .

40 On the Options Bar. select Reference Plane : Roof Extrusion for Name. This tool allows you to sketch an arc line using three points. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 641 . In this case. under Roofing. 33 Under Editing. try to get the angle value as close to 60 degrees as possible. expand Elevations. click . Do not be too concerned if your sketch lines do not exactly connect. then you can modify it through the dimension. The roof extrusion reference plane has been added to the training file specifically for this purpose and is hidden in all views. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. 35 Zoom in on the upper level where the roof design is taking place. Because an extruded roof has a roof type associated with it. 37 In the Work Plane dialog. and click OK. 42 Repeat the previous step and create two more arcs between the columns. 34 In the Project Browser. Therefore.Create sunscreen roof system 32 In the Design Options dialog. The first two points define the ends of the line. click Lines. Notice that the louver roof system no longer displays. 38 You are prompted to verify the roof level and offset. you only need to sketch a single line or a string of lines to define the shape of the extruded roof. the sketch should be a series of arcs connected at the ends where they connect to the columns. 43 On the Design Bar. 41 Select the top of the left column. NOTE As you sketch the arcs. and double-click West. and then adjust the dip of the arc until it is 60 degrees. and then click Close. the top of the next column on the right. 39 On the Design Bar. you must create a draped canvas sunscreen. click Edit Selected. Click OK. 36 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar. You can adjust the degrees by clicking the blue temporary dimension value immediately after you create the line. click Properties. select Sunscreen. You will fix this in a later step. and the third point defines the arc.

Select the right arc. then the center arc. 46 On the Tools menu. click Trim/Extend. was a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. The easiest way to accomplish this is to use the Trim tool. The second roofing system. 51 In the Design Options dialog. a Louver system. You have completed the sunscreen roof system. you designed each of the roofing options. In this exercise. under Edit. You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. 49 On the View toolbar. click Save. Under Constraints. You must make sure the arcs are connected where they connect to the columns. NOTE If you intend to continue with the final exercise. enter 1' 0" for Extrusion Start. 47 Select the left arc and then the center arc. 52 On the File menu. The louver roof system is complete. 642 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options . enter -19' 0"for Extrusion End. 48 On the Design Bar. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. 50 On the Tools menu. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. Sunscreen. The roof sketch must be a continuous line. click Finish Editing. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Sunscreen Fabric for Type. was constructed of 2" x 10"rafters and 2" x 6"louvers. you need this file in its current state. 45 Click OK. Under Constraints. click . The first option.44 In the Element Properties dialog. click Finish Sketch. The arcs should connect. and then click Close.

and click OK. and last options. click Visibility/Graphics. 8 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. right-click {3D}. click Visibility/Graphics. expand 3D Views. Managing Design Options | 643 . under Views (all). you must create a named 3D view for the primary. Repeat this step two more times until you have three copies of the view. 10 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate. and click Rename. and click Rename. and delete the discarded design options. 11 On the View menu. under Views (all). This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. Notice that both option sets are set to automatic. under 3D Views. 3 In the Rename View dialog. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. Create new views for each design option 1 In the Project Browser. click the Design Options tab. 5 Right-click each of the copies. Rename the three copies as follows: ■ ■ ■ Secondary Option Tertiary Option Last Option 6 In the Project Browser. you explore how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations. do so now. This ensures that the primaries (currently bracket and louver) are visible. under Views (all). secondary. double-click Secondary Option. tertiary. enter Primary Option. If you have not completed the previous exercises in this tutorial. under 3D Views. double-click Primary Option. click the Design Options tab. you select a design. right-click the 3D View Primary Option. After exploring the combinations. under 3D Views. 4 In the Project Browser. 2 In the Project Browser. Because the client wants to see 3D building models of each of the designs.Managing Design Options In this exercise. 7 On the View menu. 12 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 9 Click OK. under Views (all). make it part of the building model.

18 In the Project Browser. 19 On the View menu. double-click Last Option. click Visibility/Graphics. 21 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. 644 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options . double-click Tertiary Option. under 3D Views. click the Design Options tab. and click OK. 17 Specify Brackets for the Structure design option. under Views (all). specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option.13 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. click the Design Options tab. 20 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and click OK. 14 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. and click OK. 15 On the View menu. specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option. under Views (all). 16 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click Visibility/Graphics.

double-click Primary Option. click Yes. 31 In the alert dialog. click Accept Primary to take the louvers into the model. click Close. select Beam. In this case. An alert is displayed. In your design options. delete the other design option geometry and any dedicated option views. but should be accepted as part of the building model. Managing Design Options | 645 . under Structure. the client has reviewed the design options and has decided that the beam system coupled with the louver roofing system is the preferred design. all isometric views are ready to be placed on a titleblock or exported and e-mailed to the client. 25 Select Structure. 33 In the Design Options dialog.At this point. 30 Under Option Set. 29 Select Roofing. 26 Under Option Set. the current primaries are no longer options. The set is deleted. Because the client has selected the design option. click Yes. the beam option becomes part of the model. click Delete to remove the views that used options. select Make Primary. 27 In the alert dialog. 22 On the Tools menu. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. click Delete. The other options were removed along with any dedicated option views. and you get a dialog asking if you want to delete dedicated option views. asking if you are sure you want to delete all elements of secondary options in this option set and remove the option set. 23 In the Design Options dialog. click Accept Primary. the beam and the louver roofing should be selected as primary. 34 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. 32 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. This was the client choice for structural. 28 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. 24 Under Option. since you no longer need them.

After exploring the combinations. you learned how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations. made it part of the building model. click Save. and deleted the discarded design options. 646 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options . you selected a design. 35 On the File menu.The beam and louver systems are now part of the building model. In this exercise.

Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates 20 Many projects consist of disparate buildings in an overall campus. Comparison of alternatives on a site. You position the building models on the site plan. and manage the links throughout the project. In these situations. you can use model linking and shared coordinates to create the campus within one project file while allowing work to proceed on the individual building models in other project files. A residential development in which a few different prototypes are configured differently in an area. you share the coordinates so that the linked files remember their location within the host project. In this tutorial. performance. 647 . Specific examples when you may want to use model linking and shared coordinates: ■ ■ ■ A campus plan that contains links to several structures. you link several building models within a single project file in which only a site plan has been developed. This maximizes efficiency. modify their visibility. In the final lesson. and productivity by working in a smaller project file while retaining the ability to place that building model into a larger context. or of a group of related but semi-independent sub-projects.

and manage their locations in coordination with their originating project files. you work within a project in which only the site components have been developed. Automatic placement options: ■ Auto . One building model is a condominium.Linking Building Models In this lesson. NOTE You must complete the exercises in this lesson in sequence. you have the option to manually place the linked building model or allow Revit Structure 2009 to automatically place it. modify their visibility. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files In this exercise. NOTE The center of a Revit Structure model is the center of the model geometry. and the other is a townhouse. This center changes as the footprint of your model changes. 648 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . You link multiple instances of one building model and a single instance of another.Center to Center: Revit Structure places the center of the imported geometry at the center of the model. You position the building models on the site. you open a project in which only site components have been developed. You link two building models to the project. Placement options when linking building models When you link a building model in a project.

■ ■ Manual . Link condo complex into site project 9 On the File menu. ■ Manual placement options: ■ Manual . navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first step.■ Auto . this option will place the link at a predefined location. 4 On the File menu. NOTE Revit Structure projects have an internal coordinate system.Base Point: Not applicable for linked Revit Structure Files. you need to copy the three training files to a different directory and make them writable. select the three files. ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder. NOTE You may need to scroll down in the left pane to see the Training Files folder. with write permission. 8 Clear Read-only. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 649 . and click Properties. click Open. This option is grayed out. Otherwise. 5 On the File menu. All three files now reside. right-click. c_Condo_Complex. 6 Repeat the previous five steps for the following files: ■ ■ c_Townhouse c_Condo_Complex 7 Open the Model Linking folder. and save the file there.rvt. you can do so. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models on page 665. click Open. Because training files are used in multiple tutorials and are normally installed as read-only.Origin: The origin of the linked document is centered on the cursor. click Close. Select c_Site.Origin to Origin: The origin of the imported geometry is placed at the invisible origin of the Revit Structure model. this system is not exposed to the user. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Auto . The required files can be found in the Common folder of the Training files: c_Site. however. and open Common\c_Site.By Shared Coordinates: When using Model Linking in conjunction with Shared Coordinates. click Training Files. in the Model Linking folder that you created. RELATED See the lesson. 2 On the File menu. Manual . c_Townhouse. use the following steps to copy the training files to a new location. If you are comfortable doing this using Windows Explorer. and click OK. click Save As.Center: The geometric center of the linked document is at the cursor location. This tutorial requires write permission to all the training files used. Save training files to different folder 1 Create a new folder on your hard drive called Model Linking.

650 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . Notice the blue detail lines. and double-click Level 1. 13 Click Open. 11 On the File menu.■ Click Open. These represent the footprint outlines of the three building model sites. For Positioning. expand Floor Plans. select Auto . expand Views (all).Origin to Origin. The condo complex building model is placed approximately at the center of the site model. 12 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder and select c_Condo_Complex. 10 In the Project Browser. click Import/Link ➤ Revit.

click the upper-left corner of the linked condo complex building model. click (Move). The Move command requires two clicks.rvt displays in the Type Selector. click the upper-left corner of the matching blue detail lines above it. similar to the behavior of imported DWG objects. 16 For the move start point. Linked Revit Model: c_Condo_Complex. the linked file displays within the confines of the blue detail lines.Move the condo complex building model 14 Select the linked building model. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 651 . 15 On the Edit toolbar. After you specify the location to move to. 17 For the move endpoint. The linked model moves as one object. Standard move commands work with linked building models. After you select it. The first click specifies the move start point. The second click specifies the move endpoint.

click Import/Link ➤ Revit. Link the townhouse building model 19 On the File menu. The townhouse building model displays above the site model. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. For Positioning. 652 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . and select c_Townhouse. select Auto . 21 Click Open. Rotate the townhouse 22 Zoom in around the townhouse model and select it.Origin to Origin.18 On the View menu. 20 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder.

25 Move the cursor 90 degrees clockwise. 24 Place the cursor just north of the townhouse and. To rotate an object. In this case. and then click to specify the end of the rotation. and click to specify the end of the rotation.23 On the Edit toolbar. when the vertical line displays. the townhouse must be rotated 90 degrees clockwise. click to specify the rotation start point. you first specify the rotation start point. click (Rotate). Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 653 .

The rotated townhouse should resemble the following illustration. Move the townhouse 26 On the Edit toolbar. Do not be concerned if the detail lines do not match the exact footprint of the townhouse. 27 Click the lower-left corner of the townhouse building model as the move start point. click (Move). This townhouse building model needs to be moved inside the blue detail lines in the lower-left corner of the site model. 654 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . 28 Select the lower-left corner of the lower-left set of blue detail lines as the move endpoint.

Copy the townhouse 29 On the Edit toolbar. 31 Select the upper-right corner of the blue detail lines on the right to specify the copy-to point. The first click specifies the start point. The Copy command works much like the Move command.The townhouse is located within its required footprint. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 655 . select the upper-right corner of the townhouse. 30 For the starting point. click (Copy). and the second click specifies the copy-to point.

click (Default 3D View). 32 On the Edit menu. under Identity data. 36 Use the same technique to name the instance of the Townhouse on the right to Townhouse B. enter Townhouse A. 656 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . 33 Click the first instance of the townhouse on the left. for Name. and click OK. 35 In the Element Properties dialog. use the Move command to make any adjustments. and rotate the townhouse 180 degrees. NOTE After you rotate the townhouse. click . if it does not fit reasonably well within the detail lines.A copy of the townhouse displays on the right side of the site project. 34 On the Options Bar. click Rotate. 37 On the View toolbar.

In this exercise. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. click (SteeringWheels). click Try Me for the Full Nav Large Wheel. Repositioning Linked Building Models | 657 . If you have not completed the previous exercise. click Save. After linking the files. you modify the elevation of the townhouses. you linked two separate Revit Structure 2009 models into a site model. and then spin the model until it resembles the following illustration. you rotated and moved the building models to fit them into their designated positions within the site development. When you originally linked the files.38 On the File menu. you need this project file open and in this view. do so before continuing. In this exercise. click and hold Orbit. they were placed too low within the site topography. NOTE If this is the first time you are using the SteeringWheels. you reposition the townhouses in respect to their elevation. you modify their vertical position so that the townhouses sit correctly on the site. 2 On the SteeringWheels. Repositioning Linked Building Models In this exercise. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise in this tutorial and the resulting project files. Modify the vertical position of the townhouses 1 On the View toolbar. In the next exercise.

rvt. 5 Place the cursor over the townhouse and notice that. and click to select it. This process ensures that you are aligning to the level marker in the site project and not to the linked condo complex project.Notice that the townhouse is not at the proper elevation in relationship to the site toposurface. and then select the plane that you want to align. 3 In the Project Browser. when it highlights. you use the Align command to reposition the linked model within this project. you align the Ground Floor level to Level 1 of the site plan. In the steps that follow. This is apparent because there is a planter below ground level that was designed to sit on top of the site surface. move the cursor over the Ground Floor level of the Townhouse project. TIP Place the cursor over the Level 1 line of the Site project. you first select the plane you want to align to. and click OK. 6 Zoom in closer on the lower half of the townhouse and notice the ground floor level of the townhouse is 11 feet below Level 1 of the site project. Click the Revit Links tab. 4 Zoom in around the townhouse on the left. under Views (all). 7 On the Tools toolbar. If you experience difficulty finding the Level1 : Reference. Remember to turn on visibility of the Condo Complex after you have completed this task. 658 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . In this case. clear Visibility for the c_Condo_Complex. press TAB until Level 1 : Reference displays in the status bar. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. expand Elevations. When using the Align command. click (Align). 8 Select the Level 1 line of the Site project. and double-click South. To do this. you may want to hide the Condo Complex from the view. the status bar displays the name of the linked file. and click to select the line.

Notice that the townhouse is now at the proper height within this project. Also notice the option displays for you to lock the alignment. Do not lock the alignment of the linked file. This would over-constrain the model. 9 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click North. 10 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps, align the Ground Floor level of the remaining townhouse to Level 1 of the Site project.

11 Return to the South elevation view. Both townhouses should be at the proper level.

12 On the View toolbar, click 13 On the View toolbar, click

(Default 3D View). (SteeringWheels).

14 On the SteeringWheels, click and hold Orbit, and then spin the model until it resembles the following illustration.

15 On the File menu, click Save.

Repositioning Linked Building Models | 659

NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial, you need this project file open and in this view. In this exercise, you changed the elevation of the townhouses relative to the host project. As you can see, each linked file can have a separate set of levels and relative heights and you can accommodate those differences within the host project. In the next exercise, you modify how the linked files display within the host project.

Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility
In this exercise, you modify the visibility settings of the linked files within the site project. After you link a Revit Structure 2009 project file within another project, you can independently control the visibility settings, detail level, display settings, and the halftone settings for each linked project. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files. If you have not completed the previous exercise, do so before continuing. Modify visibility settings 1 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click South. 2 On the View menu, click Visibility/Graphics. 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog, click the Revit Links tab. 4 Under Visibility, expand c_Townhouse.rvt. Notice that you can change visibility settings of an entire linked file or selected instances of a linked file. NOTE You have three options for controlling visibility settings of a linked file. By host view matches the display to the settings of the current active project view. By linked view matches the display to the settings of the linked project view. Custom allows you to override specific visibility settings for a linked project or an instance of the linked project. When you link a file, the defaults are set to By host view for all options. 5 Under Display Settings for c_Townhouse.rvt, click By Host View. 6 On the Basics tab of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. If the Basics page is set to Custom, then the other pages on the RVT Link Display Settings dialog may be set to By host View, By linked view, or Custom. 7 Click the Annotations Categories tab. 8 For Annotation Categories, select <Custom>. 9 Under Visibility, scroll down and clear Levels. 10 Click OK. 11 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog, click OK. Notice the Level lines for both townhouses no longer display.

NOTE Changes to Visibility/Graphics are per view only. The townhouse level lines still display in the remaining elevation views.

660 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates

12 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps, clear the Levels display for c_Condo_Complex.rvt.

Apply halftone 13 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1. 14 On the View menu, click Visibility/Graphics. 15 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog, click the Revit Links tab. 16 Under Visibility, expand c_Townhouse.rvt. Notice the option to halftone individual instances of the townhouse model. 17 Select Halftone for the Townhouse project, and click OK. Halftone displays objects with half their normal darkness. With linked files, you can apply halftone to the entire linked project or individual instances of the model. Using the Custom option, you can also apply halftone to individual categories. Notice both townhouses display in halftone.

Detail levels of a linked file 18 On the View menu, click Visibility/Graphics. 19 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog, click the Revit Links tab. 20 For c_Townhouse.rvt, under Display Settings, click By Host View. 21 In the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, on the Basics tab, select Custom. 22 Click the Model Categories tab. 23 In the Model categories list, select <Custom>. By default, the detail level for the linked townhouse project is set to By Host View. This means that the detail level of the linked file is matched to the detail level of the current active project view. By selecting custom under Model Categories, you can independently set the detail level for each model category for each link on a per view basis. You can click the value for Detail Level, and then set the detail level to coarse, medium, or fine. In this case, no detail level changes are required. 24 Click OK.

Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility | 661

Modify display settings of linked files You can use display settings to control the view range, phase, and phase filter of a specific link. 25 On the Revit Links tab, under Visibility, select c_Townhouse.rvt. Notice that the Custom button displays under Display Settings.

26 Under Display Settings, click Custom for the Townhouse link. 27 In the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, select Floor Plan: Ground Floor for Linked view. By default, the view range of a linked project uses the current view of the host project to define its view range. In most cases, this is preferable. However, there are situations, on a sloped site for instance, where you need to specify a different view range so that all the building model plan views cut at the same height. In this case, the townhouse view range now uses the same view range defined within the Floor Plan: Ground Floor of the original linked file. 28 Select By linked view for View range. Notice the Phase and Phase filter specified are By host view. In this case, the host view specifies New Construction for the Phase and Show All for the phase filter. This means that the phase named New Construction for the linked building model is displayed, with Show All as the phase filter applied to the link. With the Show All filter applied, all new, existing, demolished, and temporary components in that particular phase (New Construction) are displayed. All other components are grayed out. 29 Click OK. 30 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog, click OK. 31 On the File menu, click Save. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial, you need this project file open and in this view. In this exercise, you modified the visibility settings of the townhouse link by turning off the visibility of the level lines and applying halftone in a plan view. You also changed the view range of the townhouse so it would cut through the building model at the same height as the other linked building model. In the next exercise, you manage the linked files.

Managing Linked Building Models
In this exercise, you manage the links within the host project by unloading and reloading the linked projects. After you link a Revit Structure 2009 project into another project, a connection to the linked project continues to exist. If the host file is closed and one of the linked files is modified, those modifications are reloaded into the host project when it is reopened.

662 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates

NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files. If you have not completed the previous exercise, do so before continuing. Unload and reload links 1 On the File menu, click Manage Links. 2 In the Manage Links dialog, click the Revit tab. Notice the Loaded, Locations Not Saved, and Saved Path fields are read only. They supply information regarding the links. NOTE The Locations Not Saved field is only relevant for links with shared coordinates. In a shared coordinate environment, any changes made to the locations of a linked file are saved within the linked file rather than the host project. As links are moved to new locations in the host project, you can use the Save Locations command to save the new locations to the linked project. You learn more about this in the next lesson, Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models. 3 Under Path Type, notice that you have a choice between Relative and Absolute. The default path type is Relative. In general, you should use a relative path rather than an absolute. If you use a relative path and move the project and linked file together to a new directory, the link is maintained. If you use an absolute path and move the project and linked file to a new location, the link is broken because the host project continues to look for the link in the absolute path specified. The most common scenario for using Absolute is when the linked file is on a network where multiple users need access to it. 4 Under Linked File, select c_Condo_Complex.rvt. The buttons at the bottom of the dialog are now active. 5 Click Unload. NOTE Unloading linked projects may increase performance by reducing the quantity of components that must be opened and drawn. 6 At the confirmation prompt, click Yes. The Loaded option for that linked file is now clear. 7 Click OK. Notice that the condo complex link no longer displays in the host project.

Managing Linked Building Models | 663

TIP In the Manage Links dialog, you can also remove a link completely or reload the link from a different location. Linking building models with Worksharing enabled In some cases, you may need to link projects that have Worksharing enabled. In these cases, you should consider the following:

Selective open of worksets: When linking a Worksharing-enabled building model, you can specify which worksets to open after the link is made. In the Import/Link RVT dialog, click the arrow next to the Open button, and select Specify. This enhances performance by reducing the quantity of components that must be opened and drawn. Changing the linked worksets: While working in a host file with Worksharing-enabled linked files, you may decide that you need to see additional worksets of one of those linked files. To do this, go to the Manage Links dialog and use the Reload From command. You can then specify the additional worksets you need opened. Linking a building model into multiple host projects: Although the same Worksharing-enabled building model can be linked within multiple host projects, the specific worksets opened in each host project must be identical. The user who creates the first link determines the status for all other linked files. Host files with Worksharing enabled: When the host file has Worksharing activated, you must keep in mind which workset the link is placed in. Links consist of two parts: the link symbol and the link instance. When you initially place the link, both the link symbol and the link instance are placed in the active workset. However, link instances can be reassigned to different worksets. In general, you should try to keep all instances of a link on the same workset.

TIP When opening a Worksharing-enabled host file, it is possible to specify which links are loaded when the host file opens. A link is only loaded if the workset that the link instance is assigned to opens. If you choose not to open that workset, the link is not loaded. 8 In the Project Browser, expand Revit Links, right-click c_Condo_Complex.rvt, and click Reload. NOTE Some of the more frequently-used commands from the Manage Links dialog can be accessed by right-clicking the link in the Project Browser. Notice the condo complex building model has been reloaded into its previous location.

9 On the File menu, click Save As.

664 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates

10 In the Save As dialog, navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise, name the file Site_Project, and save it as an RVT file. NOTE If you intend to complete the next lesson, Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models, it is important that this file exist in the same directory as the condo complex and townhouse projects. In this exercise, you managed the linked files by unloading and reloading the townhouse project. In the next lesson, you learn how to share the coordinates between the host and linked projects. If you intend to complete the next lesson now, leave the project file open in its current view.

Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models
In this lesson, you learn how to share coordinates between project files so that you can correctly locate building models with respect to each other. When used in conjunction with model linking, you can keep track of the multiple locations in which a linked building model may reside. When you share coordinates between projects, you are deciding which coordinate system will be used by the two files. In essence, you are establishing a shared origin point. TIP You can also use shared coordinates with linked DWG files. When Revit project views are exported to DWG, project or shared coordinates can be specified in the Export Options dialog. This lesson requires the completion of the lesson Linking Building Models on page 648, and the resulting project files. If you have not completed the previous lesson, do so before continuing.

Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates
In this exercise, you publish the coordinates from a host project file to two different buildings that are linked to that project. The host file consists primarily of site components. When you link a Revit Structure 2009 project into another project (the host project), you can choose to use the coordinates of either the host project or the linked project. In most cases where the host project consists primarily of site components and the linked projects contain the building models, the host project coordinates are used. This ensures all the linked building models define their position with respect to the site data.

Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models | 665

When you are working in the host project, you can publish the coordinates of the linked files. This sends the coordinate information to the linked project so that its internal coordinate system matches the host project. You can also acquire coordinates when working in the host project. In this case, the host file acquires the coordinates of a specified linked file. You may want to do this in a case when the link refers to a DWG that has an established coordinate system that you want the host project to adopt. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous lesson, Linking Building Models on page 648, and the resulting project files. If you have not completed the lesson, do so before continuing. If you have closed the project, open it before continuing. Training File
■ ■ ■

On the File menu, click Open. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. Select Site_Project.rvt and click Open.

Publish coordinates 1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view.

2 On the Tools menu, click Shared Coordinates ➤ Publish Coordinates. As indicated in the Status Bar, you must now select a linked project to publish coordinates to. 3 In the drawing area, click the Condo Complex. It is the building model in the upper center of the host project.

666 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates

4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, select Location 1, and click OK. On the Status Bar, notice you are still in Publish Coordinates mode and Revit Structure is waiting for you to select another link. 5 On the Design Bar, click Modify to end the Publish Coordinates process. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson, you need this project file open and in this view. You have published the coordinates of the host project to the linked project. Both projects now share a coordinate system and can be linked to one another using this common coordinate system.

Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates
When a Revit Structure 2009 model is linked into a host project, it is placed at a specific location. Until coordinates are shared between the link and the host, this location is not saved outside of the host project. However, if coordinates are published from the host to the linked project, then the location becomes saved in the linked file. This location is defined as being a specified location with respect to the origin of the Host. Linked files using shared coordinates must have at least one defined location, but can have multiple additional locations. An example of a linked file with many locations is a prototype model of a house that is placed on 3 different lots. These three locations can be named Lot A, Lot B, and Lot C. Each of these lots is simply a different position for the same house design. Each of the locations can then be saved within the linked file for reference. This makes it possible to use the same building file to represent identical buildings on a site. In this exercise, you specify and save the two townhouse locations, even though both models originate from one linked file. You also relocate the shared origin of the project. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise within this lesson and the resulting project files. If you have not completed the exercise, do so before continuing. Specify a townhouse location 1 In the drawing area of the floor plan Level 1, move the cursor over the left townhouse and, when the edges highlight, click to select it.

2 On the Options Bar, click

.

Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates | 667

3 In the Element Properties dialog, under Instance Parameters, notice the Shared Location value is Not Shared. 4 Under Value, click Not Shared for Shared Location. Because this is the first time you are setting up the shared coordinates between the host and the linked models, a dialog displays telling you to reconcile the coordinates. This means that you need to choose which coordinate system will be shared by both files. This is a one-time operation. 5 In the Share Coordinates dialog:
■ ■

Select Publish the shared coordinate system. Under Record selected instance as being positioned at location, click Change.

6 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, click Rename. 7 In the Rename dialog, enter Lot A for New, and click OK. 8 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, click OK. 9 In the Select Location dialog, click Reconcile. 10 In the Element Properties dialog, notice the Shared Location value is now Lot A, and click OK. Constrain a link to a specific location 11 Select the townhouse building model on the right side of the host project. After a link instance is assigned a shared location, changing the position of that instance can affect the definition of the location that is saved with the linked file. When constraining a link to a location, you have only two choices:
■ ■

Move the instance to an existing location that is not already in use. Record the current position as a location. .

12 On the Options Bar, click

13 In the Element Properties dialog, under Instance Parameters, click Not Shared for Shared Location. In the Choose Location dialog, notice that you do not have an option to acquire or publish coordinates. This is because the coordinates for this linked file have already been shared. It is only necessary to reconcile coordinates once. 14 In the Choose Location dialog, select Move instance to. Notice the OK button is not active. This is because you cannot choose a location where an instance link already exists. You created the Lot A location in previous steps, and the left townhouse resides at that location. 15 In the Choose Location dialog, select the second option, Record current position as. Notice the OK button is still not active. Because Lot A is currently in use, you cannot redefine its location. 16 Click Change. 17 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, click Duplicate, enter Lot B for Name, and click OK. 18 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, make sure Lot B is selected, and click OK. 19 In the Select Location dialog, click OK. 20 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. You now have two different locations for the townhouse building model: Lot A and Lot B. Save locations 21 On the File menu, click Manage Links. 22 In the Manage Links dialog, click the Revit tab, and then select the townhouse project.

668 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates

23 Click Save Locations. 24 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog, select Save, and click OK. When you create a location, it is not automatically saved within the linked file. To explicitly save a location, you must go to the Manage Links dialog and save the locations there. NOTE If you attempt to close a host file without saving location changes made to linked files, you are prompted to save the locations to the linked files. 25 In the Manage Links dialog, notice the Locations Not Saved option for the townhouse project is no longer selected. 26 Click OK. 27 Select the townhouse on the right in Lot B and drag it a short distance in any direction. When you release the mouse button, a warning displays. You are informed that you have attempted to move a linked file that has been saved to a specific location. You are given the opportunity to save the new location, ignore the warning, or cancel the action. 28 Click Cancel to return the townhouse to Lot B. You can relocate an entire project with respect to all the linked files that are shared with it. When you relocate a project, the active location position is moved, although it may appear that the linked files are moving. By relocating a project, you essentially move the origin of the shared coordinates. Relocate a project 29 On the View menu, click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. 30 On the Tools menu, click Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. This is a two-click process. The first click specifies the move start point. The second click specifies the move endpoint. 31 Click just north of the site topography and just below the North elevation symbol.

32 Move the cursor horizontally to the left approximately 40' and click to relocate the shared origin.

Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates | 669

Notice the site topography and the linked building models no longer line up, and the linked projects are offset the distance that you moved the origin.

33 On the Edit menu, click Undo to return the origin to its original position. 34 On the File menu, click Save. 35 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog, select Save, and click OK. 36 On the File menu, click Close. NOTE In the following exercise, you work in one of the linked projects. You cannot work on a host file and one of its linked files simultaneously in the same session of Revit Structure. In this exercise, you created and saved the locations of each townhouse. You have also learned how to relocate the host project with respect to the linked projects.

Working with a Linked Building Model
After a file has been linked into a host and its coordinates are shared, the linked file contains information about its location with respect to the host. When opening the linked file, you can select which of the defined locations is the active location that you would like to work on. Also, if other models were linked into the same host, you could link them in and have them retain their correct position. In this exercise, you work on the townhouse building model and modify its location. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. If you have not completed the exercises, do so before continuing. Training File

On the File menu, click Open.

670 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates

■ ■

Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. Select c_Townhouse and click Open.

Link a project 1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click 1st Floor. This project is currently linked to the Site_Project.rvt file. It is located in Lot A and Lot B within that project file. In addition, the condo complex is linked within the Site_Project.rvt file. 2 On the File menu, click Import/Link ➤ Revit. 3 In the Import/Link RVT dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. Select c_Condo_Complex. For Positioning, select Auto - By Shared Coordinates. Click Open.

Because this building model only has one named location, it is placed automatically within the host project. 4 Zoom out to see the condo complex building model.

The condo complex is positioned relative to the active location of the townhouse building model. The current active location is Lot A. Change the active location 5 On the Settings menu, click Manage Place and Locations. Notice that Lot A is the current active location. 6 Select Lot B, and click Make Current. 7 Click OK. Notice that the condo complex link has repositioned itself as though the townhouse was on Lot B.

Working with a Linked Building Model | 671

NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson, you need this project file open and in this view. In this exercise, you worked within a project that is linked within another project. You loaded a linked file into the townhouse project and then changed the active location to see how the project reacts to the changes. In the next exercise, you manage the shared locations.

Managing Shared Locations
The Manage Place and Locations command allows you to quickly create new location names or rename existing ones. These new locations can be assigned later within a host file. In this exercise, you create a new location, orient a view to true north, and use the Report Shared Coordinates tool. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. If you have not completed the exercises, do so before continuing. Manage locations 1 On the Settings menu, click Manage Place and Locations. 2 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, click Duplicate. 3 In the Name dialog, enter Lot C, and click OK. 4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, click OK. Lot C now exists as a location although it has not been specified as an instance. In the host file, you can select Lot C if necessary. Orient a view to true north 5 On the View menu, click View Properties. 6 In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, select True North for Orientation, and click OK. 7 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. Notice that the orientation of the model resembles the site project.

672 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates

Report shared coordinates 8 On the Tools menu, click Shared Coordinates ➤ Report Shared Coordinates. This command allows you to determine the location of elements and points in the model with respect to the shared coordinate origin. 9 Click any component or in any location on the drawing area. On the Options Bar, notice the coordinates display in regards to the direction and distance to the origin. 10 On the File menu, click Close. You can save the file if you wish. In this exercise, you created a new location using the Manage Place and Locations tool. You rotated a view to true north and used the Report Shared Coordinates tool to locate components in regards to the origin.

Scheduling Components of Linked Files
In this exercise, you schedule components of the host file and of all linked files. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. If you have not completed the exercise, do so before continuing. Training File
■ ■ ■

On the File menu, click Open. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. Select Site_Project.rvt and click Open.

Create a door schedule 1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view.

Scheduling Components of Linked Files | 673

2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. 3 In the New Schedule dialog, under Category, select Doors, and click OK. Select the fields to display in the door schedule 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab. 5 Under Available fields, select Count, and click Add. 6 Add the remaining fields in the following order:
■ ■ ■

Family and Type Comments Cost

7 Select Include elements in linked files.

674 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates

you can sort the schedule data and display a single table entry per door type. click Edit for Sorting/Grouping. and then click OK twice. You have completed this tutorial. you created a schedule of doors in the host file and all linked files of a project. 13 On the File menu. and a grand total for the number of doors in the project buildings. and click Properties. Scheduling Components of Linked Files | 675 . click Close. clear Itemize every instance. the schedule lists the total count for each door type. right-click Door Schedule. 11 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Sort schedule data 9 In the Project Browser. You also sorted the schedule data to produce a consolidated listing of the components. In this exercise.8 Click OK. click Save. select Family and Type for Sort by. 12 Select Grand totals. Because you did not itemize every instance of each door type. under Other. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. In order to see a concise listing of all the doors in the campus project. 14 On the File menu. expand Schedules/Quantities.

676 .

You create and manage 3 project phases. You then create schedules for the phased steelwork and 3-dimensional views of the phased construction and place them on a drawing sheet for a specific phase. complete with schedules. In this tutorial. you work with a building information model that requires renovation. Also includes demolition of all internal walls for the existing building. You create new phases. you can create a visual time line of phase-specific 3D views. You can create as many phases as necessary and assign building model elements to specific phases. This allows you to create phase-specific project documentation. and create plan views for each phase. and a non load-bearing brick panel wall for a new building to be constructed north of the galleria. Using Phasing In this lesson. a floor slab. the galleria. You customize the display of phased work to highlight demolition work. as well as a covered walkway. ■ ■ 677 . In the second exercise. You can use phase filters to control the flow of building model information into views and schedules. You create new phases. In the lesson and exercises that follow. assigning building elements to the appropriate phase: ■ Existing: Includes the original brick-clad building with structural walls and non load-bearing internal partitions. assign new building model elements such as steelwork (columns. Phase 2 (north): Includes new steelwork. you renovate a building to convert it to a shopping mall.Project Phasing 21 In any project. and then add new building model elements. you or the client may want to view the model according to phases. you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase. Phases represent distinct time periods over the duration of a project. demolish existing construction. Phase 1 (south): Includes new steelwork and footings for the existing building. braces and footings) to phases. For the client. footings. beams.

Existing phase Phase 1 (south) 678 | Chapter 21 Project Phasing .

You create new phases for the project timeline. you begin with all the building elements drawn as new construction. After you assign building elements to phases. use phase filters to control what displays in each phase. Phasing Your Model | 679 . you create structural schedules for a specific phase of the project. The finished sheet Phasing Your Model In this exercise. You create a new sheet on which you place the schedules and 2 views of the building model. you create new phase-specific views.Phase 2 (north) After you add phases to the project. Dataset ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and modify graphic overrides to highlight demolition work. The default structural project template has 2 phases: Existing and New Construction.

while previous phase linework is displayed as gray. then new building elements are assigned to Phase 1. They can also be added or edited in an existing project at any time. notice that the Phase Created value is New Construction. under Phasing. notice that Show All is selected for Phase Filter and New Construction is selected for Phase. These values let you assign creation and demolition phases in a timeline. click Training Files. or temporary) are visible in this phase. The Show All filter means that all building model elements (new. As you add new elements to the building model. Verify the current phase is New Construction 1 In the Project Browser. existing. In the Element Properties dialog. By default. the current phase linework is displayed as black.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. and double-click Floor. This phase assignment is controlled by a Phase setting within the view properties. 5 Select any of the exterior walls. expand Floor Plans. expand Views (all). Every building element has a Phase Created and a Phase Demolished value so you can assign a creation and a demolition phase to new work. 6 On the Options Bar. they are assigned to the New Construction phase by default. You can also use the Demolition tool to select building elements for demolition. click . if a view is assigned to a Phase 1 setting. and open Common\c_STR_Project_Phasing. For example. Demolition work is represented by a black dashed line. demo. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. A phase view can show work in the current phase and work from previous phases in the project timeline. TIP Available phases and view phase settings can be changed in a project template so they are available for each new project. 680 | Chapter 21 Project Phasing . When you create a new structural project. 2 phases exist by default: Existing and New Construction. 4 Click Cancel.rvt. and the Phase Demolished value is None. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. Any new elements that you add to this view are assigned the New Construction phase value.

Phasing Your Model | 681 . 16 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. All building objects that were assigned to New Construction are now assigned to Phase 1 (south) because you changed the phase name. 17 In the Element Properties dialog.7 Click Cancel. scroll down the list of Instance Parameters until you see the Phasing heading. There are now 3 phases in your project: Existing. which means that work assigned to Phase 1 (south). click the New Construction field. or temporary work (created and demolished in same phase). and Phase 2 (north). The phases are on a timeline with later phases lower on the list. 10 In the Phasing dialog. click Modify to clear the command. so Phase 1 and Phase 2 occur after the Existing phase. expand 3D Views. and enter the following text: ■ ■ ■ Existing: Existing building Phase 1 (south): Existing building with new steelwork and demolished walls Phase 2 (north): New building with steelwork and exterior panel wall 14 Click OK. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. With the phase Filter set to Show New. and enter Phase 2 (north) under Name. as you change selected building elements to the existing phase. Add and edit phases 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. You do not see a change in the graphics because all the building elements are new to Phase 1 (south). click After. existing earlier phases. Phase 1 (south). is visible in this view. on the Project Phases tab. 12 Under Insert. Now you are seeing only work that is new to Phase 1 (south) of the project. The Phase value is Phase 1 (south) and the Phase filter is Show All. All of the building elements in the project are currently assigned to Phase 1 (south). Assign selected building elements to the Existing phase 15 In the Project Browser. demo. you will see a visual confirmation of the change as the building elements disappear from the view. and click OK. 18 Select Show New for Phase Filter. 13 Click in the Description fields for each phase. and double-click 3D. 11 Enter Phase 1 (south).

21 On the View Control Bar. and click Select All Instances. and click Hide Object. click Hide/Isolate.19 Click the ViewCube to adjust your view as shown. 22 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Top. 20 In the drawing area. right-click one of the rectangular footings. The footings are hidden and cannot be selected. 682 | Chapter 21 Project Phasing .

30 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. clear Structural Columns and Structural Framing. click Hide/Isolate. 28 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southeast. walls. The building elements that you assigned to the Existing phase are no longer displayed in the drawing. select Existing for Phase Created. Phasing Your Model | 683 . 27 In the Element Properties dialog. click .23 Use a crossing window to select the existing building. under Phasing. click . under Phasing. The continuous footing foundations. select Show All for Phase Filter. This filters out the steelwork. Only elements new to Phase 1 (south) are displayed. 25 In the Filter dialog. are selected and are displayed in red. 24 On the Options Bar. 31 In the Element Properties dialog. 29 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. 26 On the Options Bar. 32 Click OK. and previously you hid the rectangular footings to make sure they couldn’t be selected. and openings. and click Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. as shown. which are the building elements that comprise the existing building. and click OK.

Now you can see the Existing phase displayed with gray linework in the view. 36 In the Element Properties dialog. Because this is a renovation project. After you create the views. 35 On the Options Bar. and click OK. All of the structural elements are still assigned to Phase 1 (south). the slab. 34 Use a selection window to select the structural elements. and Phase 2 (north) project phases. you modify phase and phase filter properties 684 | Chapter 21 Project Phasing . click . Because the active phase is Phase 1 (south) and the phase filter is set to Show All. You do not see future phases such as Phase 2 (north). You have reassigned building elements to 3 phases. it requires separate plan views for the Existing. 33 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Top. select Phase 2 (north) for Phase Created. under Phasing. You see work for Phase 1 (south) and the existing phases. and the footings north of the galleria. the walls. the building is displayed as shown. Phase 1 (south) with demolition. 37 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast.

44 Repeat the process to create a view named Phase 2 (north) Manage the phases for a view 45 In the Project Browser. Create phase-specific plan views 38 In the Project Browser. click . under Floor Plans. 39 In the Rename View dialog. double click Phase 1 (south). it might be desirable to show previous phases or demolition. and click OK. under Floor Plans. 49 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. You can see the earlier existing phase because the phase filter is set to Show All. right-click Existing. under Floor Plans. 48 In the Project Browser. in phase 1. under Floor Plans. You are asked if you want to rename corresponding level and views. select Phase 1 (south) for the Phase value. a graphic override is used to make “older” existing elements use the gray line style. you do not want to rename the corresponding views and level. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. shows as black.to determine which phase is shown and which building elements (existing. and click OK. and click Rename. select Existing for Phase. Demolish the interior walls 51 On the Tools toolbar. and click Rename. under Phasing. enter Phase 1 (south). 50 In the View Properties dialog. You now have a separate floor plan for the existing building model and for Phase 1. The cursor is displayed as a hammer. The line style of the new work. and temporary) are shown in the same timeline. 43 In the Rename View dialog. Phasing Your Model | 685 . In a phase such as Phase 1. and click OK. double-click Existing. 46 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. The line style of the walls and openings are displayed as black. right-click Floor. enter Existing. This refers to the ceiling plan and the level line visible in any of the elevation views. which will include planned demolition. right-click Copy of Existing. Because this is a phase-specific view. and click Duplicate. Phase 1 (south) occurs after existing construction. 40 Click No. under Phasing. 42 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. and click OK. demo. Because of this time relationship. new. 41 In the Project Browser.

you need a filter that takes all of the phases into account with a particular graphic override to highlight the demolished walls in red. New. under Floor Plans. This new filter uses graphic overrides to set the display of all building model elements. When you demolish the host. under Phasing. click the Phase Filters tab. 63 Click on the Demolished line color and change it from black to red. 58 In the Phasing dialog. it is displayed as a dashed line. View graphic overrides 62 Click the Graphic Overrides tab. That is because the openings are wall-hosted elements. As you click each wall. 55 In the Element Properties dialog.52 Referring to the walls displayed as dashed lines in the following illustration. Because the Phase value is Phase 1 (south) the walls are demolished in this phase. select the interior walls one at a time. new or temporary. select Phase 2 (north) for the Phase value. A new phase filter is displayed at the bottom of the Filter Name list. In this case. and Temporary. you demolish all elements hosted by it. 59 In the Phasing dialog. click Filter 1. 53 In the Project Browser. 56 Click OK. click New. double-click Phase 2 (north). The line style of the current phase is displayed as black and previous phases are displayed as gray. under Demolished. 64 Click OK twice. Notice that the openings display as demolished even though you did not specifically demolish them. 54 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. Create a custom phase filter 57 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. demo. however. Graphic overrides define the appearance of building model elements according to their phase status: existing. and enter Demo Red. Demo Red. Demolished. and select Show All for Phase Filter. Existing. 686 | Chapter 21 Project Phasing . The default phase filters are displayed. 60 Under Filter Name. select Overridden. 61 For the Filter Name.

71 Name the views Existing. Phase 1 (south). under 3D Views. select Shading for Model Graphics Style. under Phasing. 81 In the Element Properties dialog. Because of this time relationship. under 3D Views. 66 To assign as specific phase filter to a view. Because you changed the override. 76 Under Graphics. under Graphics. double-click Existing. 70 Right-click on each of the copies. 68 Click OK. right-click 3D and click Duplicate. shows as black. 67 In the Element Properties dialog. a graphic override is used to make “older” existing elements use the gray line style. Do this 3 times so you have 3 copies. double-click Phase 1 (south). 73 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. Phase 1 (south) occurs after existing construction. The line style of the walls and openings are displayed as black. 79 In the Project Browser. select Existing for the Phase value. Manage the phases for the 3D views 72 In the Project Browser. Phasing Your Model | 687 .Apply the Demo Red graphic overrides to a view 65 Under Floor Plans. The line style of the new work. in phase 1. 78 Click OK. under Phasing. which will show both architectural and structural building elements. 80 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. select Phase 1 (south) for Phase. The override settings for Show All and Demo Red are the same. 74 In the Element Properties dialog. and the Show All phase filter includes the override for demolition. select Shading for Model Graphics Style. under Phasing. 83 Select Coordination for Discipline. and Show All for Phase Filter. 82 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click Phase 1 (south). Create phase-specific 3D views 69 In the Project Browser. This displays both architectural and structural building elements. select Demo Red for Phase Filter to show work that is demolished with the red line color from the graphic overrides. under 3D Views. 77 Select Coordination for Discipline. and click Rename. and click OK. Phase 2 (north). 75 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. You can see the earlier existing phase because the phase filter is set to Show All. the demolished walls are displayed as red. click View menu ➤ View Properties.

In this exercise. as well as 2 views of the building model. framing. assigning Phase 2 (north) as the Phase. you create column. You created a custom phase filter with graphic overrides to show demolition work in red. Creating Phase-Specific Structural Schedules In this exercise.84 for the Phase 2 (north) view. You finished the exercise by creating 3d phased views suitable for a client presentation. 86 If you wish to save this file. you created a building model with 3 distinct phases and created 3 plan views with appropriate phase filters to display each phase. The finished sheet 688 | Chapter 21 Project Phasing .84 Click OK. you can do so at this time or you can continue in this file for the next exercise. You create a new sheet on which you place the schedules. and footing schedules for a single phase of a project. 85 Repeat steps 81 .

and open Imperial\i_STR_Project_Phasing_Schedules. click Schedule/Quantities. Enter Framing . 5 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. Select Phase 1 (south) for Phase. Clear Itemize every instance. Click OK. click the Fields tab. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ Count Family and Type Length TIP Press and hold CTRL to make multiple selections under Available Fields. Select Grand totals. Create a structural framing schedule for Phase 1 (south) 6 On the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Phase 1 for Name. Click OK. 4 Under Available Fields. select Structural Framing. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. Click OK. Select Phase 1 (south) for Phase.Phase 1 for Name. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. Creating Phase-Specific Structural Schedules | 689 . and do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Family and Type for Sort By. 7 In the New Schedule dialog. click Training Files. Enter Columns . Create a structural column schedule for Phase 1 (south) 1 On the View tab of the Design bar. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. click Schedule/Quantities. select the following fields. Select Length for Then by. select Structural Columns. You can drag a column grid line to adjust the width of a column.Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

expand Sheets (all). Use the following illustration as a guide as you complete the steps to create your sheet. Select Phase 1 (south) for Phase. enter Phase 1 . Create a footings schedule for Phase 1 (south) 11 On the Design bar. 14 Under Available Fields. 13 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Create a sheet and then add views and schedules 16 In the Project Browser. Select Grand totals. Click OK. click the Fields tab. 690 | Chapter 21 Project Phasing . right-click the new sheet. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. Click OK. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ Count Family and Type 10 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. select Structural Foundations. Enter Footings . and click Rename. Select Grand totals. you drag the schedules and project views onto the sheet. and do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Family and Type for Sort By. Clear Itemize every instance. click Schedule/Quantities 12 In the New Schedule dialog. Click OK.8 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select the following fields.Phase 1 for Name. right-click Sheets (all).Structural for Name. Next. Clear Itemize every instance. 19 In the Sheet Title dialog. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ Count Family and Type 15 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. and do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Family and Type for Sort By. click OK. 9 Under Available Fields. click the Fields tab. and click New Sheet. 17 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. 18 In the Project Browser. select the following fields.

drag each of the 3 schedules onto the sheet. and drag Phase 1 (south) onto the sheet. and click to place it. and move the column controls to adjust column width. 23 On the sheet. Creating Phase-Specific Structural Schedules | 691 . select each schedule one at a time. In this exercise. expand Floor Plans. 22 Expand Schedules.20 In the Project Browser. you created 3 custom structural schedules for a specific project phase and placed them on a sheet. and click to place it. 21 Under 3D views. drag Phase 1 (south) onto the sheet. and click to place them.

692 .

you learn how to create an exterior perspective view of a pool house building model and create rendered images for daytime and nighttime lighting. Daytime rendering of the pool house 693 . you learn to use the rendering features in Revit Structure 2009 to create rendered interior and exterior views of a building information model. Rendering an Exterior View In this lesson. You also learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of a model.Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs 22 In this tutorial.

You work with a building model that already has materials applied to it. change the material of the pad of the pool house from the default material to concrete. After you create the perspective view. You also learn how to create a new material and apply it to a building component. Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model In this exercise. you: ■ ■ ■ change the render appearance of the wood material applied to the exterior screen wall of the pool house. the pad.Nighttime rendering of the pool house You learn to create and apply materials to the building model. you render a region of the building that includes the exterior wall. When you complete these changes. and the curtain wall to view and verify the material and texture changes. you specify options that define the model environment. In this exercise. and create the perspective view that you want to render. you learn how to view and modify the material that is applied to a building component in a building model. 694 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and then render a final exterior view. define a new black anodized aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions of the pool house wall. add trees to the building site.

View the finish material of the screen wall 1 Verify that the 3D view of the pool house is displayed. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Common\c_Pool_House.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 695 . click Training Files. 2 Zoom in to the wall of the house near the pool.

10 On the Render Appearance tab. Solid. 4 In the Element Properties dialog.Teak. so you can change the render appearance for the material. verify that the material for Structure [1] is Wood .Teak. 5 Under Construction. and on the Options Bar. 7 Click OK 3 times. select the wooden screen wall. 9 In the Materials dialog. 6 In the Edit Assembly dialog. Solid material is currently a light stained teak. for Structure. click Edit/New. The Wood . (Element You check the construction of the screen walls to determine the material assigned to the wall. select Wood .Teak. click Properties). click Edit.3 In the drawing area. 696 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . The design calls for the use of a dark stained. click Replace. for Materials. Solid. Change the render appearance of the wood material 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. satin-finished teak.

and click . for Finish. select Broom Straight. and click OK. click Edit/New. and click Update Preview. The material assignment for the pad is currently set to By Category. It can be used for visual feedback to see if the setting produces the desired results. which is using a default material. but it is the closest material to what you want. 19 On the Render Appearance tab. and click OK. 22 On the Design Bar. The Update Preview option provides a real time rendering of the changes to the material. select Concrete . click <By Category>. 18 In the Materials dialog.11 In the Render Appearance Library dialog. You make modifications to the settings for this material to more closely match the desired finish. click (Element Properties). for Structure. 20 Click the Graphics tab. and on the Options Bar. Change the material of the pad from the default material to concrete 14 In the drawing area. 12 On the Render Appearance tab of the Materials dialog. select Satin Varnish. You do not want the medium gloss finish. for the Structure [1] Material value. 16 Under Construction. Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 697 .Cast-in-Place Concrete. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. and review the material patterns. click Wood Teak Stained Dark Medium Gloss. click Edit. 21 Click OK 4 times. select the pad. click Modify. 13 Click Update Preview. 17 In the Edit Assembly dialog. You change the material assignment to use a concrete with a straight broom finish. for Finish.

24 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. the color used for this material in shaded views is an average color defined by the render appearance. 31 On the Graphics tab of the Materials dialog. select Metal . 25 In the Materials dialog. for Name.Aluminum. 27 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog. select Use Render Appearance for Shading.Black. and click OK.Define a new material and apply it to the mullions 23 Zoom in to view the curtain wall mullions. 26 At the bottom left corner of the Materials dialog.Aluminum. click Replace. click Aluminum Anodized Black. and click OK. 30 In the Render Appearance Library. enter Metal . You use an existing material as a template to create the black anodized aluminum material. By selecting this option. 29 On the Render Appearance tab. You create a black anodized aluminum material. click (Duplicate). Anodized . and apply it to the mullions of the pool house wall. and click OK. review the material appearance (color and pattern). 28 On the Graphics tab of the Materials dialog. 698 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .

select Region. 33 In the Object Styles dialog. 38 At the top of the Rendering dialog.32 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. (Show Rendering Dialog). click 39 Select the rendering crop boundary. for Curtain Wall Mullions. 35 Click OK twice. and click 34 In the Materials dialog. select the Material value. select Metal . . Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 699 . Render a region of the model to view the material changes 37 On the View Control Bar.Black. 36 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view. The mullions and frame for the wall are defined as By Category. Anodized .Aluminum. You change the material used by the curtain wall mullion category.

41 Zoom in to the region in order to see the results of the rendering test more clearly. It is a good practice to define a precise render region until you are ready to create the final rendered image. the faster the image renders. and pad). 700 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . mullions.40 Adjust the extents of the region by dragging the borders in tight around the areas where the materials changed (pool house screen. NOTE The smaller the region.

after the rendering process completes. For Sun. and save the project as c_Pool_House_in_progress. for Scheme.42 Specify options in the Rendering dialog: ■ Under Quality. ■ ■ 43 Click Render. 44 To display the building model. select Medium. 46 Click File menu ➤ Save. Adding Trees to the Site In this exercise. The Rendering Progress dialog displays. the longer the rendering process will take. under Display. 45 Close the Rendering dialog. select Sunlight from top left. Adding Trees to the Site on page 701. select Exterior: Sun only. The higher the quality. click Show the model. providing information on the status and duration of the rendering process. Adding Trees to the Site | 701 . for Setting.rvt. Several quality settings are available. Refer to the Revit Structure Online Help for best practices for optimizing quality and output settings. you place trees and shrubs on the building site in order to provide a more realistic context for rendering the project. 47 Proceed to the next exercise. on the Rendering dialog. Under Lighting.

Specific types and sizes of trees are referenced in the steps. expand Floor Plans. c_Pool_House_in_progress. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. imperial components and units are used in this lesson. when you render an exterior view of the model.rvt. the RPC model is used in the rendering. 2 Zoom in so you can easily view the area surrounding the pool house and walkway. and double-click Site. Add shrubs and trees to the site 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE For simplicity.In a later exercise. but any type and size can be used. 702 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . expand Views (all).

TIP If the Site tab is not displayed. 5 Place 4 shrubs to the right of the patio. and place 2 trees in the project. NOTE If planting families are not loaded into a project. as shown. select RPC Shrub : Yew 2'-4''. near the walkway. similar to the locations shown. select RPC Tree .3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. right-click in the Design Bar. 4 In the Type Selector. See Loading Families in the Revit Structure 2009 Online Help. click Site Component. and click Site. Adding Trees to the Site | 703 . (Exact placement is not important.) 6 In the Type Selector.Deciduous : Red Maple .30'. they can be loaded from the Content Library.

7 In the Type Selector. You change the size of the existing Honey Locust tree family. click (Element Properties).25'. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. 14 Click in the drawing area to the right of the pool house to place the tree.42'. 11 In the Rename dialog. enter Honey Locust . and place a tree to the left of the pool house between the 2 maple trees. select RPC Tree . 10 In the Type Properties dialog. enter 18'. and click OK. for Height. select RPC Tree .Deciduous : Honey Locust . 13 Click OK twice. for New. Create a tree type and add it to the site 8 In the Type Selector. and on the Options Bar.18'. 704 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . click Rename.Deciduous : Scarlet Oak . 12 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New.

Creating a Perspective View on page 705. Creating a Perspective View | 705 .15 On the Design Bar. Creating a Perspective View In this exercise. you define the exterior perspective view of the building model that you want to render. click Modify. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. 17 Proceed to the next exercise.

on the View tab of the Design Bar. click Camera. The perspective view displays.rvt. 706 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and the camera target point: ■ Specify the first point along the curve of the walkway facing the pool house to position the camera. ■ Exact placement is not important because you modify the view as required. Specify the second point in the upper left corner of the pool house to define the target point of the camera. c_Pool_House_in_progress. Place a camera in the site view 1 With the Site view open.

Depending on camera placement. Adjust the back clipping plane so that it is beyond the wall in the yard. as necessary.3 Zoom out. 4 Adjust the crop boundary to display the entire building and some of the pool in the foreground. Creating a Perspective View | 707 . Adjust the field of vision and back clipping plane 5 In the Project Browser. If the camera is not shown in the view. as shown. double-click Site. the back wall of the yard may be cut off. The camera can also be moved along the walkway to get the desired perspective view. With the camera shown. in the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. and click Show Camera. the triangle that represents the field of vision can be adjusted. right-click 3D View 1. and select the crop boundary. and adjust the field of vision.

and make any final adjustments to the crop boundary to improve image composition. and click OK. 8 In the Project Browser. 9 Zoom to fit the perspective view in the window. under 3D Views. right-click 3D View 1. and click Rename. 708 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 10 Save the file. 7 In the Rename View dialog. Creating the Exterior Rendering on page 709.6 In the Project Browser.Day to open the view.Day. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. enter Exterior . double-click Exterior .

rvt. and create lighting groups for a nighttime view of the exterior. Display the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. Creating the Exterior Rendering | 709 . modify render settings.Day. and render a daytime view of the exterior. under 3D Views.Creating the Exterior Rendering In this exercise. c_Pool_House_in_progress. you specify the time and location settings for the rendering. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. You then duplicate the view. double-click Exterior .

NOTE If a background image is required. and click Rename. 7 In the Rendering dialog. see Orienting to True North for Solar Studies. under Lighting. The PNG and TIFF formats place the chosen background on an alpha channel for easier manipulation during photoediting. 710 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . You adjust cloud settings as required. select Medium. select Edit/New. for Setting. 8 Under Quality. under Background.Specify rendering settings for a daytime view 2 On the View Control Bar. export the resulting image in PNG or TIFF format. In this case. 3 In the Rendering dialog. For information on how the rendering/sun relates to the location settings. You create a location and time for the rendering. 3pm. select Spring Equinox. 6 Click OK twice. select Sky: Cloudy. and click Render. for New.Santa Monica. the sky will be a procedural sky based on cloud settings and time of day. 4 On the Still tab of the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. for Sun. 5 In the Rename dialog. enter Spring Equinox . click (Show Rendering Dialog).

you can switch between the rendered view and the model view as long as the Revit Structure session is open. 13 Close the Rendering dialog. For Files of type. click Show the rendering. Click Save. 10 In the Rendering dialog. select Portable Network Graphics (*. click Export. 12 In the Save Image dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. click Show the model. The image file is saved to the Desktop for later reference. Export the rendered image to an external file 11 In the Rendering dialog. After the image is rendered. Creating the Exterior Rendering | 711 . click Desktop.9 In the Rendering dialog.png).

Flat Round : 60W . 25 Using the same method. 712 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Create lighting groups 18 In the Artificial Lights . 19 In the New Light Group dialog. select the first light.Night. To select a sequential list.120V. verify that Pool Lights is selected. Lighting groups allow greater control over lighting schemes used in renderings.Night view open. and click OK. under Lighting. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. enter Pool House Lights.Flat Round : 60W . on the View Control Bar. under Ungrouped Lights. under Ungrouped Lights. dialog. right-click Exterior . press and hold SHIFT. 24 In the New Light Group dialog.Flat Round : 60W . for Name. You change the rendering settings to create a nighttime rendering of the same view. add 30 :Sconce Light . 16 With the Exterior . under Group Options. select Exterior: Artificial only. 21 In the Light Groups dialog. 22 Using the same method.Flat Round : 60W .Specify rendering settings for a nighttime view 14 In the Project Browser.120V through 35 :Sconce Light . and select the last light. click New. 23 In the Artificial Lights dialog. 15 Rename the Copy of Exterior . click New.Night. click Dialog). and click OK.120V to the Pool Lights group. enter Pool Lights. under 3D Views. and click Move to Group. 27 In the Rendering dialog. highlight 9 :Sconce Light .120V through 14 :Sconce Light . To create a similar view using different rendering settings. for Scheme. and click OK. (Show Rendering 17 In the Rendering dialog. under Group Options. click Render. and click Artificial Lights.Day view to Exterior . you duplicate the view and change the settings. 20 In the Artificial Lights dialog.Day.Exterior . add 16 :Light Fixture through 29 :Light Fixture to the Pool House Lights group. click OK. for Name. 26 In the Artificial Lights dialog.

32 Save the file. Settings can be changed at any time within the Revit Structure session. Rendering an Interior View on page 713. for Exposure Value. under Image. enter 4. and click OK. you change the brightness of the exposure. 29 In the Exposure Control dialog. In this example. click Show the model. 31 Close the Rendering dialog. Rendering an Interior View | 713 . After the image is rendered. 33 Proceed to the next lesson. and then switch between the views by clicking Show the rendering. click Adjust Exposure. 30 In the Rendering dialog. the exposure can be modified to improve the output. you create a nighttime and a daytime rendering of the interior view of the building model that you worked with in the previous lesson.Adjust the exposure 28 In the Rendering dialog. Rendering an Interior View In this lesson. but the other settings can be modified as well to control the final rendering.

714 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .Draft nighttime rendering of the interior High quality daytime rendering of the interior To create the rendered view. Adding RPC People In this exercise. render the views. RPC people are represented by a 2D symbol in plan view and resemble real people only when rendered in a 3D view.rvt. you add an RPC person to the interior view that you render in a later exercise. c_Pool_House_in_progress. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. you add ArchVision® realpeople (RPC content) to the interior of the pool house. define the perspective view and rendering settings. and finally.

Add an RPC figure to the view 1 In the Project Browser. click 7 Rotate the figure: The pointed portion of the symbol represents the front of the figure. click Component. Adding RPC People | 715 . but place the figure close to the front of the vanity so that her reflection displays in the mirror after the scene is rendered. select RPC Female : YinYin. under Floor Plans. the person’s line of sight. 5 On the Design Bar. 6 Select the figure. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. and on the Edit toolbar. double-click Level 1. 2 Zoom in to the pool house. Exact placement is not important. ■ (Rotate). and place the component inside the pool house. 4 In the Type Selector. Click to set the rotate start point at the line of sight.

716 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 11 In the Render Appearance Properties dialog. under Identity Data.■ Rotate clockwise about 20 degrees. click (Element Properties). on the Options Bar. If reflections of RPC content are important to the rendering. Enable reflective properties for RPC content 8 With the RPC figure selected. 14 Save the file. for Render Appearance Properties. select Cast Reflections. click Modify. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. and click so that the figure is angled toward the vanity. In order to see the figure’s reflection. under Parameters. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. the reflection of RPC content is turned off in order to enhance rendering performance. 12 Click OK 3 times. 13 On the Design Bar. click Edit. the reflective properties must be turned on for the family type. By default. you can enable this option. click Edit/New.

15 Proceed to the next exercise. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and target point: ■ ■ Click inside the lower right corner of the pool house to place the camera. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Exact placement is not important because you will adjust the crop boundary of the view in later steps. and using a section box to limit the geometry included in the rendering process. Creating the Interior Perspective View on page 717. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 717 . you create the interior perspective view that you will render in the final exercise in this lesson. Add a camera 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar.rvt. You place a camera into the view to create an interior perspective. Click outside of the pool house to the left to place the target point. click Camera. c_Pool_House_in_progress. Creating the Interior Perspective View In this exercise. You define the interior perspective by placing a camera.

4 In the Project Browser. and click Properties. and click OK. 6 Zoom out so that you can see the selection box. select Section Box. Add a section box to limit the extents of the rendered view 3 Zoom to fit the view in the window. 718 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .The perspective view displays. under Extents. right-click 3D View 1. You can use a section box to limit the geometry included in a rendering. under 3D Views. 5 In the Element Properties dialog.

you display an elevation/section view and a plan view. in addition to the 3D view. 9 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1. select the section box. 10 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. 8 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. double-click South. under Elevations (Building Elevations). 11 In the 3D view.7 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. In order to accurately adjust the section box. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 719 .

size the box as shown. 14 In the 3D view. right-click. select the section box. 720 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and click Hide in view ➤ Category.12 In the floor plan view. 13 In the South Elevation view. size the box as shown.

doors that contain windows or glass. and curtain walls. you define daylight portals for the glazed panels of the curtain wall. Daylight portals improve the quality of light that shines through windows.15 Maximize the 3D view. Creating the Interior Rendering In this exercise. 16 Zoom to fit the view in the window. Creating the Interior Rendering on page 721. To create a daytime view. and render the interior view. and adjust the crop boundary to match the illustration. 18 Proceed to the next exercise. you define artificial lighting and render a nighttime view of the interior. 17 Save the file. Training File Creating the Interior Rendering | 721 .

8 In the Rendering dialog. under Lighting.Night. 4 In the Rendering dialog. Define lighting for a nighttime view 1 In the Project Browser. for Setting. 5 Click Artificial Lights. Because the exterior pool lights will not have an effect on this rendering. for Scheme. c_Pool_House_in_progress. and click Rename. select Draft. the view can be rendered at a higher quality level. 2 In the Rename View dialog. The Interior: Artificial only option defines a baseline for the exposure and other settings for an interior rendering without daylight. 6 In the Artificial Lights dialog. clear Pool Lights. and render the view to check lighting levels and material selections. click (Show Rendering Dialog). These settings can be adjusted after the rendering is complete using the Adjust Exposure option. 3 On the View Control Bar. 722 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . enter Interior . right-click 3D View 1. under 3D Views. and click OK. Using light controls and lighting groups can help to define multiple lighting conditions for views.rvt. and click OK. After these settings are established. select Interior: Artificial only. you turn them off for this scene.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Render. You can specify a lower quality. 7 Under Quality.

Day. For more information on daylight portals. you must create a custom setting. You have to copy a preset scheme to your custom settings in order to make changes. select Region. NOTE The custom setting is only applied to this view. 11 Rename the copied view to Interior . 13 In the Rendering dialog. the daylight portals can be turned on. in order to turn on daylight portals. select Spring Equinox . and click OK. click 14 For Setting. IMPORTANT Enabling daylight portals can drastically increase rendering times. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 15 In the Render Quality Settings dialog. select Edit. right-click Interior . for Daylight Portal Options. for Sun. You can duplicate the view for each lighting condition/time of day you want to render. click Copy To Custom. This process must be repeated if you want to use custom settings in other views. In this case. select Curtain Walls. By default they are turned off. For sunlit interiors. but the space will receive standard daylighting. 16 Scroll to the bottom of the dialog. select Interior: Sun only. 17 In the Rendering dialog. The preset schemes are read-only. You create a view for the interior during the day. The daylight portals help to further refine this daylight into a more realistic rendered effect.Santa Monica. 3pm. see the Revit Structure Online Help. (Show Rendering Dialog).Night. Creating the Interior Rendering | 723 . Specify rendering settings 12 On the View Control Bar.9 Close the Rendering dialog. for Scheme. and click Render. Create an interior day view 10 In the Project Browser.

enter 1. View the properties of the column and note that the assigned material is Wood. Notice that the speckling on the wooden column in the foreground is reflecting too much light. Click OK.18 In the Rendering dialog. 19 In the Exposure Control dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Exposure Value. (Element 724 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Modify the column material 21 In the drawing area. For Saturation. and close the Rendering dialog. click Adjust Exposure. click Show the model. enter 10. 20 In the Rendering dialog. In the next steps. click Properties). you adjust the material of the column to improve the effect. and on the Options Bar. select the column on the right. under Image.

For Amount. Click OK. for Resolution. 26 Click Update Preview. add a bump map to create texture. and rotate the material so that the grain of the wood runs vertically along the column. 23 With the column still selected. move the slider to the right until the value is approximately 5. Creating the Interior Rendering | 725 . select Unfinished.22 In the Element Properties dialog. and on the Options Bar. 30 In the drawing area. click OK. 32 In the Rendering dialog. clear Region. for Setting. click Settings menu ➤ Materials.6. enter 90. 24 In the Materials dialog. select Based on wood grain. For Bump. select Printer. and click OK. click (Show Rendering Dialog). enter 5''. click the dimensions for Size. As size and DPI are increased. select Wood. 25 Specify options on the Render Appearance tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Finish. you can define the output and quality settings for final output. 31 In the Crop Region Size dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. You change the varnish setting. For Rotate. select Scale (locked proportions). the render time increases significantly. 29 In the Rendering dialog. For Width. select the crop boundary. and click Render. under Output Settings. Create a print quality rendering 27 On the View Control Bar. The rendered output can be set to a printed ratio and the printed size of the output as well as the DPI for the image can be controlled. select High. After you use the test renderings to verify that you made the correct lighting and material selection. 28 In the Rendering dialog.

In a plan view. and you create it by specifying points that create the spline. you rendered an exterior and an interior view.The rendered image displays. Creating and Editing a Walkthrough The first step in creating a walkthrough is to define the walkthrough path. When you export your walkthrough to an AVI. you define the walkthrough path in a plan view. but you can also define it in a 3D. but you can also create it in a 3D orthographic view. Creating and Recording Walkthroughs In this lesson. The file can now be exported or saved to the Revit project. which is the path that a camera will follow through the building model. elevation. You learned to create perspective views suitable for rendering and to modify rendering options in order to optimize the final output. Each point becomes a key frame in the walkthrough. 33 Close the exercise file with or without saving. Additional frames that comprise the walkthrough are created between the key frames. A walkthrough is created in a 3D perspective view by default. Usually. By completing the two rendering lessons included in this tutorial. or section view. you can record it by exporting it to an AVI file that you can play with any available video player. you can also specify the height of the camera along the walkthrough path. independent of the Revit Structure software. Recording a Walkthrough After you create a walkthrough. You can edit the walkthrough path by selecting and moving the key frames. you learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of your building models in Revit Structure 2009. you can select one of the following display options for the building model in your walkthrough: ■ ■ ■ Wireframe Hidden Line (wireframe view with hidden lines) Shading 726 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . The walkthrough path is a spline.

Create a walkthrough of the first floor of the building model 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 3 To create the walkthrough in a 3D perspective view.rvt. on the Options Bar. you learn how to create and edit a walkthrough of the first floor of a townhouse. click Walkthrough. click Settings ➤ Project Units. proceeds through the dining room. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. and change unit formats as desired. and click the tab in the context menu. verify that Perspective is selected. and click to specify the start point (the first key frame) of the walkthrough. expand Views (all). 4 Move the cursor under the text label in the Breakfast room. expand Floor Plans. and double-click 1st Floor. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 5 Specify 4 additional points to define key frame positions on the walkthrough path as shown. You create a walkthrough that begins in the breakfast room of the townhouse. NOTE Some imperial values are used by default in this exercise.■ ■ Shading with Edges Rendering Creating a Walkthrough In this exercise. and ends in the far corner of the living room. and open Common\c_Townhouse. right-click in the Design Bar. If you prefer to use metric values. Creating a Walkthrough | 727 .

expand Views (all) ➤ Walkthroughs. on the Options Bar. Edit and play the walkthrough 7 In the Project Browser. 728 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . The last frame of the walkthrough is displayed. and double-click Walkthrough 1.6 After you specify the final point of the walkthrough path in the Living room. Your frame may look a bit different from the frame in the illustration because the walkthrough path is not precisely the same. surrounded by a crop boundary with grips as shown. click Finish.

for Width. click Edit Walkthrough. and click OK. If it is not. select the crop boundary. 17 Click . click the dimensions for Size. for Frame. 13 On the Options Bar. The walkthrough controls are displayed on the Options Bar. enter 60 to reduce the total number of frames in the walkthrough from 300 to 60. enter 16''. and press ENTER to set the walkthrough to play from the beginning (the key frame). on the Options Bar. and for Height. 16 On the Options Bar. and click OK. The frame that is displayed is frame 300 of a total of 300 frames. enter 1.8 Verify that the crop boundary of the walkthrough frame is selected and is displayed as red with blue grips. 11 Under Change. 10 In the Crop Region Size dialog. Two options are displayed on the Options Bar: Edit Walkthrough and Size. enter 9''. 14 Click . 9 To change the size of the walkthrough frame crop region. and select the crop boundary. 15 In the Walkthrough Frames dialog. Creating a Walkthrough | 729 . click Zoom ➤ Zoom Out (2x). verify that Field of view is selected. 12 On the View menu.

click (Element Properties). Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position In this exercise. 730 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position on page 730. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit Walkthrough. Change the properties of the camera 1 In the Project Browser. proceed to the next exercise. under Floor Plans. press ESC.The walkthrough plays. under Extents. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. you learn how to edit the walkthrough path and change the camera position in the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise.rvt. NOTE To stop playing the walkthrough at any time. clear Far Clip Active. The camera is displayed at the first key frame position on the walkthrough path in the breakfast room. 18 When the walkthrough stops playing. c_Townhouse. The walkthrough path is displayed in the floor plan of the first floor. double-click 1st Floor. The current display is wireframe with hidden lines. and click OK. 2 On the Options Bar. Edit the walkthrough path 4 On the Options Bar. Clearing this option disables the far clipping plane of the camera.

5 Select the target point of the camera (the magenta grip). You can move any camera target or key frame position. and drag it to the location shown. so do not be concerned if the camera displays at a slightly different location. for Controls. 7 Click the third key frame position. and adjust it to view the kitchen as shown. Your walkthrough path may vary from the one in the illustration. 6 On the Options Bar. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position | 731 . select Path. Blue grips are displayed at each key frame.

7 Try creating other walkthroughs. If you are unsure of what option to use. 1 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Walkthrough. for Compressor. When you export the walkthrough. . 3 Under Format. click Edit Walkthrough. enter 15. under Output Length. 8 If you want to save this exercise. If you had 150 frames and a frame rate of 15 seconds. or rendering. under Walkthroughs. 6 Double-click the AVI file to play the walkthrough from the location that you specified previously. you can select to display the walkthrough in wireframe. 5 In the Video Compression dialog. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 9 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. perhaps to 6'' wide x 4'' height. click File menu ➤ Save As. and then click 10 Proceed to the next exercise. and with a frame rate of from 15-30 frames per second.Play the walkthrough to view the changes that you made 8 In the Project Browser. you record the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise by exporting it to an AVI file. The walkthrough is recorded. c_Townhouse. and click OK. shading. reducing the size of the image. on the Options Bar. Reducing the size of the output images and managing the frame rate lets you create realistic and smooth movement. Recording the Walkthrough on page 732. double-click Walkthrough 1. specify a path and a file name for the AVI. specifying the number of frames.rvt. and click OK. for Model Graphics Style. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 4 In the Export Walkthrough dialog. without opening Revit Structure 2009. select <Shading>. 9 To play the walkthrough. It produces files that are larger than compressed files. and click Save. select any codec (compression/decompression) that is available on your system. Recording the Walkthrough In this exercise. NOTE The available Compressor options are specific to your current computer system. for Frames/sec. hidden line. the Full Frames (Uncompressed) option is available to all users. shading with edges. 732 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 2 In the Length/Format dialog. but that do not suffer loss due to compression quality. then you are moving from the breakfast area to the living room window in 10 seconds.

you need to select a work plane to use as a sketching guide. You do not need to create the work plane. you learn how to add fascia. you learn how to create different types of roofs in Revit Structure 2009. Creating Roofs Creating an Extruded Roof You create the roof by sketching the top roof profile and extruding it over the length of the breezeway. gutters. mansard. In this tutorial. Before you can sketch the roof profile. and low sloped roofs. a work plane named Breezeway exists for the purpose of this exercise. you create roofs from footprints and by extrusion. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 733 . including hip.Roofs 23 In this lesson. you learn to create several different types of roofs. In this exercise. shed. In this lesson. you create an extruded roof over a breezeway between a house and a garage. and soffits to the roofs that you create. In addition. gable.

5 In the Go To View dialog. and then click Open View to select a section view parallel to the work plane in which to sketch the roof. and click OK. expand Floor Plans. expand Views (all). 8 Sketch the first reference plane 1'6'' to the left of the left exterior breezeway wall face. The section view is automatically cropped around the area where you want to sketch the roof. you need to define four reference planes to help determine key points on the profile sketch. and double-click Level 1. 3 In the Work Plane dialog. 4 Click OK. select Name. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. click Training Files.rvt. click Ref Plane. Before you can sketch the profile of the roof. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and then select Reference Plane : Breezeway. 1 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\i_Roofs. 734 | Chapter 23 Roofs .■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 In the Roof Reference Level and Offset dialog. verify that Section: Section1 is selected. verify Level 3 is selected for Level.

10 Sketch a vertical reference plane centered between the two vertical walls. centerline. and so on). you can place it in the general location and then zoom in and use temporary dimensions. Creating an Extruded Roof | 735 . 9 Sketch a similar reference plane 1'6" to the right of the right exterior breezeway wall face. click the blue square on the witness line. This helps ensure that the plane is measured from the face of the wall rather than from the wall centerline. 11 Sketch a horizontal reference plane 1'6" below Level 2. To change where the temporary dimension is measured from (face.TIP Instead of trying to place the reference plane in its exact location initially.

736 | Chapter 23 Roofs .Next. 14 Sketch two sloped lines to create the roof profile. Use automatic snaps to link the chain to the reference plane intersections. click Finish Sketch to complete the roof. 13 On the Options Bar. sketch the roof profile. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 16 On the View toolbar. select Chain. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Lines. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. Begin the sketch at the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the horizontal plane. The roof is automatically extruded from the Breezeway work plane in one direction.

expand Sections (Type 1). Use the Join Roof command again to join the opposite end of the breezeway roof to the exterior wall of the house that joins the breezeway. 19 On the Tools toolbar. press TAB. click (Join/Unjoin Roof). Creating an Extruded Roof | 737 . 23 Select one of the breezeway walls. expand Views (all). The breezeway walls still penetrate the roof. 20 Select the breezeway roof edge. click Modify. 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. press CTRL. and double-click Section 1. 17 On the Tools toolbar. The roof should resemble the following illustration. 18 Select the edge of the roof. and select the second wall. 21 In the Project Browser. use the Join Roofs command to adjust the length of the roof and join the roof edges to the exterior walls. so you next attach the breezeway walls to the breezeway roof. and then select the exterior wall face of the garage to join the roof to the garage wall. and then select the exterior face of the wall. Next. click (Join/Unjoin Roof).Notice that the breezeway roof penetrates the house walls inappropriately.

click model. (Default 3D View) to view the completed breezeway roof in the 27 Proceed to the next exercise. 738 | Chapter 23 Roofs . 25 Select the roof to join the wall tops to the roof. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint on page 738.24 On the Options Bar. 26 On the View toolbar. click Attach for Top/Base. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. you create a gable roof over a garage from a footprint.

click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. Next. 3 In the Project Browser. You use roof slope lines to define the roof gable ends.rvt.You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. sketch the roof footprint. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and double-click Garage Roof. i_Roofs. 6 Select the left vertical wall of the garage to define the first roof slope line. the roof is automatically created on the lowest level of the house and a notification dialog is displayed. verify that Defines slope is selected. expand Floor Plans. Verify that a dashed blue line displays to the left of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint | 739 . click Pick Walls. 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click Yes. 5 On the Options Bar. Because you are in a three-dimensional view. you set the roof slope as a property of the footprint slope lines. 2 Select Garage Roof to move the roof to the correct level. expand Views (all). To complete the gable roof with the correct pitch. and enter 2' 0'' for Overhang.

The Element Properties dialog is displayed. 9 Select the two horizontal walls to create a closed loop and complete the roof footprint. By default. click the model. and on the Options Bar. the roof slope has a 9'' rise over a 12'' run. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint on page 741. select both slope definition lines. Verify that a dashed blue line displays to the right of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. click (Properties). under Dimensions. click Modify. click Finish Roof. enter 6'' for Rise/12" to change the roof slope. 15 On the View toolbar. Next. 11 Press CTRL. click Yes to attach the highlighted exterior garage walls to the roof. 14 When you see the informational dialog. (Default 3D View) to view the gable roof and attached walls in 16 Proceed to the next exercise. 10 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. 13 On the Design Bar. clear Defines slope. 8 On the Options Bar. edit the properties of the two vertical slope definition lines to change the roof pitch. 740 | Chapter 23 Roofs .7 Select the parallel wall on the right to define the second roof slope line. 12 In the Element Properties dialog.

clear Defines slope.Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint In this exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and then verify that a dashed blue line displays to the exterior side of the walls. and double-click Level 3. you sketch a closed rectangular opening around the chimney. You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. expand Views (all). 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls. After you define the roof slope lines and complete the footprint. press TAB. i_Roofs. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Pick Walls. When you complete the roof. and enter 1' 0'' for Overhang. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. you add a main gable roof to a house from a footprint. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint | 741 . 6 Click to select all the walls. The roof requires an opening to accommodate a chimney. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 3 On the Options Bar. NOTE You add the slope defining lines in a later step. the opening that you sketched becomes a void in the roof. expand Floor Plans. sketch the chimney opening. Next.rvt.

10 On the View menu. add new slope lines to the roof. 18 On the View toolbar. 12 Select the uppermost horizontal line. click Lines. 14 Select one of the shorter line segments shown in the following illustration. sketch a rectangle from the upper left corner of the exterior chimney face to the lower right corner of the exterior chimney face. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 17 When you see the informational dialog. 8 On the Options Bar. click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. click Finish Roof. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit to view the entire floor plan. 15 On the Options bar. click (Rectangle). select Defines Slope. click Modify. 742 | Chapter 23 Roofs . 9 Using automatic snaps. Next. 13 On the Options Bar. click (Default 3D View) to view the new roof in the model.7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. select Defines Slope. 11 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.

Next. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and enter 2' 0'' for Overhang. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 743 . and double-click Level 2. 3 On the Options Bar. expand Floor Plans. clear Defines Slope. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select Defines slope. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. i_Roofs. The sketched lines cannot overlap or intersect each other. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. click Lines. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. and click (Pick Lines). Verify that a dashed blue line displays on the exterior side of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the walls. expand Views (all). Roof sketches must create a closed loop before you can create the roof. you create a hip roof over the rear of a house from a footprint. 7 On the Options Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. close the roof sketch. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.rvt. 5 Select the exterior edges of the three walls that create the rear addition to the house. click Pick Walls.19 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint on page 743.

The Element Properties dialog is displayed.8 Select the exterior edge of the uppermost horizontal wall of the main building. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. click Roof Properties. click Finish Roof. 10 On the Options Bar. 744 | Chapter 23 Roofs . trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. 9 On the Tools toolbar. 11 To trim the first line segment. select the left vertical slope definition line. click (Trim/Extend). and then specify a point near the midpoint of the line that you sketched along the wall of the main building. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. Next. 12 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. raise the roof 2' above the current level. using the following illustration for guidance. enter 2' 0'' for Base Offset From Level. Next. 14 Under Constraints. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and click OK.

16 On the View toolbar. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 745 . 19 Select one of the walls under the hip roof. 22 Using the same method that you used previously. 20 Select the roof to join the wall top to the roof. click Modify. and use the Orbit tool to view the back of the house. 17 On the View toolbar. Use the Attach Top/Base command to join the walls to the roof. and use the Orbit tool to view the remaining walls that support the hip roof. click Attach for Top/Base on the Options Bar. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. 18 On the Design Bar. 21 Click (SteeringWheels). join the two remaining walls to the roof. (Press ESC to close the SteeringWheels. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. Press and hold CTRL to select and join the two remaining walls at the same time. click (SteeringWheels).) Notice that the walls do not join to the roof.

i_Roofs.rvt. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click (Join/Unjoin Roof). 24 Select the edge of the hip roof. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint on page 746. 746 | Chapter 23 Roofs . 23 On the Tools toolbar. use the Join Roof command to fix the roof. and then select the edge of the main roof to join the roofs. you create a shed roof over the entrance to a house from a footprint. The properly joined roof should resemble the following illustration. 25 Proceed to the next exercise.Notice that the new hip roof does not properly join to the back of the house. Next.

1 In the Project Browser. clear Defines Slope. and double-click Level 2. expand Floor Plans. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. 6 On the Options Bar. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint | 747 . 7 Select the exterior face of the main wall to close the sketch. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. click (Trim/Extend). 11 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. select the left vertical roof line. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. Next. and then click to select all three of the entry way walls. you add a slope-defining line. 9 On the Options Bar. Next. 8 On the Tools toolbar. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. 3 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. and then select a point near the midpoint of the upper horizontal line you sketched earlier. 4 On the Options Bar. press TAB. 10 To trim the first line segment. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls that defines the entry way. Verify that a blue dashed line displays around the exterior side of the walls before clicking to select the walls. enter 0' 0'' for Overhang. click Pick Walls. expand Views (all). and enter 1' 0'' for Overhang. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

and double-click 3D. expand Floor Plans. enter -2' 0'' for Base Offset From Level. and click OK. 3 On the Options Bar. expand Views (all). 13 On the Options Bar. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. click 20 On the View toolbar. expand 3D Views. expand Views (all). click Modify. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.rvt. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof on page 748. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. click Roof Properties. and double-click Level 2. and select the lower horizontal line at the front of the roof. and use the Orbit tool to rotate the model. you add slope arrows to the shed roof. 4 In the Project Browser. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. 14 Enter 6" for the rise value to change the roof slope. select Defines slope. click Edit to activate the roof footprint sketch. and press ENTER. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 16 Under Constraints. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof In this exercise. 18 Click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. i_Roofs. 1 In the Project Browser. 19 On the View toolbar.12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. (SteeringWheels). Notice the rise value is displayed next to the slope marker. 748 | Chapter 23 Roofs . 2 Select the shed roof over the entrance of the house.

change the longest slope line segment (the middle segment) so that it no longer defines slope. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. 11 On the Design Bar. and select the middle segment of the slope defining line. and enter 2' 0'' for Offset. verify ■ (Draw) is selected. 14 On the Options Bar. add two new slope arrows. Next. To help locate the position of each split. ■ 16 Repeat steps 13 . 7 On the Options Bar. clear Defines Slope. 9 On the Tools menu. you need to add two reference planes. and then select it to specify the location of the slope arrow head. Before you can add slope arrows. 15 Sketch a slope arrow from the reference plane to the midpoint of the lower horizontal roof line: Select the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the roof line to specify the location of the slope arrow tail. 12 On the Options Bar. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 10 Split the slope defining line where the reference planes intersect as shown in the following illustration. click Modify. click Slope Arrow. click Ref Plane. click (Pick Lines). Move the cursor along the roof line until the midpoint displays. click Split Walls and Lines. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof | 749 .15 to add the second slope arrow. Next. you need to split the slope defining line into three segments. Verify that the reference planes are located inside the shed roof sketch.5 On the View menu. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and zoom in around the shed roof footprint. 8 Select the two vertical sketch lines.

click Finish Roof to complete the roof. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 4 Select the two gable end lines (the lines without slope definition).Begin the tail at the right reference plane. This dimension is the height of the eave measured from the sketch plane. The eave lines display with a dimension. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. When aligning eaves. 6 With the two gable end lines selected. When eave heights differ. expand Floor Plans. 750 | Chapter 23 Roofs . click 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 3 On the Options Bar. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. and double-click Garage Roof. select Slope for Specify. 18 Press CTRL. you must select one eave to use to align both eaves. and click 19 Under Constraints. 2 Select the gable roof over the garage. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. i_Roofs. When you sketch a hip roof. expand Views (all). click Align Eaves. Aligning Roof Eaves on page 750. and then click OK. 21 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. you convert the gable roof over the garage to a hip roof and use the Align Eaves tool to adjust the eave heights. enter 12'' for Rise/12". use the Attach Top/Base command to join the wall to the roof. 5 On the Options Bar. 20 Under Dimensions. click Edit. 1 In the Project Browser. Aligning Roof Eaves In this exercise. NOTE If the front wall is separated from the roof. and move the cursor to place the arrow. select both slope arrows. 22 Click (Default 3D View) on the View toolbar to display the model. you can use the Align Eaves tool to align them. enter 6'' for Rise/12". on the Options Bar. select Defines Slope. (Properties). 9 Select the left vertical eave to use to align the eaves. click Modify.rvt. under Dimensions. (Properties). the adjacent eave heights must align. The head should snap to the midpoint of the line as in the previous steps. and click OK.

select Adjust Overhang to align the eaves by adjusting the overhang to match the eave height of the first eave. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Mansard Roof In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\i_Mansard_Roof. 14 If you want to save your changes. Creating a Mansard Roof on page 751. 12 On the Design Bar. click Finish Roof.Next. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. select a method to align the eaves. Creating a Mansard Roof | 751 . on the File menu. click Training Files. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 15 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. click Save As.rvt. Notice how the overhang adjusts to match the eave height of the first eave. you create a mansard roof by cutting off a hip roof at a specific level and adding another roof on top of it. 10 On the Options Bar. 13 On the View toolbar. 11 Select both the horizontal eave lines.

click Lines. Notice the model has four defined levels: In the next steps. click 5 Click OK to cut the top of the roof off at level 3. 7 In the Project Browser. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select Level 3 for Cutoff Level. 752 | Chapter 23 Roofs . create a new roof that starts at level 3 and completes the mansard roof. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. expand Views (all). expand Elevations. 3 Select the roof and. click Modify. 9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. (Properties).1 In the Project Browser. you constrain the current roof so it does not rise above Level 3. expand Views (all). on the Options Bar. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. under Constraints. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 6 On the View toolbar. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. expand Floor Plans. Next. and double-click North. and double-click Level 3.

15 In the Element Properties dialog. and select the remaining three lines. press TAB. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 13 Select one of the roof cutoff lines. Creating a Low Slope Roof on page 754. Creating a Mansard Roof | 753 . click Finish Roof.10 On the Options Bar. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. click Save As. 14 On the Options Bar. enter 3'' for Rise/12". click . click (Pick Lines). and click OK. 19 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. and then select Defines slope. 11 Select the four edges of the roof cutoff. click Modify. (Default 3D View) to display the model with the complete 18 If you want to save your changes. 17 On the View toolbar. click mansard roof. on the File menu. under Dimensions.

754 | Chapter 23 Roofs . In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Pick Walls. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.Creating a Low Slope Roof In this exercise. you add a roof to a building shell. you modify the slab to represent roof drains in the low slope roof. click Training Files. double-click Roof. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. Create a flat roof by footprint 1 In the Project Browser. After you add the roof. under Floor Plans.rvt. You also modify the structure of the roof slab to more accurately represent the tapered insulation condition used to create the roof drainage system. NOTE This exercise uses a common training file and Imperial units. 3 On the Design Bar. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Common\c_Low_Slope_Roof.

7 On the Tools toolbar. you cannot use TAB to select the chain of walls. 5 In the drawing area.4 On the Options Bar. Instead you select walls on each side of the building and then use the Trim tool to create a closed loop sketch. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 755 . select the interior face of the curved wall on the right. Because the walls are not continuous. verify that Defines slope is not selected. and that Overhang is 0' 0''. click (Trim/Extend). 6 Select the interior face of a wall segment on each side of the building and 1 on either side of the arc wall at the entry.

Open a section view 12 In the drawing area. 756 | Chapter 23 Roofs . 11 On the Design Bar. and click OK.Insulation on Metal Deck .8 Select the walls to create a closed loop. for Type.EPDM. 13 Zoom in to the upper left area of the roof. click Finish Roof. select Steel Truss . double-click the section head to open the section view. as shown: 9 On the Design Bar. click Roof Properties. 10 In the Element Properties dialog.

Add split lines to segment the roof 14 In the Project Browser.The roof has been created. and click to select it. click (Draw Split Lines). but it is a flat object with no slope or indication of roof drainage. 16 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. you alter the shape of the slab to represent a roof drainage layout. In the next steps. double-click Roof. 17 Select the midpoint of the top horizontal roof line. and select the midpoint of the bottom horizontal roof line Creating a Low Slope Roof | 757 . You use this tool to split the roof slab into 6 regions so that you can modify the slope independently. 18 Move the cursor down. 15 Use the TAB key to highlight the roof.

Next. add a second horizontal split line beginning at the top endpoint of the arc.You create a split line vertically down the center. 758 | Chapter 23 Roofs . The roof is now divided into 6 sections. and select a point on the opposite roof line. you begin to shape the slab by adding points for the roof drains and modifying the elevations of the points and edges. 20 Using the same method. on the Options Bar. (Add points). 19 Select the lower endpoint of the arc line. Add elevation points 21 With the roof still selected. click 22 Click to add a point close to the center of each section. move the cursor horizontally to the left.

exact placement of the points is not important. You could also select multiple points and change them all at once from the Options Bar.In this exercise. The dimensional value is relative to the roof plane. 25 Using the same method. 23 On the Options Bar. specify a -2'' dimension for the remaining 5 points. for the dimension. 24 Select the point in the upper left region of the roof. and press ENTER. click (Modify Sub-Elements). You modify the points individually. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 759 . enter -2''. Layout tools in Revit Structure such as reference planes and dimensions can be used to more accurately place editing points on a roof slab.

29 On the Design Bar. 27 Press and hold CTRL. and press ENTER. enter 4''. click Modify. Edit the roof edges 26 On the Options Bar. as shown: 28 On the Options Bar. for Elevation.The lines on the roof now represent the ridges of the deformed slab shape. including the interior edges of the roof regions. and select all of the roof edges. click (Modify Sub-Elements). 760 | Chapter 23 Roofs .

33 In the Type Properties dialog. the slope will be accommodated in the insulation layer. The slab has not responded exactly as intended. under Construction. You edit the construction of the slab type to achieve this result.Clicking Modify or pressing ESC exits the editing mode and the shape edits are applied to the slab. In some cases this type of slope is desired. 34 In the Edit Assembly dialog. click Edit. Modify the construction of the slab type 30 In the drawing area. double-click the section head to view the additional affects of the shape editing. click Edit/New. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. click (Properties). 31 Select the roof slab. leaving the other layers to maintain the original plane of placement for the roof. but in this case you want the insulation layer to create the slope. By making the insulation layer variable. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 761 . for the Thermal/Air Layer. 35 Click OK 3 times. 36 View the results in the section view. for Structure. select Variable. and on the Options Bar. The entire slab is sloped.

rfa. gutters. and Soffits In this lesson.The insulation now tapers from the edges to the drain in the center. and open Common\c_Condominium.rvt. gutters. click (Properties). click Save As. select Fascia-Built-Up. 1 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. 762 | Chapter 23 Roofs . Creating Fascia. and open Imperial\Families\Profiles\Roofs. you learn to use the Host Sweep command to create fascia on the roof of a condominium. you can easily create its fascia. After you create a roof. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. 5 On the Options Bar. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Gutters. Creating Fascia. you learn how to create roof fascia. click Training Files. and soffits. and soffits in Revit Structure. Gutters.rfa and Gutter Profile-Cove. on the File menu. and click Open. 38 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. click Edit/New to access the type properties of the fascia. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Creating Roof Fascia In this exercise. 3 Press CTRL. 37 If you want to save your changes. and Soffits on page 762. 39 Proceed to the next lesson. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia.

and click OK twice. select Fascia-Built-Up: 1 x 12 w 1 x 8 for Profile. click Modify to exit the Fascia command. Creating Gutters on page 764. and click OK. 14 Proceed to the next exercise. under Construction. 13 On the Design Bar. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. 11 Select the top edge of the roof to place the fascia. 10 Move the cursor to the top edge of the roof. 12 Select all of the roof top edges to place the fascia around the building. Creating Roof Fascia | 763 . enter Built-up Fascia.7 In the Type Properties dialog. 8 In the Name dialog. click Duplicate.

1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. you use the Host Sweep command to place a gutter at the bottom edge of the roof on a condominium building model. under Construction. 5 Enter Cove Shape Gutter for Name. and click OK. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. . and click OK three times. 2 On the Options Bar. 3 In the Properties dialog. 7 Under Materials and Finishes. click Edit/New. c_Condominium.rvt. click Duplicate. 9 Move the cursor to the bottom edge of the roof. and then click 8 In the Materials dialog. click in the Value field for Material. select Metal-Aluminum for Name. click (Properties). 764 | Chapter 23 Roofs .Creating Gutters In this exercise. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. 10 Click to place the gutter. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Gutter. select Gutter-Bevel: 5'' x 5'' for Profile.

You add the soffit underneath the roof of the condominium building model that you used in the previous exercise. Creating Soffits on page 765. 1 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Roof. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.rvt. click Pick Roofs. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating Soffits | 765 . expand Views. click Roof ➤ Roof Soffit. c_Condominium. you learn how to place a roof soffit. Creating Soffits In this exercise. 3 On the Design Bar.11 Continue to add gutters to the other roof edges of the building model.

click Join Geometry. 766 | Chapter 23 Roofs . expand 3D Views. and double-click 3D. 5 On the Design Bar. 8 Select the roof.4 Select the roof. expand Views (all). and then select the soffit to join them. click Finish Sketch. Notice that the geometry of the roof and the soffit overlap. 7 On the Tools menu. 6 In the Project Browser.

Creating Soffits | 767 .9 If you want to save your changes. on the File menu. click Save As. 10 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. and save the exercise file with a unique name.

768 .

Modifications to the nested group are automatically included in the host group. when you make changes to a single instance of a model group. you not only simplify their placement. By grouping objects. In another exercise.Grouping 24 Using the grouping functionality in Revit Structure. When you make changes to a nested group. Examples of the types of units for which groups are intended include condominium units. In this exercise. you place 2 new instances of the kitchen group in the floor plan. and modify repetitive units. you learn how to use model groups to collect related elements to simplify placement of repetitive units. Because existing groups can be duplicated and then customized for another purpose. and typical office layouts. and all new instances that you place contain the modifications. place. The new group is considered nested within the host group. hotel rooms. you also simplify the modification process. you can create reusable entities that represent layouts common to many building projects. all instances in the building model are updated. the host group is also updated automatically. and is contained in every instance of the host group that you place in the building model. you add the new model group to a previously created group. or with those working on a different project. In this tutorial. Creating. Creating and Placing a Group In this exercise. you can place instances of the group in the building model using various methods. 769 . and rotate the other instance to modify the layout position. and Nesting Groups In this lesson. For example. creating a library of groups for your office can reduce the amount of work needed to create. you create a model group for a typical kitchen. Modifying. It also gives all those with access to the library the ability to load any group from the library into their project drawing. You can also update all instances of a group in the building model by editing a single instance of the group and saving the changes. you create a model group for a typical kitchen for a condominium unit. After you create a model group. This functionality ensures consistency within and across projects. You mirror one instance of the group. You can also nest groups within other groups. Saving a group to a library gives you the ability to share the group with other team members working on the same project. You create the group by selecting drawing objects and grouping them as a single entity. and then you nest the kitchen in a 2 bedroom condominium unit group.

expand Views (all). Create a group for the typical kitchen layout 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter ZR. click Training Files. 2 Click in the drawing area. 770 | Chapter 24 Grouping .rvt.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and zoom to the kitchen in the upper-left area of the floor plan. and double-click First Floor. and open Imperial\i_Groups-Condominium. expand Floor Plans. NOTE You may need to scroll the left pane to see the Training Files folder.

and click OK. enter Typical Kitchen. 5 In the Create Model Group dialog. Creating and Placing a Group | 771 . 4 On the Edit toolbar. The objects are now grouped and can be placed in the drawing as a single entity. click (Group).3 Draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the kitchen.

772 | Chapter 24 Grouping . 7 On the Design Bar. select the center control for the group origin. 8 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit.Change the origin point for the group 6 In the drawing area. click Modify. and drag it to the upper-right corner of the kitchen.

13 Select the first instance of the Typical Kitchen group that you just placed. and click Create Instance. 12 On the Design Bar. right-click Typical Kitchen. expand Model.Place instances of the group 9 In the Project Browser. and click the upper-left corner of the lower unit to place the kitchen group. 10 Zoom to the center of the floor plan. Creating and Placing a Group | 773 . under Groups. 11 Click in the upper-right corner of the stairwell to place a second instance. click Modify.

click (Mirror). The kitchen is now positioned correctly in the floor plan. NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following image. 15 On the Options Bar. 16 Select the adjacent wall near the sink as the axis of reflection. 774 | Chapter 24 Grouping . clear Copy.14 On the Edit toolbar. select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments.

and on the Edit toolbar.17 Select the kitchen in the stairwell. Creating and Placing a Group | 775 . 19 Click above the right area of the kitchen to rotate the placement. click (Rotate). 18 Click in the drawing area to the left of the kitchen.

one mirrored. click Modify.NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following images. 20 On the Design Bar. You should now have three instances of the Typical Kitchen group in your model: one with the original orientation. 776 | Chapter 24 Grouping . 21 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments. and one rotated. as shown.

and click to select it. Modifying a Group | 777 .Save the training file 22 On the File menu. and click Save. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. When you finish editing. you make changes to an instance of a group.rvt. 23 Navigate to your preferred directory. click Save As. name the file i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. Modifying a Group In this exercise.rvt. Modify visibility of elements in a group 1 Zoom in to the kitchen on the right above the stair. all instances of the same group in the drawing are updated. 2 Move the cursor over the wall to the left of the kitchen. press TAB to highlight the wall.

778 | Chapter 24 Grouping . click Modify. press TAB. NOTE To display an excluded element. Click icon to exclude in this group instance. and click to select the door. 4 Move the cursor over the door. press TAB. Click icon to exclude in this group instance. (Restore excluded group 5 Click (Group Member.). and click to select the wall.). 8 On the Design Bar.). and click member to group instance. 7 Click (Group Member. select the element. 6 Move the cursor over the horizontal wall. Click icon to exclude in this group instance.).3 Click (Group Member. This element remains in the group but is not visible in the project view for this group instance.

click Wall. clear Tag on Placement.Add elements for a unique condition 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 12 On the Design Bar. 13 In the Type Selector. 14 On the Options Bar. 15 Click in the new wall on the left and on the right to place 2 sets of folding doors for a closet. click Modify. move the cursor to the left. Modifying a Group | 779 . and click to draw a horizontal wall that extends to the left vertical wall. click Door. select Bifold-4 Panel : 48'' x 84''. 10 Click at the endpoint of the short vertical wall in the kitchen entrance. 11 On the Design Bar.

move the cursor up. 23 Click near the bottom corner of the wall. 21 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select the vertical wall to the left of the long counter top. Modify geometry of a group and have changes display in all group instances 18 Zoom in to the kitchen in the left area of the floor plan. click Edit Group. and the group editor toolbar initially displays in the upper left corner. the background color of the drawing area is pale yellow.16 On the Design Bar. and click near the top corner of the wall to create an opening. 780 | Chapter 24 Grouping . select Opening ➤ Wall Opening. The elements in this instance of the group remain displayed in their object style. click Modify. 17 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. 20 On the Options Bar. 19 Select the Typical Kitchen group. All other elements in the model are grayed out. In edit group mode. 22 In the drawing area.

which acts as the host. you add the Typical Kitchen group. under Constraints. and click OK. enter 7'. enter 3' 4''. When you nest the kitchen in the 2 bedroom unit. All instances of the Typical Kitchen are updated to reflect the change. 28 On the group editor toolbar. 26 In the Element Properties dialog. Nesting Groups | 781 . click Modify. and on the Options Bar. click 27 For Base Offset. and the wall and folding doors for the closet.24 On the Design Bar. created in an earlier lesson. to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. The kitchen group is then nested within the 2 bedroom unit group. Nesting Groups In this exercise. 25 Select the opening. (Element Properties). 29 Click File menu ➤ Save. for Unconnected Height. click Finish. all instances of the host group are updated to contain the nested group.

in the Project Browser.Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. double-click First Floor.rvt. select the Typical Kitchen group. 5 In the drawing area. Add elements to an existing group 1 If necessary. 4 On the group editor toolbar. 3 On the Options Bar. click Edit Group. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. 782 | Chapter 24 Grouping . 2 Select the 2 Bedroom Unit group in the top area of the floor plan. under Floor Plans. click (Add to Group).

under Floor Plans. 9 Select the 2 bedroom group. Notice that the Typical Kitchen and pantry are nested within the 2 bedroom group. 7 On the group editor toolbar. 8 In the Project Browser. Nesting Groups | 783 .6 Press TAB. double-click Second Floor. and each of the bifold doors. click Finish. select the wall between the folding doors.

Attached detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements that are associated with a specific model group. Creating a Detail Group In this exercise. Draw a filled region 1 In the Project Browser. You then save the region and the text note as a detail group. Detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements. 2 Zoom in to the stair area in the center of the floor plan. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. You can add the detail group to other views of the building model. Working with Detail Groups In this lesson. such as door and window tags. double-click First Floor. such as text. You work with the attached detail group in a different way than you had previously worked with host and nested groups because attached detail groups require more manual manipulation. You create a detail group in the First Floor plan and add the group to the Second Floor plan of the building model. In the next exercise. 784 | Chapter 24 Grouping . under Floor Plans. you sketch and annotate a rectangular filled region that represents an area of tiled flooring in front of the elevators in the building model. and create an attached detail group containing the tags. you add door tags to a group. you work with groups in order to use them in the most efficient manner within and across projects. and filled regions. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise.10 Click File menu ➤ Save.rvt.

Creating a Detail Group | 785 . click Finish Sketch. 7 On the Design Bar. 4 On the Options Bar. click Filled Region. A rectangular region with a diagonal cross hatch pattern is added in front of the elevator doors. click to draw a rectangular region. and select a point below the left elevator. 5 Click the upper-right endpoint below the elevators as the start point of the rectangle.3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 6 Move the cursor down and to the left.

786 | Chapter 24 Grouping . The text note with arc leader is added to the building model. 15 In the Create Detail Group dialog. as shown. 9 On the Options Bar. 17 Move the origin of the group to the corner of the elevator shaft. and click OK. click (Group). click Text. Create a detail group 13 Press and hold CTRL. click to add an arc leader. and on the Design Bar.Add a text note 8 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select the instance of the Elevator lobby tile group. 10 Click in the filled region to specify the leader start point. enter Elevator Lobby Tile. click Modify. 12 Enter Tile. 11 Click below the filled region to end the leader and specify the text start point. 14 On the Edit toolbar. and select the text note and the filled region. 16 In the drawing area.

Add a group instance to a different view 19 In the Project Browser. double-click Second Floor. under Groups.18 On the Design Bar. you add door tags to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. 24 Click File menu ➤ Save. and then use the door tags to create an attached detail group. Using Attached Detail Groups In this exercise. click to place the detail group in front of the elevators. and click Create Instance. 21 In the drawing area. expand Detail. 20 In the Project Browser. right-click Elevator Lobby Tile. click Modify. Because the detail group contains variables. 22 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. click Modify 23 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. it cannot be added to a group in the same Using Attached Detail Groups | 787 .

i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. click Tag ➤ By Category. double-click First Floor. as shown. 3 On the Options Bar. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. click Modify. Place door tags 1 In the Project Browser. Create an attached detail group 6 In the drawing area.manner that a drawing component can be added. under Floor Plans.rvt. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. NOTE Your door tag numbers may be different. clear Leader. 5 On the Design Bar. draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the right area of the floor plan including the door tags. you must manually attach it to each instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. 788 | Chapter 24 Grouping . 4 Place door tags (10 total) in the original instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit.

click (Filter Selection). 8 In the Filter dialog. for Attached Detail Group Name. enter 2 Bedroom Door Tags. select Door Tags. under Floor Plans. click Check None. and view that Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags is attached. click (Group). double-click Second Floor. 9 On the Edit toolbar. expand Groups\Model\2 Bedroom Unit. and click OK. 11 In the Project Browser.7 On the Options Bar. 10 In the Create Model Group and Attached Detail Group dialog. and click OK. Place a detail group in another group instance 12 In the Project Browser. Using Attached Detail Groups | 789 .

you can then work with it in the context of the new project. Training File 790 | Chapter 24 Grouping . Saving and Loading Groups In this exercise.13 Select the model group 2 Bedroom Unit. select Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags. 16 On the Design Bar. you save a typical condominium layout to a library where it can be accessed by other team members for use in other projects. NOTE Component instance numbering is sequential. This enables you to create a library of groups that can be shared with other team members and used on multiple projects. Door Tags are placed on the Second Floor instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. 14 On the Options Bar. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save. therefore. Saving and Loading Groups In this lesson. you save a group to a library so that you can use the group in a new project. When you load the group from the library into a new project. click Modify. You also convert the group instance to a linked file to replace the group with an alternative unit layout. and click OK. 15 In the Attached Detail Group Placement dialog. Using groups from a library ensures consistency and increases productivity for projects that reuse similar typical layouts for repetitive units. the doors are numbered based upon the order in which you placed each group. click Place Detail.

verify that Project is selected. accept the default template file. explaining that duplicate types were found and the types from the new project will be used. expand Groups. 13 Zoom in to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. and click Save. 3 For File name. and expand Model. 12 On the Design Bar.Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. 8 In the Duplicate Types dialog. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. and click Create Instance. right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. Load the group in a new project 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. click OK. or a Revit family file (RFA) if you are working in the Family Editor. You can save a group as a Revit project file (RVT) if you are working in a project. Place an instance of the loaded group 9 In the Project Browser. for Create new. the file is saved as a Revit project file (RVT). 7 In the Load File as Group dialog. A warning dialog displays. click Desktop. select 2 Bedroom Unit. Save a group to a library 1 In the Project Browser. 11 Click in the drawing area to place the group instance. In this case. 10 Right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. verify that Same as group name is selected. 2 In the left pane of the Save Group dialog. click Modify. 5 In the New Project dialog. and click Open. browse to the Desktop. under Groups\Model. and click OK. Saving and Loading Groups | 791 . and click Save Group.rvt.rvt.

21 In the Bind Link Options dialog.rvt. 792 | Chapter 24 Grouping . but the linked model file will still be loaded in the project. When a group is converted to a link. or you can remove it at a later time from the Manage Links dialog. click Modify. 23 In the confirmation dialog. and on the Options Bar. 25 The linked file is converted to a new model group stored in the project. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Yes to replace the existing Typical Kitchen group with the alternate Typical Kitchen group. either the selected group can be used to make a new linked file. expand Revit Links. click OK. 17 On the Design Bar. 24 In the message dialog. and click OK. This message indicates that all instances of the linked model will be deleted from the project. and open Common\c_2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. click Bind. click Remove Link. You can remove the linked file from the project by clicking Remove Link. or the group instance can be replaced with an existing linked file. 20 On the Options Bar. click Use Existing. click Link. select the linked Revit model.rvt file is added as a link to the project. Convert the linked model to a group 19 In the drawing area. verify that Attached Details is selected only. 22 In the Duplicate Types dialog. click Training Files. The 2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. 15 In the Convert Group to Link dialog. and the link is removed.Convert group instance to a linked file 14 Select the group. 18 In the Project Browser. 26 Close the file with or without saving it.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful